E300 Electronic Overload Relay
Bulletin Numbers 193, 592
User Manual
Original Instructions
Important User Information
Read this document and the documents listed in the additional resources section about installation, configuration, and
operation of this equipment before you install, configure, operate, or maintain this product. Users are required to
familiarize themselves with installation and wiring instructions in addition to requirements of all applicable codes, laws,
and standards.
Activities including installation, adjustments, putting into service, use, assembly, disassembly, and maintenance are
required to be carried out by suitably trained personnel in accordance with applicable code of practice.
If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may
be impaired.
In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from
the use or application of this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and
requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or
liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or
software described in this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation,
Inc., is prohibited
Throughout this manual, when necessary, we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations.
Labels may also be on or inside the equipment to provide specific precautions.
WARNING: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous
environment, which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.
ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property
damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard, avoid a hazard, and recognize the consequence.
IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.
SHOCK HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that dangerous
voltage may be present.
BURN HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that surfaces may
reach dangerous temperatures.
ARC FLASH HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a motor control center, to alert people to
potential Arc Flash. Arc Flash will cause severe injury or death. Wear proper Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Follow ALL
Regulatory requirements for safe work practices and for Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 3
Table of Contents
Preface Summary of Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Access Relay Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Additional Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Chapter 1
Overview Module Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Sensing Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Control Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Communication Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Expansion Digital I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Expansion Analog I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Expansion Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Expansion Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Thermal Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Overtemperature Protection (PTC and RTD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Phase Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Ground (Earth) Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Stall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Jam (Overcurrent). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Underload (Undercurrent). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Current Imbalance (Asymmetry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Remote Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Voltage Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Analog Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Current Monitoring Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Voltage, Power, and Energy Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Diagnostic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Status Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Inputs/Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Test/Reset Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Single/Three-Phase Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
EtherNet/IP Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
DeviceNet Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Modular Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Communication Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Diagnostic Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Simplified Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Sensing Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Control Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Communication Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Optional Add-On Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Optional Expansion I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Optional Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Optional Expansion Bus Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Protection Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Table of Contents
Standard Current-based Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Ground Fault Current-based Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Voltage- and Power-based Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Thermal-based Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Chapter 2
Diagnostic Station Navigation Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Displaying a Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Parameter Group Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Linear List Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
System Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Editing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Editing a Configuration Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Editing a Numeric Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Editing a Bit Enumerated Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Programmable Display Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Display Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Stopping the Display Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Automatic Trip and Warning Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Chapter 3
System Operation and
Configuration
Device Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Option Match. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Digital I/O Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Analog I/O Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Option Match Action (Parameter 233). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Security Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
I/O Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Input Assignments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Output Assignments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Output Relay Configuration States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Output Relay Protection Fault Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Output Relay Communication Fault Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Output Relay Communication Idle Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Expansion Bus Fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Emergency Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Diagnostic Station User-defined Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Display Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Analog I/O Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Analog Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Analog Output Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Network Start Configuration States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Network Start Communication Fault Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 5
Table of Contents
Network Start Communication Idle Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Introduction to Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Chapter 4
Operating Modes Overload Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Overload (Network) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Overload (Operator Station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Overload (Local I/O) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Overload (Custom). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Non-reversing Starter Operating Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Non-reversing Starter (Network) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Non-reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Non-reversing Starter (Operator Station). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Non-reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback . . . . . 64
Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control. . . . . . . 65
Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control
with Feedback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control . . . . . 68
Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) –
Three-wire Control with Feedback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) . . . . . . . . 71
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station)
with Feedback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) –
Two-wire Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) with Feedback –
Two-wire Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) –
Three-wire Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) with Feedback –
Three-wire Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Non-reversing Starter (Custom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Reversing Starter Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Reversing Starter (Network). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Reversing Starter (Operator Station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback . . . . . . . . . . 87
Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Reversing Starter (Local I/O) –
Two-wire Control with Feedback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control. . . . . . . . . . 92
Reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station). . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control 96
Reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Three-wire Control 97
Reversing Starter (Custom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Two-speed Starter Operating Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Two-speed Starter (Network) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
6 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Table of Contents
Two-speed Starter (Network) with Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Two-speed Starter (Operator Station). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Two-speed Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback. . . . . . . . 106
Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control. . . . . . . . . 108
Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) –
Two-wire Control with Feedback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control . . . . . . . 111
Two-speed Starter (Network & Operator Station) . . . . . . . . . . 113
Two-speed Starter (Network & Local I/O) –
Two-wire Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Two-speed Starter (Network & Local I/O) –
Three-wire Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Monitor Operating Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Monitor (Custom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Chapter 5
Protective Trip and Warning
Functions
Current Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Current Trip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Current Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Overload Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Phase Loss Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Ground Fault Current Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Stall Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Jam Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Underload Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Current Imbalance Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Line Undercurrent Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Line Overcurrent Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Line Loss Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Voltage Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Voltage Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Voltage Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Undervoltage Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Overvoltage Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Voltage Imbalance Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Phase Rotation Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Frequency Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Power Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Power Trip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Power Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Real Power (kW) Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Reactive Power (kVAR) Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Apparent Power (kVA) Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Power Factor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Control Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Control Trip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Control Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 7
Table of Contents
Test Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Thermistor (PTC) Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
DeviceLogix Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Operator Station Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Remote Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Start Inhibit Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Preventive Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Hardware Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Contactor Feedback Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Nonvolatile Storage Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Test Mode Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Analog Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Analog Trip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Analog Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Analog Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Chapter 6
Commands Trip Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Configuration Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Factory Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Clear Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Chapter 7
Metering and Diagnostics Device Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Current Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Voltage Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Power Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Energy Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Analog Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Trip / Warning History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Trip History Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Trip History Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Warning History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Warning History Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Trip Snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Chapter 8
DeviceLogix™ Functionality Output Relay Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
DeviceLogix Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Chapter 9
EtherNet/IP Communication Network Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Set the IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
EtherNet/IP Node Address Selection Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Assign Network Parameters via the BOOTP/ DHCP Utility 173
8 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Table of Contents
Assign Network Parameters Via a Web Browser and
MAC Scanner Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Web Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Web Server Security and System Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Permanently Enable the Web Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
View and Configure Parameters via the Web Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
View Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Edit Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Back up/Restore Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Integration with Logix-based Controllers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Configure an E300 Relay in a Logix Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Access I/O Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
E-mail/Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
E-mail Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Text Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Chapter 10
DeviceNet Communication DeviceNet Node Commissioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Setting the Hardware Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Using RSNetWorx for DeviceNet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Using the Node Commissioning Tool of RSNetWorx for
DeviceNet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Produced and Consumed Assembly Configurations . . . . . . . . . 194
Mapping the Scanner to the Scan List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Commissioning the Protection Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
DeviceLogix Interface in RSNetWorx for DeviceNet. . . . . . . . . . . . 199
E3/E3 Plus Overload Emulation Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Chapter 11
Firmware and EDS Files Firmware Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Updating Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) File Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Download the EDS File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Install the EDS File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Chapter 12
Troubleshooting Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Module Status (MS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Network Status (NS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Trip/Warn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Reset a Trip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Trip/Warn LED Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 9
Table of Contents
Appendix A
Wiring Diagrams E300 Wiring Configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Appendix B
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP)
Objects
Identity Object — CLASS CODE 0x0001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Message Router — CLASS CODE 0x0002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Assembly Object — CLASS CODE 0x0004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Instance 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Instance 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Instance 120 - Configuration Assembly Revision 2 . . . . . . . . . . 235
Instance 120 - Configuration Assembly Revision 1 . . . . . . . . . . 244
Instance 144 – Default Consumed Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Instance 198 - Current Diagnostics Produced Assembly . . . . . 244
Instance 199 - All Diagnostics Produced Assembly . . . . . . . . . . 246
Connection Object — CLASS CODE 0x0005 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Discrete Input Point Object — CLASS CODE 0x0008 . . . . . 251
Discrete Output Point Object — CLASS CODE 0x0009. . . . 252
Analog Input Point Object — CLASS CODE 0x000A . . . . . . 253
Parameter Object — CLASS CODE 0x000F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Parameter Group Object — CLASS CODE 0x0010 . . . . . . . . 255
Discrete Output Group Object — CLASS CODE 0x001E . . 256
Control Supervisor Object — CLASS CODE 0x0029. . . . . . . 257
Overload Object — CLASS CODE 0x002c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Base Energy Object — CLASS CODE 0x004E . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Electrical Energy Object — CLASS CODE 0x004F . . . . . . . . . 259
Wall Clock Time Object — CLASS CODE 0x008B . . . . . . . . 262
DPI Fault Object — CLASS CODE 0x0097 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
DPI Warning Object — CLASS CODE 0x0098 . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
MCC Object — CLASS CODE 0x00C2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Appendix C
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies DeviceNet I/O Instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
10 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Table of Contents
Notes:
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 9
Preface
This manual describes how to install, configure, operate, and troubleshoot the
E300™ Electronic Overload Relay.
Summary of Changes
This manual contains new and updated information as indicated in the
following table.
Access Relay Parameters
The spreadsheet that is attached to this PDF details the E300 parameters. To
access this file, click the Attachments link (the paper clip) and double-click the
file.
Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related products
from Rockwell Automation.
You can view or download publications at
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/literature-library/overview.page
.
To order paper copies of technical documentation, contact your local
Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative.
Topic Page
Parameter listing and descriptions Moved to PDF attachment
Accessory information Moved to Technical Data,
publication 193-TD006
DeviceNet Communications Module setup and configuration page 187
Resource Description
E300 Electronic Overload Relay Installation Instructions, publication 193-IN080 Provides complete user information for the E300 Electronic Overload Relay.
E300 Electronic Overload Relay Specifications, publication 193-TD006 Provides complete specifications for the E300 Electronic Overload Relay.
DeviceLogix System User Manual, publication RA-UM003
Provides user information for the DeviceLogix system.
Ethernet Design Considerations Reference Manual, publication ENET-RM002 Provides information about Ethernet basics.
Logix5000 Controllers Messages Programming Manual, publication 1756-PM012 Provides information on Logix controller message MSG instructions.
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1 Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system.
Product Certifications website,
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/certification/overview.page
Provides declarations of conformity, certificates, and other certification details.
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1
Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system.
Product Certifications website, http://www.ab.com Provides declarations of conformity, certificates, and other certification details.
10 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Preface
Notes:
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 11
Chapter 1
Overview
The E300™ Electronic Overload Relay is the newest technology for overload
protection. Its modular design, communication options, diagnostic information,
simplified wiring, and integration into Logix technology make this the ideal overload
for motor control applications in an automation system.
E300 Electronic Overload Relays provide the following benefits:
• Intelligent motor control (EtherNet/IP™ and DeviceNet™ enabled)
• Scalable solution
• Diagnostic Information
• Integrated I/O
• Adjustable trip class 5…30
• Wide current range
• Test/Reset button
• Programmable trip and warning settings
• True RMS current/voltage sensing (50/60 Hz)
• Protection for single- and three-phase motors
The E300 relay consists of three modules: sensing, control and communications. You
have choices in each of the three with additional accessories to tailor the electronic
overload for your application’s exact needs.
Module Descriptions
This section gives a brief overview of the E300 modules.
Sensing Module
Sensing Options
• Voltage/current/ground fault
• Current/ground fault
• Current
Current Range [A]
• 0.5…30
• 6…60
• 10…100
• 20…200
12 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 1 Overview
Control Module
Communication Modules
•EtherNet/IP
•DeviceNet
Expansion Digital I/O
You can add up to four additional expansion digital modules to the E300 relay
expansion bus.
• 4 inputs/2 relay outputs
• 24V DC
• 120V AC
• 240V AC
Expansion Analog I/O
You can add up to four additional expansion analog modules to the E300 relay
expansion bus.
• 3 universal analog inputs/1 analog output
•0…10V
•0…5V
•1…5V
•0…20 mA
•4…20 mA
•RTD (2-wire or 3-wire)
• 0…150
• 0…750
• 0…3000
• 0…6000 (PTC/NTC)
Control Voltage
I/O I/O and Protection
(1)
Inputs Relay Outputs Inputs Relay Outputs
110…120V AC, 50/60 Hz 4 3 2 2
220…240V AC, 50/60 Hz 4 3 2 2
24V DC 6 3 4 2
(1) Includes PTC thermistor and external ground fault.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 13
Overview Chapter 1
Expansion Power Supply
When more than one expansion digital module and one operator station are added to
the E300 relay expansion bus, you need an expansion power supply to supplement
power for the additional modules. One expansion power supply powers a fully loaded
E300 relay expansion bus.
• 120/240V AC
• 24V DC
Expansion Operator Station
You can add one operator station to the E300 relay expansion bus to be used as a user
interface device. The operator stations provide E300 relay status LEDs and function
keys for motor control. The operator stations also support CopyCat™, which allows
you to upload and download E300 relay configuration parameters. See publication
193-061D
for more information about using the CopyCat feature.
• Control station
• Diagnostic station
Features
Thermal Overload
Thermal Utilization
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay provides overload protection through true RMS
current measurement of the individual phase currents of the connected motor. Based
on this information, it calculates a thermal model that simulates the actual heating of
the motor. Percent of thermal capacity utilization (%TCU) reports this calculated
value and is read via a communications network. An overload trip occurs when the
value reaches 100%.
Adjustable Settings
Set up thermal overload protection by programming the motor’s full load current
(FLC) rating and the desired trip class (5…30). Programming of the actual values
through software programming confirms the accuracy of the protection.
Thermal Memory
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay includes a thermal memory circuit that is
designed to approximate the thermal decay for a Trip Class 20 setting. This means that
the thermal model of the connected motor is always maintained, even if the supply
power is removed.
Reset Modes
This flexibility allows you to select between manual and automatic reset for an
overload trip, allowing for broad application. The point of reset is adjustable from
1…100% TCU.
14 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 1 Overview
Time to Trip
During an overload condition, the E300 Electronic Overload Relay provides an
estimated time to trip that is accessible via a communications network. This allows you
to take corrective action so that production may continue uninterrupted.
Time to Reset
Following an overload trip, the E300 Electronic Overload Relay does not reset until the
calculated percentage of thermal capacity utilization falls below the reset level. As this
value decays, the time to reset, which is accessible via a communications network, is
reported.
Thermal Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay provides the capability to alert in the event of an
impending overload trip. A thermal warning bit is set in the Current Warning Status
when the calculated percentage of thermal capacity utilization exceeds the
programmed thermal warning level, which has a setting range of 0…100% TCU.
Two-Speed Protection
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay offers a second FLA setting for 2-speed motor
protection. What used to require two separate overload relays - one for each set of
motor windings - is now accomplished with one device. Improved protection is
delivered as thermal utilization is maintained in one device during operation in both
speeds.
Overtemperature Protection (PTC and RTD)
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay provides motor overtemperature protection with
the added provision for monitoring embedded positive temperature coefficient (PTC)
thermistors with the E300 Control Module and resistance temperature detectors
(RTD) with the E300 Analog Expansion Module. When the monitored PTC
thermistors or RTD sensors exceed the programmed resistance level, the E300
Electronic Overload Relay can issue a Trip and/or Warning event.
Phase Loss
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay offers configurable phase loss protection,
allowing you to enable or disable the function plus set a time delay setting, adjustable
from 0.1…25.0 seconds. The trip level is factory set at a current imbalance
measurement of 100%.
Ground (Earth) Fault
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay incorporates zero sequence (core balance)
sensing into its design for low level (arcing) ground fault detection. Trip and warning
settings are adjustable from 20 mA…5.0 A. For devices rated greater than 200 A and
for ground fault detection less than 0.5 A, the external core balance current
transformer accessory is required. Class I and Class II protection are provided as
defined by UL1053. The E300 Electronic Overload Relay provides a max. trip-inhibit
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 15
Overview Chapter 1
setting, offering flexibility to prevent tripping when the ground fault current
magnitude exceeds 6.5 A. This can be useful to guard against the opening of the
controller when the fault current could potentially exceed the controller's interrupting
capacity rating.
Note: The E300 Electronic Overload Relay is not a Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter
for personnel protection (or Class I) as defined in article 100 of the U.S. National
Electric Code.
Stall
“Stall” is defined as a condition where the motor is not able to reach full-speed
operation in the appropriate amount of time that is required by the application. This
can cause the motor to overheat, because current draw exceeds the motor’s full load
current rating. The E300 Electronic Overload Relay provides user-adjustable stall
protection. The trip setting has a range of 100…600% FLA, and the enable time is
adjustable up to 250 seconds.
Jam (Overcurrent)
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay can respond quickly to take a motor off-line in
the event of a mechanical jam, reducing the potential for damage to the motor and the
power transmission components. Trip adjustments include a trip setting that is
adjustable from 50…600% FLA and a trip delay time with a range of 0.1…25.0 seconds.
A separate warning setting is adjustable from 50…600% FLA.
Underload (Undercurrent)
A sudden drop in motor current can signal conditions such as:
• Pump cavitation
•Tool breakage
•Belt breakage
For these instances, rapid fault detection can help minimize damage and aid in
reducing production downtime.
Additionally, monitoring for an underload event can provide enhanced protection for
motors that are coded by the medium handled (for example, submersible pumps that
pump water). Such motors can become overheated despite being underloaded. This
can result from an absence or an insufficient amount of the medium (for example, due
to clogged filters or closed valves).
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay offers underload trip and warning settings
adjustable from 10…100% FLA. The trip function also includes a trip delay time with a
range of 0.1…25.0 seconds.
IMPORTANT For applications that require ground fault detection and use the pass-
through sensing module, this feature is only active when native motor
current is present in the pass-through apertures; that is, no external step-
down current transformers (CTs). You must use an external ground fault
sensor for any applications that require external step-down CTs.
16 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 1 Overview
Current Imbalance (Asymmetry)
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay offers current imbalance trip and warning
settings adjustable from 10…100%. The trip function also includes a trip delay time
with a range of 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Remote Trip
The remote trip function allows an external device (such as a vibration sensor) to
induce the E300 Electronic Overload Relay to trip. External device relay contacts are
wired to the E300 Electronic Overload Relay discrete inputs. These discrete inputs are
configurable with an option for assigning the remote trip function.
Voltage Protection
The E300 sensing module with voltage, current, and ground fault current provides you
with enhanced current-based motor protection with the addition of voltage
protection. With this option, you can protect against voltage issues (such as
undervoltage, voltage imbalance, phase loss, frequency, and phase rotation).
Power Protection
While the motor is powering a load, the E300 sensing module with voltage, current,
and ground fault current, also protects the motor based on power. This option
monitors and protects for both excessive and low real power (kW), reactive power
(kVAR), apparent power (kVA), and power factor for a specific application (such as
pump applications).
Analog Protection
The E300 analog expansion module allows you to protect against over-analog readings
from analog-based sensors (such as overtemperature, overflow, or overpressure)
Current Monitoring Functions
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay allows you to monitor the following operational
data over a communications network:
• Individual phase currents — in amperes
• Individual phase currents — as a percentage of motor FLC
• Average current — in amperes
• Average current — as a percentage of motor FLC
• Percentage of thermal capacity utilized
• Current imbalance percentage
• Ground fault current
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 17
Overview Chapter 1
Voltage, Power, and Energy Monitoring
The E300 sensing module with voltage, current, and ground fault current can be
included in a company’s energy management system. This option provides voltage,
current, power (kW, kVAR, and kVA), energy (kWh, kVARh, kVAh, kW Demand,
kVAR Demand, and kVA Demand), and power quality (power factor, frequency, and
phase rotation) information down at the motor level.
Diagnostic Functions
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay allows you to monitor the following diagnostic
information over a communications network:
Status Indicators
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay provides the following LED indicators:
• Power — This green/red LED indicates the status of the overload relay.
• TRIP/WARN — This LED flashes a yellow code under a warning condition
and a red code when tripped.
Inputs/Outputs
Inputs allow the connection of such devices as contactor and disconnect auxiliary
contacts, pilot devices, limit switches, and float switches. Input status can be
monitored via the network and mapped to a controller’s input image table. Inputs are
rated 24V DC, 120V AC, or 240V AC and are current sinking. Power for the inputs is
sourced separately with convenient customer sources at terminal A1. Relay contact
outputs can be controlled via the network or DeviceLogix function blocks for
performing such tasks as contactor operation.
Test/Reset Button
The Test/Reset button, which is located on the front of the E300 Electronic Overload
Relay, allows you to perform the following:
• Test — The trip relay contact opens if the E300 Electronic Overload Relay is in
an untripped condition and the Test/Reset button is pressed for 2 seconds or
longer.
• Reset — The trip relay contact closes if the E300 Electronic Overload Relay is
in a tripped condition, supply voltage is present, and the Test/Reset button is
pressed.
• Device status • History of past five trips
•Trip status •History of past five warnings
• Warning status • Hours of operation
• Time to an overload trip • Number of starts
• Time to reset after an overload • Trip snapshot trip
18 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 1 Overview
Single/Three-Phase Operation
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay can be applied to three-phase and single-phase
applications. A programming parameter is provided for selection between single- and
three-phase operation. Straight-through wiring is available in both cases.
EtherNet/IP Communications
The E300 EtherNet/IP communication module has two RJ45 ports that act as an
Ethernet switch to support a star, linear, and ring topology and supports the following:
• 2 concurrent Class 1 connections [1 exclusive owner + (1 input only or 1 listen
only)]
• 6 simultaneous Class 3 connections (explicit messaging)
• Embedded web server
• SMTP server for trip and warning events (email and text messaging)
• Embedded EDS file
• RSLogix 5000 add-on profile
DeviceNet Communications
The E300 DeviceNet communication module has one 5-pin DeviceNet connector and
supports the following:
• Read and Write of configuration parameters and real-time information via
DeviceNet using RSNetWorx™ at communication rates of 125 kb, 250 kb, and
500 kb
• Communication of 16 bytes of data for I/O (Implicit) Messaging to a
DeviceNet scanner
• Mechanical means to select the node address of the device
• LED status indication for device power, trip/warning status, and
communication status
• Same DeviceNet objects as the existing E3 Plus electronic overload relay
• E3 Plus emulation mode that lets you reuse configuration parameters when
using tools such as ADR, DeviceNet Configuration Terminal (193-DNCT or
CEP7-DNCT), and RSNetWorx for DeviceNet
Modular Design
You can select the specific options that you need for your motor starter application. the
E300 relay consists of three modules: sensing, control, and communication. You can
customize each of the three with accessories to tailor the electronic motor overload for
your application’s exact needs.
• Wide current range
• Sensing capabilities (Current, Ground Fault Current, and/or Voltage)
•Expansion I/O
• Operator interfaces
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 19
Overview Chapter 1
Communication Options
You can select from multiple communication options that integrate with Logix-based
control systems. Developers can easily add the E300 relay to Logix-based control
systems that use Integrated Architecture tools like Add-on Profiles, Add-on
Instructions, and Faceplates.
• EtherNet/IP Device Level Ring (DLR)
•DeviceNet
Diagnostic Information
The E300 relay provides a wide variety of diagnostic information to monitor motor
performance, proactively alert you to possible motor issues, or identify the reason for
an unplanned shutdown. Information includes:
• Voltage, Current, and Energy
• Trip / Warning Histories
• % Thermal Capacity Utilization
• Time to Trip
•Time to Reset
•Operational Hours
•Number of Starts
•Trip Snapshot
Simplified Wiring
The E300 relay provides an easy means to mount to both IEC and NEMA
Allen-Bradley® contactors. A contactor coil adapter is available for the 100-C
contactor, which allows you to create a functional motor starter with only two control
wires.
Sensing Module
Figure 1 - Sensing Module
The sensing module electronically samples data about the current, voltage, power, and
energy that are consumed by the electric motor internal to the module. You can choose
from one of three varieties of the sensing modules depending on the motor diagnostic
information that is needed for the motor protection application:
• Current Sensing
• Current and Ground Fault Current Sensing
• Current, Ground Fault Current, Voltage, and Power Sensing
20 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 1 Overview
The current ranges for each of three varieties of sensing module are as follows:
• 0.5…30 A
•6…60 A
• 10…100 A
• 20…200 A
You can choose how the sensing module mechanically mounts inside the electrical
enclosure. The following mounting mechanisms are available for the sensing module.
• Mount to the load side of an Allen-Bradley Bulletin 100 IEC Contactor
• Mount to the load side of an Allen-Bradley Bulletin 300 NEMA Contactor
• Mount to the load side of an Allen-Bradley Bulletin 500 NEMA Contactor
• DIN Rail / Panel Mount with power terminals
• Replacement DIN Rail / Panel Mount with power terminals for an
Allen-Bradley E3 Plus panel mount adapter
• DIN Rail / Panel Mount with pass-thru power conductors
You can use the E300 relay sensing module with external current transformers. The
following application guidelines should be adhered to when using an external CT
configuration:
• You must mount the E300 Overload Relay a distance equal to or greater than
six times the cable diameter (including insulation) from the nearest current-
carrying conductor.
• For applications that use multiple conductors per phase, the diameter of each
cable should be added and multiplied by six to determine the proper placement
distance for the E300 Overload Relay.
Control Module
Figure 2 - Control Module
The control module is the heart of the E300 relay and can attach to any sensing
module. The control module performs all protection and motor control algorithms
and contains the native I/O for the system. The control module has two varieties:
•I/O only
• I/O and protection (PTC and External Ground Fault Current Sensing)
The control module is offered in three control voltages:
• 110…120V AC, 50/60Hz
• 220…240V AC, 50/60Hz
• 24V DC
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 21
Overview Chapter 1
External control voltage is required to power the E300 relay and activate the digital
inputs.
Communication Modules
The communication module allows the E300 relay to be integrated into an automation
system, and it can attach to any control module. All communication modules allow you
to set the node address with rotary turn dials, and it provides diagnostic status
indicators to provide system status at the panel.
The E300 EtherNet/IP Communication Module has two RJ45 connectors that
function as a switch. You can daisy chain multiple E300 relays with Ethernet cable, and
the module supports a Device Level Ring (DLR).
Figure 3 - EtherNet/IP Communication Module
The E300 DeviceNet Communication Module has a single 5-pin DeviceNet
connector that allows the E300 relay to be integrated into a DeviceNet network.
Figure 4 - DeviceNet Communication Module
Optional Add-On Modules
Optional Expansion I/O
The E300 relay lets you add more digital and analog I/O to the system via the E300
relay Expansion Bus if the native I/O count is not sufficient for the application on the
base relay. You can add any combination of up to four Digital I/O Expansion Modules
that have four inputs (120V AC, 240V AC, or 24V DC) and two relay outputs.
You can also add up to four Analog I/O Expansion Modules, which have three
independent universal analog inputs and one isolated analog output. The Analog I/O
22 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 1 Overview
Expansion Modules require Control Module firmware v3.000 or higher. The
independent universal analog inputs can accept the following signals:
•4…20 mA
•0…20 mA
•0…10V DC
•1…5V DC
•0…5V DC
• RTD Sensors (Pt 385, Pt 3916, Cu 426, Ni 618, Ni 672, and NiFe 518)
• Resistance (150 , 750 , 3000 , and 6000 )
The isolated analog output can be programmed to reference a traditional analog signal
(4…20 mA, 0…20 mA, 0…10V DC, 1…5V, or 0…10V) to represent the following
diagnostic values:
•Average %FLA
•%TCU
• Ground Fault Current
• Current Imbalance
•Average L-L Voltage
•Voltage Imbalance
•Total kW
•Total kVAR
•Total kVA
• Total Power Factor
• User-defined Value
Optional Operator Station
Figure 5 - Operator Stations
The E300 relay lets you add one operator interface to the Expansion Bus. You can
choose between two types of operator stations: Control Station or a Diagnostic
Station. Both types of operator stations mount into a standard 22 mm push button
knockout, and they provide diagnostic status indicators that allow you to view the
status of the E300 relay from the outside of an electrical enclosure. Both operator
stations provide push buttons that can be used for motor control logic, and they both
can be used to upload and download parameter configuration data from the base relay.
0
RESET
LOCAL
REMOTE
0
RESET
SELECT
ESC
REMOTE
LOCAL
Control Station
Diagnostic Station
Power LED
Trip/Warn LED
Start Forward/Speed 1
Start Reverse/Speed 2
Local/Remote
Stop
Reset
Power LED
Trip/Warn LED
Start Forward/Speed 1
Start Reverse/Speed 2
Local/Remote
Stop
Reset
Escape
Up
Select
Enter
Down
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 23
Overview Chapter 1
The Diagnostic Station contains a display and navigation buttons that allows you to
view and edit parameters in the base relay. The Diagnostic Station requires Control
Module firmware v3.000 or higher.
Optional Expansion Bus
Power Supply
The E300 relay expansion bus provides enough current to operate a system that has (1)
Digital Expansion Module and (1) Operator Station. An E300 relay system that
contains more expansion modules needs supplemental current for the Expansion Bus.
the E300 relay offers you two types of Expansion Bus Power Supplies: AC (110…240V
AC, 50/60 Hz) and DC (24V DC). One Expansion Bus Power Supply supplies
enough current for a fully loaded E300 relay Expansion Bus (four Digital Expansion
Modules, four Analog Expansion Modules, and one Operator Station). You can use
either Expansion Bus Power Supply with any combination of Digital and Analog
Expansion Modules.
Figure 6 - Expansion Bus Power Supply
Protection Features
The numbers in parentheses in this section represent specific device functions as they
relate to the respective protection measures provided. These protection functions
correlate to ANSI standard device numbers as defined by ANSI/IEEE C37.2
Standard—Standard for Electrical Power System Device Function Numbers,
Acronyms, and Contact Designations.
Standard Current-based Protection
All versions of the E300 relay provide the following motor protection functions.
•Thermal Overload (51)
• Phase Loss
• Current Imbalance (46)
• Undercurrent – load loss (37)
•Overcurrent – load jam (48)
•Overcurrent – load stall
•Start Inhibit (66)
24 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 1 Overview
Ground Fault Current-based Protection
The E300 relay sensing modules and control modules with a ground fault current
option provides the following motor protection function:
• Ground Fault – zero sequence method (50 N)
Voltage- and Power-based Protection
The E300 relay sensing modules with voltage sensing provides the following motor
protection functions:
• Undervoltage (27)
• Overvoltage (59)
• Phase Reversal (47) – voltage-based
• Over and Under Frequency (81) – voltage-based
•Voltage Imbalance (46)
• Over and Under Power (37)
• Over and Under Leading/Lagging Power Factor (55)
• Over and Under Reactive Power Generated
• Over and Under Reactive Power Consumed
• Over and Under Apparent Power
Thermal-based Protection
The E300 relay provides the following thermal-based motor protection functions:
•Thermistor – PTC (49)
• Stator Protection – RTD (49)
• Bearing Protection – RTD (38)
Applications
You can use the E300 relay with the following across the line starter applications:
•Non-reversing starter
•Reversing starter
• Wye (Star) / Delta starter
•Two-speed motors
• Low and medium voltage with two or three potential transformers
•With or without Phase current transformers
• With or without zero-sequence core balanced current transformer
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 25
Chapter 2
Diagnostic Station
The E300™ Electronic Overload Relay supports a Diagnostic Station on the E300
Expansion Bus (requires Control Module firmware v3.000 and higher). The
Diagnostic Station allows you to view any E300 relay parameter and edit any
configuration parameter. This chapter explains the navigation keys on the Diagnostic
Station, how to view a parameter, how to edit a configuration parameter, and the
Diagnostic Station programmable display sequence.
Navigation Keys
The E300 Diagnostic Station has five navigation keys that are used to navigate through
the display menu system and edit configuration parameters.
Displaying a Parameter
The E300 Diagnostic Station allows you to view parameters by using a group menu
system or by a linear list. To start the navigation menu, press the key. The menu
prompts you to view parameters by groups, parameters in a linear list, or E300 relay
system information.
Parameter Group Navigation
To start the navigation menu, press the key. Use the or keys to select
the Groups navigation method and press .
Key Name Description
Up Arrow
Down Arrow
• Scroll through the display parameters or groups.
• Increment or decrement values.
Escape
• Back one step in the navigation menu.
• Cancel a change to a configuration parameter value
Select
• Select the next bit when viewing a bit enumerated parameter.
• Select the next digit when editing a configuration value.
• Select the next bit when editing a bit enumerated parameter.
Enter
• Start the navigation menu.
• Advance one step in the navigation menu.
• Display the description for a bit enumerated parameter.
• Edit a configuration parameter value.
• Save the change to the configuration parameter value.
26 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 2 Diagnostic Station
Use the or keys to select the parameter group to display and press .
Use the or keys to view the parameters that are associated with that group.
When viewing a bit enumerated parameter, press to view the description of each
bit. Press to view the next bit. Press to return to the parameter.
Press to return to the parameter group navigation system.
If you do not press any navigation keys for a period that Display Timeout
(Parameter 436) defines, the Diagnostic Station automatically returns to the
programmable display sequence.
Linear List Navigation
To start the navigation menu, press the key. Use the or keys to select
the Linear List navigation method and press .
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 27
Diagnostic Station Chapter 2
Use the or and keys to select the parameter number to display and
press .
Use the or keys to view the next sequential parameter.
When viewing a bit enumerated parameter, press to view the description of each
bit. Press to view the next bit. Press to return to the parameter.
Press to return to the linear list navigation system.
If you do not press any navigation keys for a period that Display Timeout (Parameter
436) defines, the E300 Diagnostic Station automatically returns to the programmable
display sequence.
System Info
The E300 Diagnostic Station can display firmware revision information, view the time
and date of the E300 relay virtual clock, and edit the time and date of the E300 relay
virtual clock. To view E300 relay system information, start the navigation menu by
pressing key. Use the or keys to select System Info and press .
Use the or keys to view the E300 relay system information.
28 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 2 Diagnostic Station
To edit the system date or time, press to modify the value. Use the or
keys to select the new value. Press to select the next system value. Press
to save the new system values or press to cancel the modification and
restore the previous system values.
Press to return to the navigation menu.
If you do not press any navigation keys for a period that Display Timeout (Parameter
436) defines, the E300 Diagnostic Station automatically cancels the modification,
restores the previous value, and returns to its programmable display sequence.
Editing Parameters
Editing a Configuration Parameter
The E300 Diagnostic Station allows you to edit configuration parameters by using a
group menu system or by a linear list. To start the navigation menu, press the key.
You are prompted to view parameters by groups, parameters in a linear list, or E300
relay system information. Choose the appropriate method and navigate to the
parameter to be modified.
Editing a Numeric Parameter
To edit a configuration parameter, press the key to modify the value. Use the
or keys to select the new value. Press to save the new system values
or press to cancel the modification and restore the previous value.
Press to return to the navigation menu.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 29
Diagnostic Station Chapter 2
If you do not press any navigation keys for a period that Display Timeout (Parameter
436) defines, the E300 Diagnostic Station automatically cancels the modification,
restores the previous value, and returns to its programmable display sequence.
Editing a Bit Enumerated Parameter
When editing a bit enumerated parameter, press the key to view the description
of each bit. Use the or keys to select the new bit value. Press to edit
the next bit. Press to save the new value or press to cancel the modification
and restore the previous value.
Press to return to the navigation menu.
If you do not press any navigation keys for a period that Display Timeout (Parameter
436) defines, the Diagnostic Station automatically cancels the modification, restores
the previous value, and returns to its programmable display sequence.
Programmable Display
Sequence
Display Sequence
The Diagnostic Station of the E300 relay sequentially displays up to seven screens
every 5 seconds.
• Three-phase current
•Three-phase voltage
•Total power
• User-defined screen 1
• User-defined screen 2
• User-defined screen 3
• User-defined screen 4
The three-phase voltage and total power screens are only included in the sequence
when the E300 relay has a voltage, current, and ground fault current (VIG)-based
Sensing Module.
The user-defined screens allow you to select up to two parameters per screen.
See Diagnostic Station User-defined Screens
on page 41 to configure the Screen# and
Parameter# (Parameters 428…435).
30 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 2 Diagnostic Station
If you do not press any navigation keys for a period that Display Timeout (Parameter
436) defines, the Diagnostic Station automatically cancels any editing modifications,
restores the previous value, and returns to its programmable display sequence.
Stopping the Display Sequence
To stop the display sequence, press . Use the or keys to manually
sequence through the displays. Press to return to the automatic display sequence.
If you do not press any navigation keys for a period that Display Timeout (Parameter
436) defines, the Diagnostic Station automatically returns to the programmable
display sequence.
Automatic Trip and Warning
Screens
When the E300 relay is in a trip or warning state, the E300 Diagnostic Station
automatically displays the trip or warning event.
Press any of the navigation keys ( , , , , or ) to return to the
automatic display sequence.
When the trip or warning event clears, the E300 Diagnostic Station automatically
returns to the programmable display sequence.
If another parameter is displayed and you do not press any navigation keys for a period
that Display Timeout (Parameter 436) defines, the Diagnostic Station automatically
returns to the trip or warning screen if the trip or warning event is not cleared.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 31
Chapter 3
System Operation and Configuration
This chapter provides instructions about how to operate and configure an E300™
Electronic Overload Relay system. This chapter includes settings for Device Modes,
Option Match, Security Policy, I/O Assignments, Expansion Bus Fault, Emergency
Start, and an introduction to Operating Modes.
This chapter shows you the parameters required to program the device; see page 9
for
information about the complete parameter spreadsheet that is attached to this PDF.
Device Modes
The E300 relay has five device modes to validate configuration of the device and limit
when you can configure the E300 relay, perform a firmware update, and issue
commands.
• Administration Mode
• Ready Mode
•Run Mode
•Test Mode
• Invalid Configuration Mode
Administration Mode
Administration Mode is a maintenance mode for the E300 relay that allows you to
configure parameters, modify security policies, enable web servers, perform firmware
updates, and issue commands.
Follow these steps to enter into Administration Mode:
1. Set the rotary dials on the E300 Communication Module to the following
values
– For EtherNet/IP set the rotary dials to 0-0-0
– For DeviceNet set the rotary dials to 7-7
2. Cycle power on the E300 relay
After you complete commissioning activities and maintenance tasks, return the E300
relay back to Ready or Run Mode by setting the rotary dials of the E300
communication module back to its previous positions and then cycle power.
Ready Mode
Ready Mode is a standby mode for the E300 relay in which the relay is ready to help
protect an electric motor and no electrical current has been detected. You can modify
configuration parameters, update firmware, and issue commands if the appropriate
security policies are enabled. The Power LED on the Communication Module and
Operator Stations flash green and bit 14 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) is set to 1
when the device is in Ready Mode.
32 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 3 System Operation and Configuration
Run Mode
Run Mode is an active mode for the E300 relay in which the relay is sensing electrical
current and is actively protecting an electric motor. Only non-motor protection
configuration parameters can be modified if the appropriate security policies are
enabled. The Power LED on the Communication Module and Operator Stations is
solid green and bits 3, 4, and/or 5 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) are set to 1 when
the device is in Run Mode.
Test Mode
Test Mode is used by installers of motor control centers who are testing and
commissioning motor starters with an automation system. A digital input of the E300
relay is assigned to monitor the Test position of the motor control center enclosure.
The Input Assignments (Parameters 196…201) are described later in this chapter.
Anyone who commissions motor starters in an automation system can put their motor
control center enclosure into the Test position to activate Test Mode and verify that the
digital inputs and relay outputs of the E300 relay are operating properly with the motor
starter without energizing power to the motor. If the E300 relay senses current or
voltage in Test Mode, it generates a Test Mode Trip.
Invalid Configuration Mode
Invalid Configuration Mode is an active mode for the E300 relay in which the relay is
in a tripped state due to invalid configuration data. Invalid Configuration Parameter
(Parameter 38) indicates the parameter number that is causing the fault. Invalid
Configuration Cause (Parameter 39) identifies the reason for Invalid Configuration
Mode.
The Trip/Warn LED on the Communication Module and Operator Stations flashes a
pattern of red, 3 long and 8 short blinks, and bits 0 and 2 in Device Status 0 (Parameter
20) are set to 1 when the device is in Invalid Configuration Mode.
To return to Ready/Run Mode, place a valid configuration value in the parameter that
is identified by Invalid Configuration Parameter (Parameter 38) and Invalid
Configuration Cause (Parameter 39). Reset the trip state of the E300 relay by pressing
the blue reset button on the Communication Module, via network communication,
with the internal web server of the EtherNet/IP communication module, or by an
assigned digital input.
Option Match
Due to the modular nature of the E300 relay, you can enable the Option Match feature
to verify that the options that you expect for the motor protection application are the
ones that are present on the E300 relay system. You can configure an option mismatch
to cause a protection trip or provide a warning within the E300 relay.
Enable Option Match Protection Trip (Parameter 186)
To enable the Option Match feature to cause a protection trip in the event of an option
mismatch, place a (1) in bit position 8 of Parameter 186 (Control Trip Enable). You
can select the specific option match features to cause a protection trip in Parameter 233
(Option Match Action).
Enable Option Match Protection Warning (Parameter 192)
To enable the Option Match feature to cause a warning in the event of an option
mismatch, place a (1) in bit position 8 of Parameter 192 (Control Warning Enable).
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 33
System Operation and Configuration Chapter 3
You can select the specific option match features to cause a warning in Parameter 233
(Option Match Action).
Control Module Type (Parameter 221)
The E300 relay offers six different control modules. Place the value of the expected
control module into Parameter 221. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature
for the control module.
Sensing Module Type (Parameter 222)
The E300 relay offers 12 different sensing modules. Place the value of the expected
sensing module into Parameter 222. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature
for the sensing module.
Communication Module Type (Parameter 223)
The E300 relay offers two different communication modules. Place the value of the
expected communication module into Parameter 223. A value of (0) disables the
Option Match feature for the communication module.
Operator Station Type (Parameter 224)
The E300 relay offers two different types of operator stations. Place the value of the
expected operator station into Parameter 224. A value of (0) disables the Option
Match feature for the operator station. A value of (1), “No Operator Station”, makes the
operator station not allowed on the Expansion Bus and prevents you from connecting
an operator station to the E300 relay system.
Digital I/O Expansion Modules
Module 1 Type (Parameter 225)
The E300 relay supports up to four additional Digital I/O expansion modules. This
parameter configures the Option Match feature for the Digital I/O expansion module
set to Digital Module 1. There are three different types of Digital I/O expansion
modules. Place the value of the expected Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital
Module 1 into Parameter 225. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for this
Digital I/O expansion module. A value of (1), “No Digital I/O Expansion Module”,
makes the Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 1 not allowed on the
Expansion Bus and prevents you from connecting a Digital I/O expansion module set
to Digital Module 1 to the E300 relay system.
Module 2 Type (Parameter 226)
The E300 relay supports up to four additional Digital I/O expansion modules. This
parameter configures the Option Match feature for the Digital I/O expansion module
set to Digital Module 2. There are three different types of Digital I/O expansion
modules. Place the value of the expected Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital
Module 2 into Parameter 226. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for this
Digital I/O expansion module. A value of (1),“No Digital I/O Expansion Module”,
makes the Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 2 not allowed on the
Expansion Bus and prevents you from connecting a Digital I/O expansion module set
to Digital Module 2 to the E300 relay system.
34 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 3 System Operation and Configuration
Module 3 Type (Parameter 227)
The E300 relay supports up to four additional Digital I/O expansion modules. This
parameter configures the Option Match feature for the Digital I/O expansion module
set to Digital Module 3. There are three different types of Digital I/O expansion
modules. Place the value of the expected Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital
Module 3 into Parameter 227. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for this
Digital I/O expansion module. A value of (1),“No Digital I/O Expansion Module”,
makes the Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 3 not allowed on the
Expansion Bus and prevents you from connecting a Digital I/O expansion module set
to Digital Module 3 to the E300 relay system.
Module 4 Type (Parameter 228)
The E300 relay supports up to four additional Digital I/O expansion modules. This
parameter configures the Option Match feature for the Digital I/O expansion module
set to Digital Module 4. There are three different types of Digital I/O expansion
modules. Place the value of the expected Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital
Module 4 into Parameter 228. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for this
Digital I/O expansion module. A value of (1), “No Digital I/O Expansion Module ”,
makes the Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 4 not allowed on the
Expansion Bus and prevents you from connecting a Digital I/O expansion module set
to Digital Module 4 to the E300 relay system.
Analog I/O Expansion Modules
Module 1 Type (Parameter 229)
The E300 relay supports up to four additional Analog I/O expansion modules. This
parameter configures the Option Match feature for the Analog I/O expansion module
set to Analog Module 1. There is one type of Analog I/O expansion module. Place the
value of the expected Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 1 into
Parameter 229. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for this Analog I/O
expansion module. A value of (1), “No Analog I/O Expansion Module”, makes the
Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 1 not allowed on the Expansion
Bus and prevents you from connecting an Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog
Module 1 to the E300 relay system.
Module 2 Type (Parameter 230)
The E300 relay supports up to four additional Analog I/O expansion modules. This
parameter configures the Option Match feature for the Analog I/O expansion module
set to Analog Module 2. There is one type of Analog I/O expansion module. Place the
value of the expected Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 2 into
Parameter 230. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for this Analog I/O
expansion module. A value of (1), “No Analog I/O Expansion Module”, makes the
Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 2 not allowed on the Expansion
Bus and prevents you from connecting an Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog
Module 2 to the E300 relay system.
Module 3 Type (Parameter 231)
The E300 relay supports up to four additional Analog I/O expansion modules. This
parameter configures the Option Match feature for the Analog I/O expansion module
set to Analog Module 3. There is one type of Analog I/O expansion module. Place the
value of the expected Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 3 into
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 35
System Operation and Configuration Chapter 3
Parameter 231. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for this Analog I/O
expansion module. A value of (1), “No Analog I/O Expansion Module”, makes the
Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 3 not allowed on the Expansion
Bus and prevents you from connecting an Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog
Module 3 to the E300 relay system.
Module 4 Type (Parameter 232)
The E300 relay supports up to four additional Analog I/O expansion modules. This
parameter configures the Option Match feature for the Analog I/O expansion module
set to Analog Module 4. There is one type of Analog I/O expansion module. Place the
value of the expected Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 4 into
Parameter 232. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for this Analog I/O
expansion module. A value of (1), “No Analog I/O Expansion Module”, makes the
Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 4 not allowed on the Expansion
Bus and prevents you from connecting an Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog
Module 4 to the E300 relay system.
Option Match Action (Parameter 233)
The Option Match feature for the E300 relay allows you to specify an action when
there is an option mismatch—Protection Trip or Warning. Place a (0) in the
appropriate bit position for a warning, and place a (1) in the appropriate bit position to
cause a protection trip if there is an option mismatch.
Security Policy
The E300 relay has a security policy that can be used to prevent anyone with malicious
intent to potentially damage a motor or piece of equipment. By default, you can only
modify the security policy when the E300 relay is in Administration Mode (see
page 31
to learn how to enable Administration Mode).
Table 1 - Security Policy Types
I/O Assignments
The E300 relay has native digital inputs and relay outputs in the Control Module. This
I/O can be assign to dedicated functions. The following sections list the function
assignments for the available Control Module I/O.
Input Assignments
You can assign digital inputs via the following parameters:
• Input Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 196)
Policy Type Description
Device Configuration
• allows you to send external message instructions via a communication network to write values to configuration parameters
• when this policy is disabled, all external message instructions with configuration data return a communication error when the E300 relay is in Ready
Mode or Run Mode
Device Reset
• allows you to send external message instruction via a communication network to perform a soft device reset when the E300 relay is in Ready Mode
• when this policy is disabled, all external reset message instructions return a communication error when the E300 relay is in Ready Mode or Run Mode
Firmware Update
• allows you to update the internal firmware of the communication module and control module via ControlFlash when the E300 relay is in Ready Mode
• when this policy is disabled, firmware updates return a communication error when the E300 relay is in Ready Mode or Run Mode
Security Configuration
• allows you to modify the Security Policy of the E300 relay in Ready Mode
• when this policy is disabled, it can only be modified when the E300 relay is in Administration Mode
36 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 3 System Operation and Configuration
• Input Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 197)
• Input Pt02 Assignment (Parameter 198)
• Input Pt03 Assignment (Parameter 199)
• Input Pt04 Assignment (Parameter 200)
• Input Pt05 Assignment (Parameter 201)
Output Assignments
You can assign relay outputs via the following parameters:
• Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202)
• Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 203)
• Output Pt02 Assignment (Parameter 204)
Output Relay Configuration
States
When assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay or Control/Control & Trip Relay,
you can configure the E300 relay's output relays to go to a specific safe state when one
of following events occur:
• Protection Fault Mode - when a trip event occurs
• Communication Fault Mode - when network communication is lost or an error
occurs
• Communication Idle Mode - when a network scanner changes to Idle mode or a
PLC changes to Program mode
The default setting for these three modes is to Open/de-energize all E300 output relays
that are assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay or Control/Control & Trip
Relay.
The E300 output relay states when assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay or
Control/Control & Trip Relay follow this priority order:
Table 2 - Output Relay Priority
The optional eight output relays on the digital expansion I/O modules operate as a
Normal/General Purpose relay with the same E300 relay safe state settings. There are
two relays per module with maximum of four modules.
IMPORTANT It is important that you fully understand the use of these parameters and
the order of their priority under the conditions of a protection trip,
communication fault, and communication idle event.
Priority Normal/General Purpose Relay Control/Control & Trip Relay
1 Output Protection Fault State Output Communication Fault State
2 Output Communication Fault State Output Final Fault State
3 Output Final Fault State Output Communication Idle State
4 Output Communication Idle State
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 37
System Operation and Configuration Chapter 3
Output Relay Protection Fault Modes
When the E300 relay has a trip event, you can configure the E300 output relays to go
to a specific state (Open or Closed) or ignore the trip event and continue to operate as
normal. The parameters that are listed in Ta ble 3
configure the Protection Fault Mode
for each E300 output relay.
Table 3 - Protection Fault Mode Parameters
Output Relay Communication Fault Modes
When the E300 relay loses communication, experiences a communication bus fault, or
has a duplicate node address, you can configure the E300 output relays with the
Communication Fault Mode parameters to go to a specific state (Open or Closed) or
hold the last state.
An E300 relay with firmware revision v5.000 or higher supports the Fault Mode
Output State Duration feature, which can be used with redundant network scanners or
control systems. The Fault Mode Output State Duration is the time that the E300
output relays can go to a temporary state (Open, Closed, or Hold Last State) when a
communication fault occurs. Configure this temporary state by using the
Communication Fault Mode parameters.
If communication between the E300 relay and a network scanner or control system is
not restored within the Fault Mode Output State Duration time (Parameter 561), the
E300 output relays go to a final fault state (Open or Closed), which you configure by
using the Final Fault Mode parameters.
If communication between the E300 relay and a network scanner or control system is
restored within the Fault Mode Output State Duration time (Parameter 561), the
E300 output relays resume with the state commanded by the network scanner or
control system.
The parameters that are listed in Table 4
configure the Configuration Fault Mode for
each E300 output relay.
Fault Name
Parameter
No.
Description
Output Relay 0 Protection Fault Action 304
• defines how Output Relay 0 when assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay responds
when a trip event occurs
Output Relay 0 Protection Fault Value 305 • defines which state Output Relay 0 should go to when a trip event occurs
Output Relay 1 Protection Fault Action 310
• defines how Output Relay 1 responds when a trip event occurs when this parameter is
assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay
Output Relay 1 Protection Fault Value 311 • defines which state Output Relay 1 should go to when a trip event occurs
Output Relay 2 Protection Fault Action 316
• defines how Output Relay 2 responds when a trip event occurs when this parameter is
assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay.
Output Relay 2 Protection Fault Value 317 • defines which state Output Relay 2 should go to when a trip event occurs
Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Protection Fault Action 322
• defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 1 responds when a trip event
occurs
Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Protection Fault Value 323 • defines which state both output relays should go to when a trip event occurs
Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Protection Fault Action 328
• defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 2 responds when a trip event
occurs
Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Protection Fault Value 329 • defines which state both output relays should go to when a trip event occurs
Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Protection Fault Action 334
• defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 3 responds when a trip event
occurs
Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Protection Fault Value 335 • defines which state both output relays should go to when a trip event occurs
Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay Protection Fault Action 340
• defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 4 responds when a trip event
occurs
Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay Protection Fault Value 341 • defines which state both output relays should go to when a trip event occurs
38 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 3 System Operation and Configuration
Table 4 - Configuration Fault Mode Parameters
Output Relay Communication Idle Modes
When a network scanner goes into Idle mode or a PLC goes into Program mode while
communicating with an E300 relay, you can configure the E300 output relays to go to a
specific state (Open or Close) or hold the last state. The parameters that are listed in
Tab le 5
configure the Communication Idle Mode for each E300 output relay.
Fault Name
Parameter
No.
Description
Fault Mode Output State Duration
(1)
561
• defines the amount of time (s) that the E300 relay remains in the Communication Fault
Mode state when a communication fault occurs. 0 = forever
• If communication between the E300 relay and a network scanner or control system is not
restored within the Fault Mode Output State Duration time the E300 output relays go to
the final fault state (configured by using Final Fault Mode Parameters
Output Relay 0 Communication Fault Action 306
• defines how Output Relay 0 responds when a communication fault occurs when this
parameter is assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay or Control/Control & Trip Relay
Output Relay 0 Communication Fault Value 307 • defines which state Output Relay 0 should go to when a communication fault occurs
Output Relay 0 Final Fault Value
(1)
562
• defines which state Output Relay 0 should go to when communication is not restored with
the time defined in Fault Mode Output State Duration (Parameter 561)
Output Relay 1 Communication Fault Action 312
• defines how Output Relay 1 responds when a communication fault occurs when this
parameter is assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay or Control/Control & Trip Relay
Output Relay 1 Communication Fault Value 313 • defines which state Output Relay 1 should go to when a communication fault occurs
Output Relay 1 Final Fault Value
(1)
563
• defines which state Output Relay 1 should go to when communication is not restored with
the time defined in Fault Mode Output State Duration (Parameter 561)
Output Relay 2 Communication Fault Action 317
• defines how Output Relay 2 responds when a communication fault occurs when this
parameter is assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay or Control/Control & Trip Relay
Output Relay 2 Communication Fault Value 319 • defines which state Output Relay 2 should go to when a communication fault occurs
Output Relay 2 Final Fault Value
(1)
564
• defines which state Output Relay 2 should go to when communication is not restored with
the time defined in Fault Mode Output State Duration (Parameter 561)
Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Communication Fault Action 324
• defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 1 responds when a
communication fault occurs
Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Communication Fault Value 325 • defines which state both output relays should go to when a communication fault occurs
Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Final Fault Value
(1)
565
• defines which state both output relays should go to when communication is not restored
with the time defined in Fault Mode Output State Duration (Parameter 561)
Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Communication Fault Action 330
• defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 2 responds when a
communication fault occurs
Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Communication Fault Value 331 • defines which state both output relays should go to when a communication fault occurs
Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Final Fault Value
(1)
566
• defines which state both output relays should go to when communication is not restored
with the time defined in Fault Mode Output State Duration (Parameter 561)
Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Communication Fault Action 336
• defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 3 responds when a
communication fault occurs
Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Communication Fault Value 337 • defines which state both output relays should go to when a communication fault occurs
Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Final Fault Value
(1)
567
• defines which state both output relays should go to when communication is not restored
with the time defined in Fault Mode Output State Duration (Parameter 561)
Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay Communication Fault Action 342
• defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 4 responds when a
communication fault occurs
Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay Communication Fault Value 343 • defines which state both output relays should go to when a communication fault occurs
Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay Final Fault Value
(1)
568
• defines which state both output relays should go to when communication is not restored
with the time defined in Fault Mode Output State Duration (Parameter 561)
(1) Available in E300 relay firmware v5.000 and higher.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 39
System Operation and Configuration Chapter 3
Table 5 - Communication Idle Mode Parameters
Expansion Bus Fault
The expansion bus of the E300 relay can be used to expand the I/O capabilities of the
device with the addition of digital and analog expansion I/O modules. The Expansion
Bus Fault allows you to have the E300 relay go into a Trip or Warning state when
established Expansion Bus communication is disrupted between the Control Module
and any digital and analog expansion I/O modules.
The Expansion Bus Fault is used when the Option Match feature is not enabled for the
digital and/or analog expansion I/O modules. The Expansion Bus Fault only monitors
for communication disruptions between the Control Module and digital and/or
analog expansion I/O modules. Expansion bus communication disruptions between
the Control Module and Operator Station do not affect the Expansion Bus fault.
Fault Name
Parameter
No.
Description
Output Relay 0 Communication Idle Action 308
• defines how Output Relay 0 when assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay or Control/
Control & Trip Relay responds when a network scanner goes into Idle Mode or a
programmable logic controller (PLC) goes into Program Mode
Output Relay 0 Communication Idle Value 309
• defines which state Output Relay 0 should go to when a network scanner goes into Idle
Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode
Output Relay 1 Communication Idle Action 314
• defines how Output Relay 1 when assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay or Control/
Control & Trip Relay responds when a network scanner goes into Idle Mode or a PLC goes
into Program Mode
Output Relay 1 Communication Idle Value 315
• defines which state Output Relay 1 should go to when a network scanner goes into Idle
Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode
Output Relay 2 Communication Idle Action 320
• defines how Output Relay 2 when assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay or Control/
Control & Trip Relay responds when a network scanner goes into Idle Mode or a PLC goes
into Program Mode
Output Relay 2 Communication Idle Value 321
• defines which state Output Relay 2 should go to when a network scanner goes into Idle
Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode
Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Communication Idle Action 326
• defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 1 responds when a network
scanner goes into Idle Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode
Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Communication Idle Value 327
• defines which state both output relays should go to when a network scanner goes into Idle
Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode
Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Communication Idle Action 332
• defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 2 responds when network
scanner goes into Idle Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode
Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Communication Idle Value 333
• defines which state both output relays should go to when a network scanner goes into Idle
Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode
Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Communication Idle Action 338
• defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 3 responds when a network
scanner goes into Idle Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode
Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Communication Idle Value 339
• defines which state both output relays should go to when a network scanner goes into Idle
Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode
Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay Communication Idle Action 344
• defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 4 responds when a network
scanner goes into Idle Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode
Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay Communication Idle Value 345
• defines which state both output relays should go to when a network scanner goes into Idle
Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode
40 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 3 System Operation and Configuration
Table 6 - Expansion Bus Fault Functions
Emergency Start
In an emergency, it may be necessary to start a motor even if a protection fault or a
communication fault exists. The trip condition may be the result of a thermal overload
condition or the number of starts exceeded its configuration. These conditions can be
overridden using the Emergency Start feature of the E300 relay.
To enable the Emergency Start feature in the E300 relay, set the Emergency Start
Enable (Parameter 216) to Enable.
Table 7 - Emergency Start (Parameter 216)
Configure one of the Ptxx Input Assignments (Parameters 196…201) to Emergency
Start and activate the corresponding digital input.
Table 8 - Emergency Start Input PTXX Assignment (Parameters 196…201)
You can also use a network command to activate the Emergency Start feature. For the
EtherNet/IP communication module, you would set the Emergency Start bit to 1 in
Output Assembly 144. See Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
on page 227
for more information on EtherNet/IP communication.
Function
Name
How to
Enable
Setting
Parameter No.
Description
Trip/Warn Module
Blink Pattern
To Return to Ready/Run Mode:
Expansion Bus
Tri p
Set Control
Trip Enable
bit 10 to 1
186
• When communication is disrupted
between the Control Module and digital
and/or analog expansion I/O modules,
the E300 relay goes into a tripped state
• Red 3 long and 11
short
• Verify that the expansion bus cables are properly plugged
into the Bus In and Bus Out ports of all expansion
modules
• When all expansion I/O modules’ status LEDs are solid
green, reset the trip state of the E300 relay by pressing
the blue reset button on the Communication Module, via
network communication, with the internal web server of
the EtherNet/IP communication module, or by an
assigned digital input
Expansion Bus
Warning
Set Control
Warning
Enable bit
10 to 1
192
• When communication is disrupted
between the Control Module and digital
and/or analog expansion I/O modules,
the E300 relay goes into a warning state
•Yellow 3 long and
11 short
• Verify that the expansion bus cables are properly plugged
into the Bus In and Bus Out ports of all expansion
modules
• When all expansion I/O modules’ status LEDs are solid
green, the warning state of the E300 relay automatically
clears
IMPORTANT Activating Emergency Start inhibits overload and blocked start protection.
Running in this mode can cause equipment overheating and fire.
Value Description
0 Disable
1Enable
Value Assignment Description
0 Normal Function as a digital input
1 Trip Reset Reset the E300 relay when it is in a tripped state
2 Remote Trip Force the E300 relay to go into a tripped state
3Activate FLA2
Use the value in FLA2 Setting (Parameter 177) for the current-based
protection algorithms
4 Force Snapshot Force the E300 relay to update its Snapshot log
5 Emergency Start Issue an Emergency Start command
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 41
System Operation and Configuration Chapter 3
When the Emergency Start feature is active, the following actions occur in the E300
relay:
• Protection trips are ignored
• Output relays configured as Trip Relays are put into closed state
• Normal operation resumes with any Normal or Control Relay assigned output
relay
• The Emergency Start Active bit is set to 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20)
bit 6
Language
The E300 relay with firmware v5.000 and higher supports multiple languages for its
Diagnostic Station and web server. Parameter text is displayed in the selected language.
Language (Parameter 212) displays the E300 relay parameter text is displayed in the
selected language.
Diagnostic Station User-
defined Screens
The Diagnostic Station has four user-defined screens that are part of the its display
sequence, in which you can define up to two parameters per screen.
Table 9 - User-defined Screen Parameters
Display Timeout
Display Timeout (Parameter 436) defines the time duration in which there is no
display navigation activity, and the E300 Diagnostic Station returns to its normal
display sequence. Any configuration parameters that were left in an edit state are
canceled. A value of zero disables the display timeout function.
Analog I/O Expansion
Modules
The E300 relay supports up to four Analog I/O Expansion Modules on the E300
Expansion Bus. The E300 Analog Expansion Module has three independent universal
inputs and one analog output.
Name
Parameter
No.
Description
(1)
User-defined Screen 1 – Parameter 1 428 • the E300 parameter number to display for the first parameter in user-defined screen 1
User-defined Screen 1 – Parameter 2 429 • the E300 parameter number to display for the second parameter in user-defined screen 1
User-defined Screen 2 – Parameter 1 430 • he E300 parameter number to display for the first parameter in user-defined screen 2
User-defined Screen 2 – Parameter 2 431 • the E300 parameter number to display for the second parameter in user-defined screen 2
User-defined Screen 3 – Parameter 1 432 • the E300 parameter number to display for the first parameter in user-defined screen 3
User-defined Screen 3 – Parameter 2 433 • the E300 parameter number to display for the second parameter in user-defined screen 3
User-defined Screen 4 – Parameter 1 434 • the E300 parameter number to display for the first parameter in user-defined screen 4
User-defined Screen 4 – Parameter 2 435 • the E300 parameter number to display for the second parameter in user-defined screen 4
(1) You can select one of the 560 available E300 relay parameters.
42 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 3 System Operation and Configuration
Analog Input Channels
The universal analog inputs can accept the following analog signals:
• Current
– 4…20 mA
– 0…20 mA
•Voltage
– 0…10V DC
–1…5V DC
–0…5V DC
• 2-Wire or 3-Wire RTD Sensors
– 100 Ω, 200 Ω, 500 Ω, 1000 Ω Pt 385
– 100 Ω, 200 Ω, 500 Ω, 1000 Ω Pt 3916
– 10 Ω Cu 426
– 100 Ω Ni 618
– 120 Ω Ni 672
– 604 Ω NiFe 518
• Resistance
– 0…150 Ω
– 0…750 Ω
– 0…3000 Ω
– 0…6000 Ω (PTC and NTC Sensors)
The analog inputs can report data in four different formats. Table 10
through Tab le 13
display the data ranges for all available analog input types for the four available data
formats.
Table 10 - Analog Input Data Format for Current Input Type
Input
Range
Input Value Condition
Engineering
Units
Engineering
Units x 10
Raw /
Proportional
PID
4…20 mA
21.00 mA High Limit 21000 2100 32767 17407
20.00 mA High Range 20000 2000 32767 16383
4.00 mA Low Range 4000 400 -32768 0
3.00 mA Low Limit 3000 300 -32768 -1024
0…20 mA
21.00 mA High Limit 21000 2100 32767 17202
20.00 mA High Range 20000 2000 32767 16383
0.00 mA Low Range 0 0 -32768 0
0.00 mA Low Limit 0 0 -32768 0
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 43
System Operation and Configuration Chapter 3
Table 11 - Analog Input Data Format for Voltage Input Type
Table 12 - Analog Input Data Format for RTD Input Type
Input
Range
Input Value Condition
Engineering
Units
Engineering
Units x 10
Raw /
Proportional
PID
0…10 V DC
10.50V DC High Limit 10500 1050 32767 17202
10.00V DC High Range 10000 1000 32767 16383
0.00V DC Low Range 0 0 -32768 0
0.00V DC Low Limit 0 0 -32768 0
1…5 V DC
5.25V DC High Limit 5250 525 32767 17407
5.00V DC High Range 5000 500 32767 16383
1.00V DC Low Range 1000 100 -32768 0
0.50V DC Low Limit 500 50 -32768 -2048
0…5V DC
5.25V DC High Limit 5250 525 32767 17202
5.00V DC High Range 5000 500 32767 16383
0.00V DC Low Range 0 0 -32768 0
0.00V DC Low Limit 0 0 -32768 0
Input Range Input Value Condition
Engineering
Units
Engineering
Units x 10
Raw /
Proportional
PID
RTD
100 Ω, 200 Ω,
500 Ω, 1000 Ω Pt
385
850.0 °C High Limit 8500 850 32767 16383
850.0 °C High Range 8500 850 32767 16383
-200.0 °C Low Range -2000 -200 -32768 0
-200.0 °C Low Limit -2000 -200 -32768 0
1562.0 °F High Limit 15620 1562 32767 16383
1562.0 °F High Range 15620 1562 32767 16383
-328.0 °F Low Range -3280 -328 -32768 0
-328.0 °F Low Limit -3280 -328 -32768 0
RTD
100 Ω, 200 Ω,
500 Ω, 1000 Ω Pt
3916
630.0 °C High Limit 6300 630 32767 16383
630.0 °C High Range 6300 630 32767 16383
-200.0 °C Low Range -2000 -200 -32768 0
-200.0 °C Low Limit -2000 -200 -32768 0
1166.0 °F High Limit 11660 1166 32767 16383
1166.0 °F High Range 11660 1166 32767 16383
-328.0 °F Low Range -3280 -328 -32768 0
-328.0 °F Low Limit -3280 -328 -32768 0
RTD
10 Ω Cu 426
260.0 °C High Limit 2600 260 32767 16383
260.0 °C High Range 2600 260 32767 16383
-100.0 °C Low Range -1000 -100 -32768 0
-100.0 °C Low Limit -1000 -100 -32768 0
500.0 °F High Limit 5000 500 32767 16383
500.0 °F High Range 5000 500 32767 16383
-148.0 °F Low Range -1480 -148 -32768 0
-148.0 °F Low Limit -1480 -148 -32768 0
44 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 3 System Operation and Configuration
Table 13 - Analog Input Data Format for Resistance Input Type
The performance for the input channels of the E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module is
dependent on the filter setting for each channel. The total scan time for the input
channels of the module is determined by adding the conversion time for all enabled
input channels.
RTD
100 Ω Ni 618
260.0 °C High Limit 2600 260 32767 16383
260.0 °C High Range 2600 260 32767 16383
-100.0 °C Low Range -1000 -100 -32768 0
-100.0 °C Low Limit -1000 -100 -32768 0
500.0 °F High Limit 5000 500 32767 16383
500.0 °F High Range 5000 500 32767 16383
-148.0 °F Low Range -1480 -148 -32768 0
-148.0 °F Low Limit -1480 -148 -32768 0
RTD
120 Ω Ni 672
260.0 °C High Limit 2600 260 32767 16383
260.0 °C High Range 2600 260 32767 16383
-80.0 °C Low Range -800 -80 -32768 0
-80.0 °C Low Limit -800 -80 -32768 0
500.0 °F High Limit 5000 500 32767 16383
500.0 °F High Range 5000 500 32767 16383
-112.0 °F Low Range -1120 -112 -32768 0
-112.0 °F Low Limit -1120 -112 -32768 0
RTD
100 Ω NiFe 518
200.0 °C High Limit 2000 200 32767 16383
200.0 °C High Range 2000 200 32767 16383
-100.0 °C Low Range -1000 -100 -32768 0
-100.0 °C Low Limit -1000 -100 -32768 0
392.0 °F High Limit 3920 392 32767 16383
392.0 °F High Range 3920 392 32767 16383
-148.0 °F Low Range -1480 -148 -32768 0
-148.0 °F Low Limit -1480 -148 -32768 0
Input Range Input Value Condition
Engineering
Units
Engineering
Units x 10
Raw /
Proportional
PID
Resistance
0…50 Ω
150.00 Ω High Limit 15000 1500 32767 16383
150.00 Ω High Range 15000 1500 32767 16383
0.00 Ω Low Range 0 0 -32768 0
0.00 Ω Low Limit 0 0 -32768 0
Resistance
0…750 Ω
750.0 Ω High Limit 7500 750 32767 16383
750.0 Ω High Range 7500 750 32767 16383
0.0 Ω Low Range 0 0 -32768 0
0.0 Ω Low Limit 0 0 -32768 0
Resistance
0…3000 Ω
3000.0 Ω High Limit 30000 3000 32767 16383
3000.0 Ω High Range 30000 3000 32767 16383
0.0 Ω Low Range 0 0 -32768 0
0.0 Ω Low Limit 0 0 -32768 0
Resistance
0…6000 Ω
(PTC / NTC)
6000 Ω High Limit 6000 600 32767 16383
6000 Ω High Range 6000 600 32767 16383
0 Ω Low Range 0 0 -32768 0
0 Ω Low Limit 0 0 -32768 0
Input Range Input Value Condition
Engineering
Units
Engineering
Units x 10
Raw /
Proportional
PID
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 45
System Operation and Configuration Chapter 3
Table 14 - Analog Input Channel Conversion Time
Example:
• Channel 00 is configured for a 3-wire RTD and 4 Hz filter (conversion time =
1024 ms).
• Channel 01 is configured for 17 Hz voltage (conversion time = 153 ms).
• Channel 02 is configured for 62 Hz current (conversion time = 65 ms).
The E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module input channel scan time is 1242 ms
(1024+153+65).
Analog Output Channel
The isolated analog output can be programmed to provide one of the following analog
output signal types:
• Current
– 4…20 mA
– 0…20 mA
•Voltage
– 0…10V DC
–1…5V DC
–0…5V DC
The analog outputs can report data as a percent of range. Tab le 15
and Tabl e 16 display
the data ranges for all available analog output types.
Table 15 - Analog Output Data Format for Current Output Type
Input Type Filter Frequency Conversion Time
Current, Voltage,
2-Wire RTD, Resistance
17 Hz 153 ms
4 Hz 512 ms
62 Hz 65 ms
470 Hz 37 ms
3-Wire RTD
17 Hz 306 ms
4 Hz 1024 ms
62 Hz 130 ms
470 Hz 74 ms
Output Range Output Signal Condition % Range
4…20 mA
21.000 mA High Limit 106.25%
20.000 mA High Range 100.00%
4.000 mA Low Range 0.00%
3.000 mA Low Limit -6.25%
0…20 mA
21.00 mA High Limit 105.00%
20.00 mA High Range 100.00%
0.00 mA Low Range 0.00%
0.00 mA Low Limit 0.00%
46 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 3 System Operation and Configuration
Table 16 - Analog Output Data Format for Voltage Output Type
The analog output can be used to communicate E300 diagnostic information via an
analog signal to distributed control systems, programmable logic controllers, or panel-
mounted analog meters. The analog output can represent one of the following E300
diagnostic parameters:
•Average %FLA
•%TCU
• Ground Fault Current
• Current Imbalance
•Average L-L Voltage
•Voltage Imbalance
•Total kW
•Total kVAR
•Total kVA
• Total Power Factor
• User-defined Value
Output Range Output Value Condition % Range
0…10 V DC
10.50V DC High Limit 105.00%
10.00V DC High Range 100.00%
0.00V DC Low Range 0.00%
0.00V DC Low Limit 0.00%
1…5 V DC
5.25V DC High Limit 106.25%
5.00V DC High Range 100.00%
1.00V DC Low Range 0.00%
0.50V DC Low Limit -6.25%
0…5 V DC
5.25V DC High Limit 105.00%
5.00V DC High Range 100.00%
0.00V DC Low Range 0.00%
0.00V DC Low Limit 0.00%
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 47
System Operation and Configuration Chapter 3
Table 17 - Analog Output Selection Type
The E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module output channel update rate is 10 ms.
Analog Modules
Table 18 - Analog Module 1 Channel Descriptions
Output Selection Low Range High Range
Average % FLA 0% 100%
Scaled Average % FLA 0% 200%
% TCU 0% 100%
Ground Fault Current
Internal, 0.50…5.00 A 0.50 A 5.00 A
External, 0.02…0.10 A 0.02 A 0.10 A
External, 0.10…0.50 A 0.10 A 0.50 A
External, 0.20…1.00 A 0.20 A 1.00 A
External, 1.00…5.00 A 1.00 A 5.00 A
Current Imbalance 0% 100%
Average L-L Voltage 0V (PT Primary) V
Voltage Imbalance 0% 100%
Total kW 0 kW (FLA1 x PT Primary x 1.732) V
Total kVAR 5.25V DC (FLA1 x PT Primary x 1.732) V
Total kVA 5.00V DC (FLA1 x PT Primary x 1.732) V
Total Power Factor -50% (Lagging) +50% (Leading)
User-defined Value -32768 32767
Name
Parameter
No.
Description
Input Channel 00 Type 437 • defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 00 of Analog Module 1 monitors
Input Channel 00 Format 438 • defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported
Input Channel 00 Temperature Unit 439 • defines the temperature unit for RTD sensor readings
Input Channel 00 Filter Frequency 440 • defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module
Input Channel 00 Open Circuit State 441 • defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit
(1)
Input Channel 00 RTD Type Enable 442 • defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor
Input Channel 01 Type 446 • defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 01 of Analog Module 1 monitors
Input Channel 01 Format 447 • defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported
Input Channel 01 Temperature Unit 448 • defines the temperature unit for RTD sensor readings
Input Channel 01 Filter Frequency 449 • defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module
Input Channel 01 Open Circuit State 450 • defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit
(1)
Input Channel 01 RTD Type Enable 451 • defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor
Input Channel 02 Type 455 • defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 02 of Analog Module 1 monitors
Input Channel 02 Format 456 • defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported
Input Channel 02 Temperature Unit 457 • defines the temperature unit for RTD sensor readings
Input Channel 02 Filter Frequency 458 • defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module
Input Channel 02 Open Circuit State 459 • defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit
(1)
Input Channel 02 RTD Type Enable 460 • defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor
Output Channel 00 Type 464 • defines the type of analog signal that Output Channel 00 of Analog Module 1 provides
Output Channel 00 Selection 465 • defines the E300 relay parameter that Output Channel 00 represents
Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action 466 • defines the value that Output Channel 00 provides when there is an E300 Expansion Bus fault
Output Channel 00 Protection Fault Action 467 • defines the value that Output Channel 00 provides when the E300 is in a tripped state
(1) Open circuit detection is always enabled for this input channel.
48 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 3 System Operation and Configuration
Table 19 - Analog Module 2 Descriptions
Name
Parameter
No.
Description
Input Channel 00 Type 468 • defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 00 of Analog Module 2 monitors
Input Channel 00 Format 469 • defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported
Input Channel 00 Temperature Unit 470 • defines the temperature unit for RTD sensor readings
Input Channel 00 Filter Frequency 471 • defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module
Input Channel 00 Open Circuit State 472 • defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit
(1)
Input Channel 00 RTD Type Enable 473 • defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor
Input Channel 01 Type 477 • defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 01 of Analog Module 2 monitors
Input Channel 01 Format 478 • defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported
Input Channel 01 Temperature Unit 479 • defines the temperature unit for RTD sensor readings
Input Channel 01 Filter Frequency 480 • defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module
Input Channel 01 Open Circuit State 481 • defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit
(1)
Input Channel 01 RTD Type Enable 482 • defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor
Input Channel 02 Type 486 • defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 02 of Analog Module 2 monitors
Input Channel 02 Format 487 • defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported
Input Channel 02 Temperature Unit 488 • defines the temperature unit for RTD sensor readings
Input Channel 02 Filter Frequency 489 • defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module
Input Channel 02 Open Circuit State 490 • defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit
(1)
Input Channel 02 RTD Type Enable 491 • defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor
Output Channel 00 Type 464 • defines the type of analog signal that Output Channel 00 of Analog Module 2 provides
Output Channel 00 Selection 496 • defines the E300 relay parameter that Output Channel 00 represents
Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action 497
• defines the value that the E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module Output Channel 00 provides when there is an E300
Expansion Bus fault
Output Channel 00 Protection Fault Action 498
• defines the value that the E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module Output Channel 00 provides when the E300 is in a
tripped state
(1) Open circuit detection is always enabled for this input channel.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 49
System Operation and Configuration Chapter 3
Table 20 - Analog Module 3 Channel Descriptions
Name
Parameter
No.
Description
Input Channel 00 Type 499 • defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 00 of Analog Module 3 monitors
Input Channel 00 Format 500 • defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported
Input Channel 00 Temperature Unit 501 • defines the temperature unit for RTD sensor readings
Input Channel 00 Filter Frequency 502 • defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module
Input Channel 00 Open Circuit State 503 • defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit
(1)
Input Channel 00 RTD Type Enable 504 • defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor
Input Channel 01 Type 508 • defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 01 of Analog Module 3 monitors
Input Channel 01 Format 509 • defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported
Input Channel 01 Temperature Unit 510 • defines the temperature unit for RTD sensor readings
Input Channel 01 Filter Frequency 511 • defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module
Input Channel 01 Open Circuit State 512 • defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit
(1)
Input Channel 01 RTD Type Enable 513 • defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor
Input Channel 02 Type 517 • defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 02 of Analog Module 3 monitors
Input Channel 02 Format 518 • defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported
Input Channel 02 Temperature Unit 519 • defines the temperature unit for RTD sensor readings
Input Channel 02 Filter Frequency 520 • defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module
Input Channel 02 Open Circuit State 521 • defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit
(1)
Input Channel 02 RTD Type Enable 522 • defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor
Output Channel 00 Type 526 • defines the type of analog signal that Output Channel 00 of Analog Module 3 provides
Output Channel 00 Selection 527 • defines the E300 relay parameter that Output Channel 00 represents
Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action 528
• defines the value that the E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module Output Channel 00 provides when there is an E300
Expansion Bus fault
Output Channel 00 Protection Fault Action 529
• defines the value that the E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module Output Channel 00 provides when the E300 is in a
tripped state
(1) Open circuit detection is always enabled for this input channel.
50 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 3 System Operation and Configuration
Table 21 - Analog Module 4 Channel Descriptions
Network Start Configuration
States
An E300 relay with firmware v5.000 and higher provides two start command bits in
Output Assembly 144 (NetworkStart1/O.LogicDefinedPt00Data and
NetworkStart2/O.LogicDefinedPt01Data) that is issued by a network scanner or
control system and used by a Networked based Operating Mode (Parameter 195) to
start and stop a motor through a communication network command. These
networked based start commands can be configured to go to a specific state when one
of following events occur:
• Communication Fault Mode – when network communication is lost or an
error occurs
• Communication Idle Mode – when a network scanner changes to Idle mode
or a PLC changes to Program mode
Name
Parameter
No.
Description
Input Channel 00 Type 530 • defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 00 of Analog Module 4 monitors
Input Channel 00 Format 531 • defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported
Input Channel 00 Temperature Unit 532 • defines the temperature unit for RTD sensor readings
Input Channel 00 Filter Frequency 533 • defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module
Input Channel 00 Open Circuit State 534 • defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit
(1)
Input Channel 00 RTD Type Enable 535 • defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor
Input Channel 01 Type 539 • defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 01 of Analog Module 4 monitors
Input Channel 01 Format 540 • defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported
Input Channel 01 Temperature Unit 541 • defines the temperature unit for RTD sensor readings
Input Channel 01 Filter Frequency 542 • defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module
Input Channel 01 Open Circuit State 543 • defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit
(1)
Input Channel 01 RTD Type Enable 544 • defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor
Input Channel 02 Type 548 • defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 02 of Analog Module 4 monitors
Input Channel 02 Format 549 • defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported
Input Channel 02 Temperature Unit 550 • defines the temperature unit for RTD sensor readings
Input Channel 02 Filter Frequency 551 • defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module
Input Channel 02 Open Circuit State 552 • defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit
(1)
Input Channel 02 RTD Type Enable 556 • defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor
Output Channel 00 Type 557 • defines the type of analog signal that Output Channel 00 of Analog Module 4 provides
Output Channel 00 Selection 558 • defines the E300 relay parameter that Output Channel 00 represents
Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action 559
• defines the value that the E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module Output Channel 00 provides when there is an E300
Expansion Bus fault
Output Channel 00 Protection Fault Action 560
• defines the value that the E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module Output Channel 00 provides when the E300 is in a
tripped state
(1) Open circuit detection is always enabled for this input channel.
IMPORTANT It is important that you fully understand the use of these parameters and
the order of their priority under the conditions of a communication fault and
communication idle event.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 51
System Operation and Configuration Chapter 3
The default setting for these modes is to issue a Stop command when a Networked
based Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is configured. The Network Start
Configuration States follow this priority order:
1. Network Start Communication Fault State
2. Network Start Final Fault State
3. Network Start Communication Idle State
Network Start Communication Fault Modes
When the E300 relay with firmware revision v5.000 or higher loses communication,
experiences a communication bus fault, or has a duplicate node address, you can
configure the E300 Network Start commands with the Network Start
Communication Fault Mode parameters to go to a specific state (Stop or Start) or hold
the last state.
An E300 relay with firmware revision v5.000 or higher supports the Fault Mode
Output State Duration feature, which can be used with redundant network scanners or
control systems. The Fault Mode Output State Duration is the time that the E300
Network Start commands can go to a temporary state (Stop, Start, or Hold Last State)
when a communication fault occurs. Configure this temporary state by using the
Network Start Communication Fault Mode parameters.
If communication between the E300 relay and a network scanner or control system is
not restored within the Fault Mode Output State Duration time (Parameter 561), the
E300 Network Start commands go to a final fault state (Stop or Start) which you
configure using the Final Fault Mode parameters.
If communication between the E300 relay and a network scanner or control system is
restored within the Fault Mode Output State Duration time (Parameter 561), the
E300 Network Start commands resume with the state commanded by the network
scanner or control system.
The parameters that are listed in Table 2 2
configure the Network Start Configuration
Fault Mode for both Network Start commands.
Table 22 - Network Start Configuration Fault Mode Parameters
Network Start Communication Idle Modes
When a network scanner goes into Idle Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode while
communicating with an E300 relay, you can configure the E300 Network Start
commands to go to a specific state (Open or Close) or hold the last state. The
Name
Parameter
No.
Description
Fault Mode Output State Duration
(1)
561
• defines the amount of time in seconds that the E300 remains in the Network Start Communication Fault Mode
state when a communication fault occurs. 0 = forever
• if communication between the E300 relay and a network scanner or control system is not restored within the
Fault Mode Output State Duration time, the E300 Network Start command goes to the final fault state, which is
configured using the Network Start Final Fault Mode parameters
Network Start Communication Fault Action 569 • defines how the Network Start commands respond when a communication fault occurs
Network Start Communication Fault Value 570 • defines which state the Network Start command should go to when a communication fault occurs
Network Start Final Fault Value
(1)
573
• defines which state the Network Start command should go to when communication is not restored within the
time defined in Fault Mode Output State Duration (Parameter 561)
(1) Available in E300 relay firmware v5.000 and higher.
52 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 3 System Operation and Configuration
parameters that are listed in Table 23 configure the Network Start Communication
Idle Mode for the Network Start commands.
Table 23 - Network Start Communication Idle Mode Parameters
Introduction to Operating
Modes
The E300 relay supports a number of Operating Modes, which consist of
configuration rules and logic to control typical full-voltage motor starters, including:
•Overload
•Non-Reversing Starter
•Reversing Starter
• Wye/Delta (Star/Delta) Starter
•Two-Speed Starter
•Monitor
The default Operating Mode (Parameter 195) for the E300 relay is Overload
(Network) in which the E300 relay operates like a traditional overload relay in which
one of the output relays is assigned as a Trip Relay or Control Relay. You can use
network commands to control any output relays that are assigned as Normal output
relays or Control Relays. For Control Module firmware v1.000 and v2.000, one output
relay must be assigned as a Trip Relay. For Control Module firmware v3.000 and
higher, one output relay must be configured as a Trip Relay or Control Relay. Invalid
configuration of the output relays causes the E300 relay to go into Invalid
Configuration Mode and trip on a configuration trip. Operating Modes on page 53
describes the functionality of the available Operating Modes for the E300 relay and
their associated configuration rules.
Name
Parameter
No.
Description
Network Start Communication Idle Action 571
• defines how the Network Start commands respond when a network scanner goes into Idle mode or a PLC goes
into Program mode
Network Start Communication Idle Value 572
• defines which state the Network Start commands should go to when a network scanner goes into Idle Mode or a
PLC goes into Program Mode
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 53
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
The E300™ Electronic Overload Relay supports up to 54 operating modes, which
consist of configuration rules and logic to control typical full-voltage motor starters,
including:
•Overload
•Non-reversing starter
•Reversing starter
• Wye/Delta (Star/Delta) starter
•Two-speed starter
•Monitoring device
This chapter explains the configuration rules, logic, and control wiring that is required
for the available operating modes. The default Operating Mode (Parameter 195 or
Drop-down menu using the E300 Add-on Profile in Studio 5000™) for the E300 relay
is Overload (Network), where the E300 relay operates like a traditional overload relay
in which one of the output relays is assigned as a Trip Relay or Control Relay. You can
use network commands to control any output relays that are assigned as Normal
output relays or Control Relays. For Control Module firmware v1.000 and v2.000, one
output relay must be assigned as a Trip Relay. For Control Module firmware v3.000
and higher, one output relay must be configured as a Trip Relay or Control Relay.
Invalid configuration of the output relays causes the E300 relay to go into Invalid
Configuration Mode and trip on a configuration trip.
Overload Operating Modes
The overload-based operating modes of the E300 relay make the E300 operate as a
traditional overload relay, in which it interrupts the control circuit of a contactor coil
with a normally closed trip relay or a normally open control relay. There are four
overload-based operating modes to choose from:
•Network
• Operator Station
•Local I/O
•Custom
The E300 relay is wired as a traditional overload relay with one of the output relays
configured as a normally closed trip relay. Figure 7
is a wiring diagram of a non-
reversing starter. Relay 0 is configured as a trip relay, and Relay 1 is configured as a
normally open control relay, which receives commands from an automation controller
to energize the contactor coil.
54 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 4 Operating Modes
Figure 7 - Trip Relay Wiring Diagram
For Control Module firmware v3.000 and higher, you can also wire the E300 relay as a
control relay so that the relay that is controlled by the communication network opens
when a trip event occurs. Figure 8
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with
Relay 0 configured as a control relay. Relay 0 receives control commands from an
automation controller to energize or de-energize the contactor coil. Relay 0 also goes to
an open state when there is a trip event.
Figure 8 - Control Relay Wiring Diagram
Figure 9 - Timing Diagram
Overload (Network)
The E300 relay’s default Operating Mode (Parameter 195 = 2) is Overload (Network),
in which the E300 operates as a traditional overload relay with one output relay that is
assigned as a normally closed trip relay or a normally open control relay. You can use
network commands to control the control relay or any of the remaining output relays
that are assigned as normal output relays.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. For Control Module firmware v1.000 and v2.000, one output relay must be
assigned as a trip relay. Set any of the Output Ptxx Assignments (Parameters
202…204) to Trip Relay.
(1) Contact shown with supply voltage applied.
Relay 0 configured
as a trip relay
(1)
Relay 1
R13 R14 R03 R04
Motor
A1 A2
(1) Contact shown with supply voltage applied.
Relay 0 configured
as a control relay
(1)
R03 R04
Motor
A1 A2
Trip Relay
Trip Reset
Device Status 0
Trip Preset
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 55
Operating Modes Chapter 4
2. For Control Module firmware v3.000 and higher, one output relay must be
assigned as a trip relay or control relay. Set any of the Output Ptxx Assignments
(Parameters 202…204) to Trip Relay or Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
DeviceLogix™ Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on
power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 2
Overload (Operator Station)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode Overload (Operator Station) (Parameter 195 = 26)
operates as a traditional overload relay with one output relay that is assigned as a
normally closed trip relay or a normally open control relay. The Overload (Operator
Station) operating mode is used when an automation controller uses the start and stop
keys of the E300 Operator Station for its motor control logic. You can use network
commands to control the control relay or any of the remaining output relays that are
assigned as normal output relays.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled, and the Local/Remote
yellow LED is illuminated to indicate that the operator station is being used for local
control.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. One output relay must be assigned as a trip relay or control relay. Set any of the
Output Ptxx Assignments (Parameters 202…204) to Trip Relay or Control
Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4. Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
5. Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
• Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186)
• Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
Or
• Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC (Parameter
192)
• Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
6. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on
power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 26.
56 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 4 Operating Modes
Overload (Local I/O)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode Overload (Local I/O) (Parameter 195 = 35) operates
as a traditional overload relay with one output relay that is assigned as a normally
closed trip relay or a normally open control relay. The Overload (Local I/O) operating
mode is used for standalone applications or automation systems that do not use an
E300 Operator Station. You can use the digital inputs of the E300 for the motor
control logic of an automation controller. The automation controller can use network
commands to control the control relay or any of the remaining output relays that are
assigned as Normal output relays. The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is
disabled, and a digital input that is assigned as a trip reset is required.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. One output relay must be assigned as a trip relay or control relay. Set any of the
Output Ptxx Assignments (Parameters 202…204) to Trip Relay or Control
Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4. Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
5. Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
• Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186)
• Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
Or
• Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC (Parameter
192)
• Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
6. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on
power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 35.
Overload (Custom)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode Overload (Custom) (Parameter 195 = 49) operates
as a traditional overload relay with one output relay that is assigned as a normally
closed trip relay or a normally open control relay. The Overload (Custom) operating
mode is used for applications that want customized DeviceLogix programs. This
operating mode requires minimal configuration rules.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 57
Operating Modes Chapter 4
2. Set any of the Output Ptxx Assignments (Parameters 202…204) to Trip Relay
or Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
DeviceLogix Program
The last saved DeviceLogix program is executed in the E300 relay on power-up or
when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 49.
Non-reversing Starter
Operating Modes
The non-reversing starter-based operating modes of the E300 relay provide the control
logic for a non-reversing full voltage starter. A normally open control relay controls the
contactor coil. When a trip event occurs, the control relay remains open until the E300
receives a trip reset command. There are 15 non-reversing starter-based operating
modes to choose from:
•Network
• Network with Feedback
• Operator Station
• Operator Station with Feedback
• Local I/O – Two-wire Control
• Local I/O with Feedback – Two-wire Control
• Local I/O – Three-wire Control
• Local I/O with Feedback – Three-wire Control
• Network & Operator Station
• Network & Operator Station with Feedback
• Network & Local I/O – Two-wire Control
• Network & Local I/O with Feedback – Two-wire Control
• Network & Local I/O – Three-wire Control
• Network & Local I/O with Feedback – Three-wire Control
•Custom
Non-reversing Starter (Network)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode Non-Reversing Starter (Network) (Parameter 195 =
3) uses the network tag LogicDefinedPt00Data in Output Assembly 144 to control
Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. LogicDefinedPt00Data is a maintained
value, so the non-reversing starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data has
a value of 1. You can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication
is lost using the Network Communication Fault and Network Communication Idle
parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in Chapter 3
.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Non-reversing Starter (Network) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data to control the starter. When communication is restored
between an automation controller and the E300 relay , the starter energizes if the
value in LogicDefinedPt00Data is set to 1.
58 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 4 Operating Modes
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is
controlled by the communication network and opens when a trip event occurs.
Figure 10
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with Output Relay 0
configured as a control relay.
Figure 10 - Non-reversing Starter (Network) Wiring Diagram
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on
power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 3.
Timing Diagram
Figure 11 - Non-reversing Starter (Network) Timing Diagram
Non-reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode Non-Reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback
(Parameter 195 = 4) uses the network tag LogicDefinedPt00Data in Output Assembly
144 to control Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. LogicDefinedPt00Data is a
Control Power
E300 Relay
Relay 0
R03 R04
Run
Relay 0
Trip Reset
Trip Status
Trip Event
Run/Stop
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 59
Operating Modes Chapter 4
maintained value, so the non-reversing starter remains energized when
LogicDefinedPt00Data has a value of 1. You can program the appropriate state of the
starter when communication is lost using the Network Communication Fault and
Network Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in
Chapter 3
.
The auxiliary contact from the contactor of the non-reversing starter is wired into
Input 0. If a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback
Timeout (Parameter 213), then the E300 relay issues a trip or warning event.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4. Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback Timeout
Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is
controlled by the communication network and opens when a trip event occurs.
Figure 12
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with the contactor auxiliary
wired to Input 0 and Output Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Figure 12 - Non-reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback Wiring Diagram
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on
power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 4.
IMPORTANT
The Non-reversing Starter (Network) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data to control the starter. When communication is restored
between an automation controller and the E300 relay, the starter energizes if the
value in LogicDefinedPt00Data is set to 1.
Control Power
E300 Relay
Relay 0
R03 R04
Run
Run Aux
IN 0
60 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 4 Operating Modes
Timing Diagram
Figure 13 - Non-reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback Timing Diagram
Non-reversing Starter (Operator Station)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode Non-Reversing Starter (Operating Station)
(Parameter 195 = 27) uses the Operator Station’s “I” and “0” keys to control Relay 0,
which controls the contactor coil. These keys are momentary push buttons, so the non-
reversing starter remains energized when you release the “I” button. The E300 relay
issues a trip or warning event if the E300 Operator Station disconnects from the base
relay.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled, and the Local/Remote
yellow LED is illuminated to indicate that the operator station is being used for local
control.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4. Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
5. Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
• Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186)
• Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
Normal Operation Trip Event
Feedback Timeout
Trip
Timer
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Run/Stop
Relay 0
Feedback Timeout
Feedback
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 61
Operating Modes Chapter 4
Or
• Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC (Parameter
192)
• Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
6. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay, and it opens when a trip
event occurs. Figure 14
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with Output
Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Figure 14 - Non-reversing Starter (Operator Station) Wiring Diagram
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on
power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 27.
Timing Diagram
Figure 15 - Non-reversing Starter (Operator Station) Timing Diagram
Control Power
E300 Relay
Relay 0
R03 R04
Run
0-StopI-Run
Trip Event
Tri p
Trip Reset
Stop
Relay 0
Start
62 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 4 Operating Modes
Non-reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode Non-Reversing Starter (Operator Station) with
Feedback (Parameter 195 = 28) uses the E300 Operator Station’s “I” and “0” keys to
control Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. These keys are momentary push
buttons, so the non-reversing starter remains energized when you release the “I”
button. The E300 relay issues a trip or warning event if the E300 Operator Station
disconnects from the base relay.
The auxiliary contact from the contactor of the non-reversing starter is wired into
Input 0. If a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback
Timeout (Parameter 213), then the E300 relay issues a trip or warning event.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled, and the Local/Remote
yellow LED is illuminated to indicate that the operator station is being used for local
control.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4. Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
5. Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
• Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186)
• Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
Or
• Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC (Parameter
192)
• Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
6. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
8. Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback Timeout
Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is
controlled by the communication network and opens when a trip event occurs.
Figure 16
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with the contactor auxiliary
wired to Input 0 and Output Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 63
Operating Modes Chapter 4
Figure 16 - Non-reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback Wiring Diagram
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on
power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 28.
Timing Diagram
Figure 17 - Non-reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback Timing Diagram
Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode Non-Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two Wire
Control (Parameter 195 = 36) uses Input 0 to control Output Relay 0, which controls
the contactor coil. Input 0 is a maintained value, so the non-reversing starter remains
energized when Input 0 is active.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Control Power
E300 Relay
Relay 0
R03 R04
Run
0-Stop
I-Run
Run Aux
IN 0
Start
Trip Event
Feedback Timeout
Trip
Timer
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Stop
Relay 0
Feedback Timeout
Feedback IN 0
64 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 4 Operating Modes
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
5. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is
controlled by the state of Input 0 and opens when a trip event occurs. Figure 18
is a
wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with Output Relay 0 configured as a control
relay.
Figure 18 - Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Wiring Diagram
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on
power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 36.
IMPORTANT
The Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control operating mode uses the
signal from Input 0 to control the starter. When an E300 relay powers up, the starter
energizes if Input 0 is active.
Control Power
E300 Relay
Relay 0
R03 R04
Run
Run/Stop
IN 0
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 65
Operating Modes Chapter 4
Timing Diagram
Figure 19 - Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Timing Diagram
Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode Non-Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two Wire
Control with Feedback (Parameter 195 = 37) uses the state of Input 1 to control Output
Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. Input 0 is a maintained value, so the non-
reversing starter remains energized when Input 1 is active.
The auxiliary contact from the non-reversing starter’s contactor is wired into Input 0. If
a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback Timeout
(Parameter 213), then the E300 relay issues a trip or warning event.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4. Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback Timeout
Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
5. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
6. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is
controlled by the state if Input 1 and opens when a trip event occurs. Figure 20
is a
wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with Output Relay 0 configured as a control
relay.
IMPORTANT
The Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback operating
mode uses the state of Input 1 to control the starter. When the E300 relay powers
up, the starter energizes if Input 1 is active.
Relay 0
Trip Reset
Trip Status
Trip Event
Run/Stop
66 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 4 Operating Modes
Figure 20 - Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback Wiring Diagram
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on
power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 37.
Timing Diagram
Figure 21 - Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback Timing
Diagram
Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode Non-Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three Wire
Control (Parameter 195 = 38) uses an active state in Input 1 (normally open
momentary push button) to energize Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor
coil, and a de-active state in Input 0 is used (normally closed push button) to de-
energize Output Relay 0. Both Input 0 and Input 1 are momentary values, so the non-
reversing starter only energizes if Input 0 is active and Input 1 is momentarily active.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Control Power
E300 Relay
Relay 0
R03 R04
Run
Run/Stop
IN 0
IN 1
Run Aux
Relay 0
Run/Stop
Normal Operation
Feedback Timeout
Trip
Timer
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Feedback
Feedback TimeoutTrip Event
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 67
Operating Modes Chapter 4
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
5. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is
energized when Input 0 is active and Input 1 is momentarily active. Output Relay 0 de-
energizes when Input 0 is momentarily de-active or when a trip event occurs. Figure 22
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with three wire control and an Output
Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Figure 22 - Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control Wiring Diagram
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on
power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 38.
Timing Diagram
Figure 23 - Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control Timing Diagram
Control Power
E300 Relay
Relay 0
R03 R04
Run
IN 0
IN 1
Stop
Run
Trip Event
Trip Reset
Relay 0
Stop
Start
Tri p
68 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 4 Operating Modes
Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control with
Feedback
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode Non-Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three Wire
Control with Feedback (Parameter 195 = 39) uses an active state in Input 1 (normally
open momentary push button) to energize Output Relay 0, which controls the
contactor coil, and a de-active state in Input 2 is used (normally closed momentary
push button) to de-energize Output Relay 0. Both Input 1 and Input 2 are momentary
values, so the non-reversing starter only energizes if Input 2 is active and Input 1 is
momentarily active.
The auxiliary contact from the non-reversing starter’s contactor is wired into Input 0. If
a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback Timeout
(Parameter 213), then the E300 relay issues a trip or warning event.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Three digital inputs must be available on the Control Module
3. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5. Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback Timeout
Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
6. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is
controlled by the state if Input 1 and opens when a trip event occurs. Figure 24
is a
wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with three wire control and Output Relay 0
configured as a control relay.
Figure 24 - Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control with Feedback Wiring
Diagram
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on
powerup or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 39.
Control Power
E300 Relay
Relay 0
R03 R04
Run
Run Aux
IN 0
IN 1
IN 2
Run
Stop
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 69
Operating Modes Chapter 4
Timing Diagram
Figure 25 - Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control with Feedback Timing
Diagram
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode Non-Reversing Starter (Network& Operator Station)
(Parameter 195 = 11) uses the network tag LogicDefinedPt00Data in Output
Assembly 144 in Remote control mode and the E300 Operator Station’s “I” and “0”
keys in Local control mode to control Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil.
LogicDefinedPt00Data is a maintained value, so the non-reversing starter remains
energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data has a value of 1 in Remote control mode. You
can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost in Remote
control mode by using the Network Communication Fault and Network
Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in Chapter 3
.
The E300 Operator Station’s “I”, “0”, and “Local/Remote” keys are momentary push
buttons. Press and release the “I” button in Local control mode to energize the starter.
Press and release the “0” button in Local control mode to de-energize the starter.
To change between Local and Remote control mode press and release the “Local/
Remote” button on the E300 Operator Station. The LED above “Local/Remote”
button illuminates yellow in Local control mode and red in Remote control mode.
The E300 relay issues a trip or warning event if the E300 Operator Station disconnects
from the base relay.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
Trip Event
Feedback Timeout
Tri p
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Relay 0
Feedback Timeout
Stop
Start
Timer
Feedback IN 0
IMPORTANT
The Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) operating mode uses the
value in network tag LogicDefinedPt00Data to control the starter. When
communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300 relay,
the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data is set to 1.
70 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 4 Operating Modes
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4. Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
5. Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
• Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186)
• Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
Or
• Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC (Parameter
192)
• Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
6. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is
controlled by the communication network and opens when a trip event occurs.
Figure 26
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with Output Relay 0
configured as a control relay.
Figure 26 - Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) Wiring Diagram
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on
power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 11.
Control Power
E300 Relay
Relay 0
R03 R04
Run
0-StopI-Run
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 71
Operating Modes Chapter 4
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) with Feedback
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode Non-Reversing Starter (Network& Operator Station)
with Feedback (Parameter 195 = 12) uses the network tag LogicDefinedPt00Data in
Output Assembly 144 in Remote control mode and the E300 Operator Station’s “I”
and “0” keys in Local control mode to control Relay 0, which controls the contactor
coil. LogicDefinedPt00Data is a maintained value, so the non-reversing starter remains
energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data has a value of 1 in Remote control mode. You
can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost in Remote
control mode by using the Network Communication Fault and Network
Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in Chapter 3
.
The E300 Operator Station’s “I”, “0”, and “Local/Remote” keys are momentary push
buttons. Press and release the “I” button in Local control mode to energize the starter.
Press and release the “0” button in Local control mode to de-energize the starter.
To change between Local and Remote control mode press and release the “Local/
Remote” button on the E300 Operator Station. The LED above “Local/Remote”
button illuminates yellow in Local control mode and red in Remote control mode.
The auxiliary contact from the non-reversing starter’s contactor is wired into Input 0. If
a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback Timeout
(Parameter 213), then the E300 relay issues a trip or warning event.
The E300 relay issues a trip or warning event if the E300 Operator Station disconnects
from the base relay.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4. Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
5. Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
• Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186)
• Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
Or
• Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC (Parameter
192)
• Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
6. Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback Timeout
Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
7. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
IMPORTANT
The Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) operating mode uses the
value in network tag LogicDefinedPt00Data to control the starter. When
communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300 relay,
the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data is set to 1.
72 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 4 Operating Modes
8. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is
controlled by the communication network and opens when a trip event occurs.
Figure 27
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with the contactor auxiliary
wired into Input 0 and Output Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Figure 27 - Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) with Feedback Wiring Diagram
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on
power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 12.
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode Non-Reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two
Wire Control (Parameter 195 = 16) uses the network tag LogicDefinedPt00Data in
Output Assembly 144 in Remote control mode and Input 0 in Local control mode to
control Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. Input 1 determines if the motor
starter is in Remote or Local control mode. LogicDefinedPt00Data is a maintained
value, so the non-reversing starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data has
a value of 1 in Remote control mode. You can program the appropriate state of the
starter when communication is lost in Remote control mode by using the Network
Communication Fault and Network Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569
– 573) described in Chapter 3
In Local control mode, the state of Input 0 controls Output Relay 0, which controls the
contactor coil. Input 0 is a maintained value, so the non-reversing starter remains
energized when Input 0 is active.
Input 1 is used to select between Local and Remote control mode. Activate Input 1 to
select Remote control mode. De-activate Input 1 to select Local control mode.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Relay 0
R03 R04
Run
0-StopI-Run
Control Power
E300 Relay
Run Aux
IN 0
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 73
Operating Modes Chapter 4
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
5. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is
controlled by the communication network and opens when a trip event occurs.
Figure 28
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with Output Relay 0
configured as a control relay.
Figure 28 - Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Wiring Diagram
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on
power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 16.
IMPORTANT
The Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) operating mode uses the
value in network tag LogicDefinedPt00Data to control the starter. When
communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300 relay,
the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data is set to 1.
Control Power
E300 Relay
Relay 0
R03 R04
Run
IN 0
Run/Stop
IN 1
Local Inputs/
Controller
74 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 4 Operating Modes
Timing Diagram
Figure 29 - Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Timing Diagram
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) with Feedback –
Two-wire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode Non-Reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) with
Feedback – Two Wire Control (Parameter 195 = 17) uses the network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data in Output Assembly 144 in Remote control mode and Input 2
in Local control mode to control Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. Input 3
determines whether the motor starter is in Remote or Local control mode.
LogicDefinedPt00Data is a maintained value, so the non-reversing starter remains
energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data has a value of 1 in Remote control mode. You
can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost in Remote
control mode by using the Network Communication Fault and Network
Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in Chapter 3
.
In Local control mode, the state of Input 2 controls Output Relay 0, which controls the
contactor coil. Input 2 is a maintained value, so the non-reversing starter remains
energized when Input 2 is active.
Input 3 is used to select between Local and Remote control mode. Activate Input 3 to
select Remote control mode. De-activate Input 3 to select Local control mode.
The auxiliary contact from the non-reversing starter’s contactor is wired into Input 0. If
a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback Timeout
(Parameter 213), then the E300 relay issues a trip or warning event.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Three digital inputs must be available on the Control Module
3. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
Relay 0
Trip Reset
Trip Status
Trip Event
Run/Stop
IMPORTANT
The Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) operating mode uses the
value in network tag LogicDefinedPt00Data to control the starter. When
communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300 relay, the
starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data is set to 1.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 75
Operating Modes Chapter 4
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5. Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback Timeout
Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
6. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is
controlled by the communication network and opens when a trip event occurs.
Figure 30
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with Output Relay 0
configured as a control relay.
Figure 30 - Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) with Feedback – Two-wire Control
Wiring Diagram
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on
power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 17.
Control Power
E300 Relay
Relay 0
R03 R04
Run
IN 0
Run/Stop
IN 3
IN 2
Run Aux
Local Inputs/
Controller
76 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 4 Operating Modes
Timing Diagram
Figure 31 - Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) with Feedback – Two-wire Control
Timing Diagram
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Three-wire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode Non-Reversing Starter (Network& Operator Station)
– Three Wire Control (Parameter 195 = 18) uses the network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data in Output Assembly 144 in Remote control mode and Input 1
& Input 2 in Local control mode to control Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil.
LogicDefinedPt00Data is a maintained value, so the non-reversing starter remains
energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data has a value of 1 in Remote control mode. You
can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost in Remote
control mode by using the Network Communication Fault and Network
Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in Chapter 3
.
Local control mode uses a normally open momentary push button that is wired to
Input 1 to energize Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. A normally
closed momentary push button that is wired to Input 2 is used to de-energize Output
Relay 0. The non-reversing starter only energizes if Input 2 is active and Input 1 is
momentarily active.
Input 3 is used to select between Local and Remote control mode. Activate Input 3 to
select Remote control mode. De-activate Input 3 to select Local control mode.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Three digital inputs must be available on the Control Module
Relay 0
Trip Event
Run/Stop
Normal Operation
Feedback Timeout
Tri p
Timer
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Feedback
Feedback Timeout
IMPORTANT
The Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) operating mode uses the
value in network tag LogicDefinedPt00Data to control the starter. When
communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300 relay, the
starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data is set to 1.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 77
Operating Modes Chapter 4
3. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
6. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is
controlled by the communication network and opens when a trip event occurs.
Figure 32
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with Output Relay 0
configured as a control relay.
Figure 32 - Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Three-wire Control Wiring Diagram
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on
power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 18.
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) with Feedback – Three-
wire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode Non-Reversing Starter (Network& Operator Station)
with Feedback – Three Wire Control (Parameter 195 = 19) uses the network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data in Output Assembly 144 in Remote control mode and Input 1
& Input 2 in Local control mode to control Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil.
LogicDefinedPt00Data is a maintained value, so the non-reversing starter remains
energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data has a value of 1 in Remote control mode. You
can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost in Remote
control mode by using the Network Communication Fault and Network
Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in Chapter 3
.
Local control mode uses a normally open momentary push button that is wired to
Input 1 to energize Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. A normally
closed momentary push button that is wired to Input 2 is used to de-energize Output
Relay 0. The non-reversing starter only energizes if Input 2 is active and Input 1 is
momentarily active.
Input 3 is used to select between Local and Remote control mode. Activate Input 3 to
select Remote control mode. De-activate Input 3 to select Local control mode.
Control Power
E300 Relay
Relay 0
R03 R04
Run
IN 1
IN 2
Local Inputs/
Controller
IN 3
Stop
Run
78 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 4 Operating Modes
The auxiliary contact from the non-reversing starter’s contactor is wired into Input 0. If
a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback Timeout
(Parameter 213), then the E300 relay issues a trip or warning event.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Three digital inputs must be available on the Control Module
3. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5. Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback Timeout
Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
6. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is
controlled by the communication network and opens when a trip event occurs.
Figure 33
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with Output Relay 0
configured as a control relay.
Figure 33 - Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) with Feedback – Three-wire Control
Wiring Diagram
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on
power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 19.
IMPORTANT
The Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) operating mode uses the
value in network tag LogicDefinedPt00Data to control the starter. When
communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300 relay,
the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data is set to 1.
Run
Control Power
E300 Relay
Relay 0
R03 R04
Run
IN 0
IN 1
IN 2
Run Aux
Local Inputs/
Controller
IN 3
Stop
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 79
Operating Modes Chapter 4
Non-reversing Starter (Custom)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode Non-Reversing Starter (Custom) (Parameter 195 =
50) operates as a non-reversing starter one output relay that is assigned as a normally
open control relay. The Non-reversing Starter (Custom) operating mode is used for
applications that want customized DeviceLogix programs. This operating mode
requires minimal configuration rules.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Set any of the Output Ptxx Assignments (Parameters 202…204) to Control
Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay can also be wired as a control relay so that the relay that is controlled by
the communication network opens when a trip event occurs. Figure 34
is a wiring
diagram of a non-reversing starter with Relay 0 configured as a control relay. Relay 0
receives control commands from an automation controller to energize or de-energize
the contactor coil. Relay 0 also goes to an open state when there is a trip event.
Figure 34 - Control Relay Wiring Diagram
DeviceLogix Program
The last saved DeviceLogix program is executed in the E300 relay on power-up or
when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 50.
Timing Diagram
Figure 35 - Non-reversing Starter (Custom) Timing Diagram
(1) Contact shown with supply voltage applied.
Relay 0 configured
as a control relay
(1)
R03 R04
Motor
A1 A2
Trip Relay
Trip Reset
Device Status 0
Trip Preset
80 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 4 Operating Modes
Reversing Starter Operating
Modes
The non-reversing starter-based operating modes of the E300 relay provide the control
logic for a reversing full voltage starter. Two normally open control relays control the
forward and reverse contactor coils. When a trip event occurs, both control relays
remain open until the E300 receives a trip reset command. There are 11 reversing
starter-based operating modes to choose from:
•Network
• Network with Feedback
• Operator Station
• Operator Station with Feedback
• Local I/O – Two-wire Control
• Local I/O with Feedback – Two-wire Control
• Local I/O – Three-wire Control
• Network & Operator Station
• Network & Local I/O – Two-wire Control
• Network & Local I/O – Three-wire Control
•Custom
Reversing Starter (Network)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode Reversing Starter (Network) (Parameter 195 = 5)
uses network tags LogicDefinedPt00Data in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 0,
which controls the forward contactor coil, and LogicDefinedPt01Data in Output
Assembly 144 to control Relay 1, which controls the reversing contactor coil. Both
LogicDefinedPt00Data and LogicDefinedPt01Data are maintained values, so the
reversing starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data has a value of 1. You can program the appropriate state of the
starter when communication is lost using the Network Communication Fault and
Network Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in
Chapter 3
.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching
direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
IMPORTANT
The Reversing Starter (Network) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data or LogicDefinedPt01Data to control the starter. When
communication between an automation controller and the E300 relay is restored,
the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data or LogicDefinedPt01Data
is set to 1.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 81
Operating Modes Chapter 4
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the forward contactor
and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the reversing contactor in which both
relays are controlled by the communication network and open when a trip event
occurs. Figure 36
is a wiring diagram of a reversing starter with Output Relay 0 and
Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Figure 36 - Reversing Starter (Network) Wiring Diagram
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on
power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 5.
Timing Diagram
Figure 37 - Reversing Starter (Network) Timing Diagram
Reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode Reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback
(Parameter 195 = 6) uses network tags LogicDefinedPt00Data in Output Assembly
144 to control Relay 0, which controls the forward contactor coil, and
LogicDefinedPt01Data in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 1, which controls the
reversing contactor coil. Both LogicDefinedPt00Data and LogicDefinedPt01Data are
Control Power
E300 Relay
Relay 0
R03 R04
Run Forward
Relay 1
R13 R14
Run Reverse
Trip Event
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Forward (Relay 0)
Reverse (Relay 1)
Forward
Reverse
82 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 4 Operating Modes
maintained values, so the reversing starter remains energized when
LogicDefinedPt00Data or LogicDefinedPt01Data has a value of 1. You can program
the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost using the Network
Communication Fault and Network Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569
– 573) described in Chapter 3
.
The auxiliary contact from the forward contactor is wired into Input 0, and the
auxiliary contact from the reversing contactor is wired into Input 1. If a feedback signal
is not received before the time identified in Feedback Timeout (Parameter 213), then
the E300 relay issues a trip or warning event.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching
direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5. Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback Timeout
Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the forward contactor
and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the reversing contactor in which both
relays are controlled by the communication network and open when a trip event
occurs. Figure 38
is a wiring diagram of a reversing starter with Output Relay 0 and
Output Relay 1 configured as control relays and the contactor auxiliary contacts wired
to Input 0 and Input 1.
Figure 38 - Reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback Wiring Diagram
IMPORTANT
The Reversing Starter (Network) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data or LogicDefinedPt01Data to control the starter. When
communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300 relay,
the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data or LogicDefinedPt01Data
is set to 1.
Control Power
E300 Relay
Relay 0
R03 R04
Run Forward
Relay 1
R13 R14
Run Reverse
IN 0
IN 1
Run Forward Aux
Run Reverse Aux
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 83
Operating Modes Chapter 4
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on
power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 6.
Timing Diagram
Figure 39 - Reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback Timing Diagram
Reversing Starter (Operator Station)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode Reversing Starter (Operating Station) (Parameter
195 = 29) uses the E300 Operator Station’s “I” key to control Output Relay 0, which
controls the forward contactor coil. The “II” key controls Output Relay 1, which
controls the reversing contactor coil. The “0” key is used to de-energize Output Relay 0
and Output Relay 1. These keys are momentary push buttons, so the reversing starter
remains energized when you release the “I” or “II” button. The “0” button must be
pressed before changing to another direction. The E300 relay issues a trip or warning
event if the E300 Operator Station disconnects from the base relay.
The E300 Operator Station’s Reset button is enabled, and the Local/Remote yellow
LED is illuminated to indicate that the operator station is being used for local control.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching
direction.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5. Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
6. Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
Trip Event
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Forward (Relay 0)
Reverse (Relay 1)
Feedback Timeout
Tri p
Feedback Timeout
Forward Feedback IN 0
Reverse Feedback IN 1
Timer
84 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 4 Operating Modes
• Option Match Trip must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186)
• Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
Or
• Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC (Parameter
192)
• Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
7. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
8. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the forward contactor,
and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the reversing contactor. Both relays
open when a trip event occurs. Figure 40
is a wiring diagram of a reversing starter with
Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Figure 40 - Reversing Starter (Operator Station) Wiring Diagram
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on
power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 29.
Control Power
E300 Relay
Relay 0
R03 R04
Run Forward
Relay 1
R13 R14
Run Reverse
I-Run Forward
II-Run Reverse
0-Stop
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 85
Operating Modes Chapter 4
Timing Diagram
Figure 41 - Reversing Starter (Operator Station) Timing Diagram
Reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode Reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback
(Parameter 195 = 30) uses the E300 Operator Station’s “I” and “0” keys to control
Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. These keys are momentary push buttons, so
the reversing starter remains energized when you release the “I” button.The “0” button
must be pressed before changing to another direction. The E300 relay issues a trip or
warning event if the E300 Operator Station disconnects from the base relay.
The auxiliary contact from the reversing starter’s contactor is wired into Input 0. If a
feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback Timeout
(Parameter 213), then the E300 relay issues a trip or warning event.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching
direction.
The E300 Operator Station’s Reset button is enabled, and the Local/Remote yellow
LED is illuminated to indicate that the operator station is being used for local control.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5. Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
6. Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
• Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186)
• Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
Trip Event
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Forward (Relay 0)
Reverse (Relay 1)
Forward
Reverse
Stop
86 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 4 Operating Modes
Or
• Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC (Parameter
192)
• Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
7. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
8. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
9. Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback Timeout
Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the forward contactor
and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the reversing contactor. Both relays
open when a trip event occurs. Figure 42
is a wiring diagram of a reversing starter with
Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays and the contactor
auxiliary contacts wired to Input 0 and Input 1.
Figure 42 - Reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback Wiring Diagram
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on
power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 30.
Control Power
E300 Relay
IN 0
IN 1
Relay 0
R03 R04
Run Forward
Relay 1
R13 R14
Run Reverse
Run Forward Aux
Run Reverse Aux
I-Run Forward
II-Run Reverse
0-Stop
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 87
Operating Modes Chapter 4
Timing Diagram
Figure 43 - Reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback Timing Diagram
Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two Wire Control
(Parameter 195 = 40) uses Input 0 to control Output Relay 0, which controls the
contactor coil of the forward contactor, and Input 1 to control Output Relay 1, which
controls the contactor coil of the reversing contactor. Both Input 0 and Input 1 are
maintained signals, so the reversing starter remains energized when either Input 0 or
Input 1 is active. Both Input 0 and Input 1 must be in a de-active state before changing
to another direction
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching
direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
Trip Event Feedback Timeout
Stop
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Forward (Relay 0)
Reverse (Relay 1)
Forward
Reverse
Feedback Timeout
Tri p
Timer
Forward Feedback
Reverse Feedback
IMPORTANT
The Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control operating mode uses the
signal from Input 0 or Input 1 to control the starter. When an E300 relay powers up,
the starter energizes if either Input 0 or Input 1 is active.
88 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 4 Operating Modes
5. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
6. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the forward contactor
and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the reversing contactor. Both relays
open when a trip event occurs. Figure 44
is a wiring diagram of a reversing starter with
Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Figure 44 - Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Wiring Diagram
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on
power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 40.
Timing Diagram
Figure 45 - Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Timing Diagram
Control Power
E300 Relay
Relay 0
R03 R04
Run Forward
Relay 1
R13 R14
Run Reverse
IN 0
IN 1
Run Forward/Stop
Run Reverse/Stop
Trip Event
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Forward (Relay 0)
Reverse (Relay 1)
Forward
Reverse
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 89
Operating Modes Chapter 4
Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two Wire Control
(Parameter 195 = 41) uses Input 0 to control Output Relay 0, which controls the
contactor coil of the forward contactor, and Input 1 to control Output Relay 1, which
controls the contactor coil of the reversing contactor. Both Input 0 and Input 1 are
maintained signals, so the reversing starter remains energized when either Input 0 or
Input 1 is active. Both Input 0 and Input 1 must be in a de-active state before changing
to another direction.
The auxiliary contact from the starter’s forward contactor is wired into Input 0, and
the auxiliary contact from the starter’s reversing contactor is wired into Input 1. If a
feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback Timeout
(Parameter 213), then the E300 relay issues a trip or warning event.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching
direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5. Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback Timeout
Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
6. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the forward contactor
and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the reversing contactor. Both relays
open when a trip event occurs. Figure 46
is a wiring diagram of a reversing starter with
Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays and the contactor
auxiliary contacts wired to Input 0 and Input 1.
IMPORTANT
The Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control operating mode uses the
signal from Input 0 or Input 1 to control the starter. When an E300 relay powers up,
the starter energizes if either Input 0 or Input 1 is active.
90 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 4 Operating Modes
Figure 46 - Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback Wiring Diagram
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on
power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 41.
Timing Diagram
Figure 47 - Reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback Timing Diagram
Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three Wire Control
(Parameter 195 = 42) uses a normally open momentary push button in Input 0 to
energize Output Relay 0, which controls the forward contactor coil. A normally open
momentary push button in Input 1 is used to energize Output Relay 1, which controls
Control Power
E300 Relay
IN 0
IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
Relay 0
R03 R04
Run Forward
Relay 1
R13 R14
Run Reverse
Run Forward Aux
Run Reverse Aux
Run Forward/Stop
Run Reverse/Stop
Trip Event Feedback Timeout
Stop
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Forward (Relay 0)
Reverse (Relay 1)
Forward
Reverse
Feedback Timeout
Tri p
Timer
Forward Feedback
Reverse Feedback
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 91
Operating Modes Chapter 4
the reversing contactor coil. A normally closed push button in Input 2 is used to de-
energize Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1. Both Input 0, Input 1, and Input 2 are
momentary signals, so the reversing starter only energizes if Input 2 is active and Input
0 or Input 1 is momentarily active.
Input 2 must be momentarily de-active before changing to another direction.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching
direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Four digital inputs must be available on the Control Module
3. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
5. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
6. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
Figure 48 is a wiring diagram of a reversing starter with three wire control and Output
Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Figure 48 - Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control Wiring Diagram
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on
power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 42.
Control Power
E300 Relay
IN 0
IN 1
IN 2
Relay 0
R03 R04
Run Forward
Relay 1
R13 R14
Run Reverse
Run Forward
Run Reverse
Stop
92 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 4 Operating Modes
Timing Diagram
Figure 49 - Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control Timing Diagram
Reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode Reversing Starter (Network& Operator Station)
(Parameter 195 = 13) in Remote control mode uses network tags
LogicDefinedPt00Data in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 0, which controls the
forward contactor coil, and LogicDefinedPt01Data in Output Assembly 144 to control
Relay 1, which controls the reversing contactor coil. Both LogicDefinedPt00Data and
LogicDefinedPt01Data are maintained values, so the reversing starter remains
energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data or LogicDefinedPt01Data has a value of 1.
You can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost using
the Network Communication Fault and Network Communication Idle parameters
(Parameters 569 – 573) described in Chapter 3
.
In Local control mode, the E300 Operator Station’s “I” key is used to control Output
Relay 0, which controls the forward contactor coil. The “II” key controls Output Relay
1, which controls the reversing contactor coil. The “0” key is used to de-energize
Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1. These keys are momentary push buttons, so the
reversing starter remains energized when you release the “I” or “II” button. The “0”
button must be pressed before changing to another direction.
To change between Local and Remote control mode press and release the “Local/
Remote” button on the E300 Operator Station. The LED above “Local/Remote”
button illuminates yellow in Local control mode and red in Remote control mode.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching
direction.
The E300 relay issues a trip or warning event if the E300 Operator Station disconnects
from the base relay.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Trip Event
Stop
Forward
Reverse
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Forward (Relay 0)
Reverse (Relay 1)
IMPORTANT
The Reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) operating mode uses the value in
network tag LogicDefinedPt00Data to control the starter. When communication is
restored between an automation controller and the E300 relay, the starter energizes if
the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data or LogicDefinedPt01Data is set to 1.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 93
Operating Modes Chapter 4
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5. Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
6. Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
• Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186)
• Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
Or
• Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC (Parameter
192)
• Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
7. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
8. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 are wired as a control relays in
which the relay is controlled by the communication network or E300 Operator
Station, and both output relays open when a trip event occurs. Figure 50
is a wiring
diagram of a reversing starter with Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as
control relays.
Figure 50 - Reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) Wiring Diagram
I-Run Forward
II-Run Reverse
0-Stop
Control Power
E300 Relay
Relay 0
R03 R04
Run Forward
Relay 1
R13 R14
Run Reverse
94 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 4 Operating Modes
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on
power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 13.
Reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode Reversing Starter (Network& Operator Station)
(Parameter 195 = 20) in Remote control mode uses network tags
LogicDefinedPt00Data in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 0, which controls the
forward contactor coil, and LogicDefinedPt01Data in Output Assembly 144 to control
Relay 1, which controls the reversing contactor coil. Both LogicDefinedPt00Data and
LogicDefinedPt01Data are maintained values, so the reversing starter remains
energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data or LogicDefinedPt01Data has a value of 1.
You can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost using
the Network Communication Fault and Network Communication Idle parameters
(Parameters 569 – 573) described in Chapter 3
.
In Local control mode, Input 0 is used to control Output Relay 0, which controls the
contactor coil of the forward contactor, and Input 1 is used to control Output Relay 1,
which controls the contactor coil of the reversing contactor. Both Input 0 and Input 1
are maintained signals, so the reversing starter remains energized when either Input 0
or Input 1 is active. Both Input 0 and Input 1 must be in a de-active state before
changing to another direction.
Input 3 is used to select between Local and Remote control mode. Activate Input 3 to
select Remote control mode. De-activate Input 3 to select Local control mode.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching
direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Three digital inputs must be available on the Control Module
3. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
5. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
6. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 are wired as a control relays in
which the relay is controlled by the communication network or Input 0 & Input 1.
Both output relays open when a trip event occurs. Figure 51
is a wiring diagram of a
reversing starter with Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
IMPORTANT
The Reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) operating mode uses the value
in network tag LogicDefinedPt00Data or LogicDefinedPt01Data to control the
starter. When communication is restored between an automation controller and the
E300 relay, the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data is set to 1.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 95
Operating Modes Chapter 4
Figure 51 - Reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Wiring Diagram
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on
power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 20.
Timing Diagram
Figure 52 - Reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Timing Diagram
Reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Three-wire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode Reversing Starter (Network& Operator Station)
(Parameter 195 = 21) in Remote control mode uses network tags
LogicDefinedPt00Data in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 0, which controls the
forward contactor coil, and LogicDefinedPt01Data in Output Assembly 144 to control
Relay 1, which controls the reversing contactor coil. Both LogicDefinedPt00Data and
LogicDefinedPt01Data are maintained values, so the reversing starter remains
energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data or LogicDefinedPt01Data has a value of 1.
You can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost using
the Network Communication Fault and Network Communication Idle parameters
(Parameters 569 – 573) described in Chapter 3
.
Run Forward/Stop
Run Reverse/Stop
Control Power
E300 Relay
IN 0
IN 1
Local Inputs/
Controller
IN 3
Relay 0
R03 R04
Run Forward
Relay 1
R13 R14
Run Reverse
Trip Event
Forward
Reverse
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Forward (Relay 0)
Reverse (Relay 1)
96 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 4 Operating Modes
Local control mode uses a normally open momentary push button in Input 0 to
energize Output Relay 0, which controls the forward contactor coil. A normally open
momentary push button in Input 1 is used to energize Output Relay 1, which controls
the reversing contactor coil. A normally closed push button in Input 2 is used to de-
energize Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1. Both Input 0, Input 1, and Input 2 are
momentary signals, so the reversing starter only energizes if Input 2 is active and Input
0 or Input 1 is momentarily active.
Input 2 must be momentarily de-active before changing to another direction.
Input 3 is used to select between Local and Remote control mode. Activate Input 3 to
select Remote control mode. De-activate Input 3 to select Local control mode.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching
direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Four digital inputs must be available on the Control Module
3. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
5. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
6. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 are wired as a control relays in
which the relay is controlled by the communication network or Input 0, Input 1, and
Input 2. Both output relays open when a trip event occurs. Figure 53
is a wiring
diagram of a reversing starter with Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as
control relays.
IMPORTANT
The Reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) operating mode uses the value
in network tag LogicDefinedPt00Data or LogicDefinedPt01Data to control the starter.
When communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300
relay, the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data is set to 1.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 97
Operating Modes Chapter 4
Figure 53 - Reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Three-wire Control Wiring Diagram
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on
power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 21.
Reversing Starter (Custom)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode Reversing Starter (Custom) (Parameter 195 = 51)
operates as a reversing starter with two output relays that are assigned as normally open
control relays. The Reversing Starter (Custom) operating mode is used for applications
that want customized DeviceLogix programs. This operating mode requires minimal
configuration rules.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Set two of the Output Ptxx Assignments (Parameters 202…204) to Control
Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
Wiring Diagram
Figure 54 is a wiring diagram of a reversing starter with Output Relay 0 and Output
Relay 1 configured as control relays. Both Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 go to an
open state when there is a trip event.
Run Forward
Run Reverse
Stop
Local Inputs/
Controller
Control Power
E300 Relay
IN 0
IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
Relay 0
R03 R04
Run Forward
Relay 1
R13 R14
Run Reverse
98 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 4 Operating Modes
Figure 54 - Reversing Starter (Custom) Wiring Diagram
DeviceLogix Program
The last saved DeviceLogix program is executed in the E300 relay on power-up or
when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 50.
Timing Diagram
Figure 55 - Reversing Starter (Custom) Timing Diagram
Two-speed Starter Operating
Modes
The two-speed starter-based operating modes of the E300 relay provide the control
logic for a two-speed full-voltage starter. Two normally open control relays control the
high-speed and low-speed contactor coils. When a trip event occurs, both control
relays remain open until the E300 receives a trip reset command. There are 11 two-
speed starter-based operating modes to choose from:
•Network
• Network with Feedback
• Operator Station
• Operator Station with Feedback
• Local I/O – Two-wire Control
• Local I/O with Feedback – Two-wire Control
• Local I/O – Three-wire Control
• Network & Operator Station
• Network & Local I/O – Two-wire Control
• Network & Local I/O – Three-wire Control
•Custom
Control Power
E300 Relay
Relay 0
R03 R04
Run Forward
Relay 1
R13 R14
Run Reverse
Trip Relay
Trip Reset
Device Status 0
Trip Preset
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 99
Operating Modes Chapter 4
Two-speed Starter (Network)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode Two Speed Starter (Network) (Parameter 195 = 9)
uses network tags LogicDefinedPt00Data in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 0,
which controls the high-speed contactor coil, and LogicDefinedPt01Data in Output
Assembly 144 to control Relay 1, which controls the low-speed contactor coil. Both
LogicDefinedPt00Data and LogicDefinedPt01Data are maintained values, so the
two-speed starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data has a value of 1. You can program the appropriate state of the
starter when communication is lost using the Network Communication Fault and
Network Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in
Chapter 3
.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching
direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the high-speed contactor
and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the low-speed contactor. In this
configuration, both relays are controlled by the communication network and open
when a trip event occurs. Figure 56
is a wiring diagram of a two-speed starter with
Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Figure 56 - Two-speed Starter (Network) Wiring Diagram
IMPORTANT
The Two-speed Starter (Network) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data or LogicDefinedPt01Data to control the starter. When
communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300 relay,
the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data or LogicDefinedPt01Data
is set to 1.
Control Power
E300 Relay
Relay 0
R03 R04
Relay 1
R13 R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
100 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 4 Operating Modes
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on
power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 9.
Timing Diagram
Figure 57 - Two-speed Starter (Network) Timing Diagram
Two-speed Starter (Network) with Feedback
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode Two-speed Starter (Network) with Feedback
(Parameter 195 = 10) uses network tags LogicDefinedPt00Data in Output Assembly
144 to control Relay 0, which controls the high-speed contactor coil and
LogicDefinedPt01Data in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 1, which controls the
low-speed contactor coil. Both LogicDefinedPt00Data and LogicDefinedPt01Data
are maintained values, so the two-speed starter remains energized when
LogicDefinedPt00Data or LogicDefinedPt01Data has a value of 1. You can program
the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost using the Network
Communication Fault and Network Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569
– 573) described in Chapter 3
.
The auxiliary contact from the high-speed contactor is wired into Input 0, and the
auxiliary contact from the low-speed contactor is wired into Input 1. If a feedback
signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback Timeout (Parameter 213),
then the E300 relay issues a trip or warning event.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching
direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Trip Event
Run Fast
Run Slow
Fast (Relay 0)
Slow (Relay 1)
Trip Status
Trip Reset
IMPORTANT
The Two-speed Starter (Network) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data or LogicDefinedPt01Data to control the starter. When
communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300 relay,
the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data or LogicDefinedPt01Data
is set to 1.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 101
Operating Modes Chapter 4
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5. Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback Timeout
Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the high-speed contactor
and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the low-speed contactor. In this
configuration, both relays are controlled by the communication network and open
when a trip event occurs. Figure 58
is a wiring diagram of a Two-speed Starter with
Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays and the contactor
auxiliary contacts wired to Input 0 and Input 1.
Figure 58 - Two-speed Starter (Network) with Feedback Wiring Diagram
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on
power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 10.
Control Power
E300 Relay
IN 0
IN 1
Relay 0
R03 R04
Relay 1
R13 R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
Run Fast Aux
Run Slow Aux
102 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 4 Operating Modes
Timing Diagram
Figure 59 - Two-speed Starter (Network) with Feedback Timing Diagram
Two-speed Starter (Operator Station)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode Two Speed Starter (Operating Station) (Parameter
195 = 33) uses the E300 Operator Station’s “I” key to control Output Relay 0, which
controls the high-speed contactor coil. The “II” key controls Output Relay 1, which
controls the low-speed contactor coil. The “0” key is used to de-energize Output Relay
0 and Output Relay 1. These keys are momentary push buttons, so the two-speed
starter remains energized when you release the “I” or “II” button.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching
direction.
The E300 relay issues a trip or warning event if the E300 Operator Station disconnects
from the base relay.
The E300 Operator Station’s Reset button is enabled, and the Local/Remote yellow
LED is illuminated to indicate that the operator station is being used for local control.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5. Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
Trip Event Feedback Timeout
Run Fast
Run Slow
Fast (Relay 0)
Slow (Relay 1)
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Timer
Feedback Timeout
Trip
Fast Feedback
Slow Feedback
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 103
Operating Modes Chapter 4
6. Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
• Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186)
• Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
Or
• Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC (Parameter
192)
• Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
7. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
8. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the high-speed contactor,
and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the low-speed contactor. Both relays
open when a trip event occurs. Figure 60
is a wiring diagram of a two-speed starter with
Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Figure 60 - Two-speed Starter (Operator Station) Wiring Diagram
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on
power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 33.
I-Run Fast
II-Run Slow
0-Stop
Control Power
E300 Relay
Relay 0
R03 R04
Relay 1
R13 R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
104 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 4 Operating Modes
Timing Diagram
Figure 61 - Two-speed Starter (Operator Station) Timing Diagram
Two-speed Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode Two Speed Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback
(Parameter 195 = 34) uses the E300 Operator Station’s “I” and “0” keys to control
Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. These keys are momentary push buttons, so
the two-speed starter remains energized when you release the “I” button. The E300
relay issues a trip or warning event if the E300 Operator Station disconnects from the
base relay.
The auxiliary contact from the two-speed starter’s contactor is wired into Input 0. If a
feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback Timeout
(Parameter 213), then the E300 relay issues a trip or warning event.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching
direction.
The E300 Operator Station’s Reset button is enabled, and the Local/Remote yellow
LED is illuminated to indicate that the operator station is being used for local control.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5. Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
6. Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
• Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186)
• Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
Trip Event
Run Fast
Run Slow
Fast (Relay 0)
Slow (Relay 1)
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Stop
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 105
Operating Modes Chapter 4
Or
• Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC (Parameter
192)
• Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
7. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
8. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
9. Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback Timeout
Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the high-speed contactor
and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the low-speed contactor. Both relays
open when a trip event occurs. Figure 62
is a wiring diagram of a two-speed starter with
Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays and the contactor
auxiliary contacts wired to Input 0 and Input 1.
Figure 62 - Two-speed Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback Wiring Diagram
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on
power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 34.
I-Run Forward
II-Run Reverse
0-Stop
Control Power
E300 Relay
Relay 0
R03 R04
Relay 1
R13 R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
Run Fast Aux
Run Slow Aux
IN 0
IN 1
106 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 4 Operating Modes
Timing Diagram
Figure 63 - Two-speed Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback Timing Diagram
Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode Two Speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two Wire Control
(Parameter 195 = 46) uses Input 0 to control Output Relay 0, which controls the
contactor coil of the high-speed contactor, and Input 1 to control Output Relay 1,
which controls the contactor coil of the low-speed contactor. Both Input 0 and Input 1
are maintained signals, so the two-speed starter remains energized when either Input 0
or Input 1 is active.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching
direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
Trip Event
Feedback Timeout
Run Fast
Run Slow
Stop
Fast (Relay 0)
Slow (Relay 1)
Fast Feedback
Slow Feedback
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Timer
Feedback Timeout
Tri p
IMPORTANT
The Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control operating mode uses the
signal from Input 0 or Input 1 to control the starter. When an E300 relay powers up,
the starter energizes if either Input 0 or Input 1 is active.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 107
Operating Modes Chapter 4
5. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
6. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the high-speed contactor
and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the low-speed contactor. Both relays
open when a trip event occurs. Figure 64
is a wiring diagram of a two-speed starter with
Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Figure 64 - Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Wiring Diagram
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on
power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 46.
Timing Diagram
Figure 65 - Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Timing Diagram
Control Power
E300 Relay
IN 0
IN 1
Relay 0
R03 R04
Relay 1
R13 R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
Run Fast/Stop
Run Slow/Stop
Trip Event
Run Fast
Run Slow
Fast (Relay 0)
Slow (Relay 1)
Trip Status
Trip Reset
108 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 4 Operating Modes
Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode Two Speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two Wire Control
(Parameter 195 = 47) uses Input 0 to control Output Relay 0, which controls the
contactor coil of the high-speed contactor and Input 1 to control Output Relay 1,
which controls the contactor coil of the low-speed contactor. Both Input 0 and Input 1
are maintained signals, so the two-speed starter remains energized when either Input 0
or Input 1 is active.
The auxiliary contact from the starter’s high-speed contactor is wired into Input 0, and
the auxiliary contact from the starter’s low-speed contactor is wired into Input 1. If a
feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback Timeout
(Parameter 213), then the E300 relay issues a trip or warning event.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching
direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5. Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback Timeout
Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
6. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the high-speed contactor
and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the low-speed contactor. Both relays
open when a trip event occurs. Figure 66
is a wiring diagram of a Two-speed Starter
with Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays and the
contactor auxiliary contacts wired to Input 0 and Input 1.
IMPORTANT
The Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control operating mode uses the
signal from Input 0 or Input 1 to control the starter. When an E300 relay powers up,
the starter energizes if either Input 0 or Input 1 is active.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 109
Operating Modes Chapter 4
Figure 66 - Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback Wiring Diagram
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on
power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 47.
Timing Diagram
Figure 67 - Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback Timing Diagram
Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode Two Speed Starter (Local I/O) – Three Wire Control
(Parameter 195 = 48) uses a normally open momentary push button in Input 0 to
energize Output Relay 0, which controls the high-speed contactor coil. A normally
open momentary push button in Input 1 is used to energize Output Relay 1, which
controls the low-speed contactor coil. A normally closed push button in Input 2 is used
to de-energize Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1. Both Input 0, Input 1, and Input 2
Control Power
E300 Relay
IN 0
IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
Run Fast
Run Slow
Relay 0
R03 R04
Relay 1
R13 R14
Run Fast/Stop
Run Slow/Stop
Run Fast Aux
Run Slow Aux
Trip Event
Feedback Timeout
Run Fast
Run Slow
Fast (Relay 0)
Slow (Relay 1)
Fast Feedback
Slow Feedback
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Timer
Feedback Timeout
Tri p
110 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 4 Operating Modes
are momentary signals, so the two-speed starter only energizes if Input 2 is active and
Input 0 or Input 1 is momentarily active.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching
direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Four digital inputs must be available on the Control Module
3. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
5. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
6. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
Figure 68 is a wiring diagram of a Two-speed Starter with three-wire control and
Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Figure 68 - Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control Wiring Diagram
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on
power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 48.
Control Power
E300 Relay
IN 0
IN 1
IN 2
Relay 0
R03 R04
Relay 1
R13 R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
Run Fast
Run Slow
Stop
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 111
Operating Modes Chapter 4
Timing Diagram
Figure 69 - Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control Timing Diagram
Two-speed Starter (Network & Operator Station)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode Two Speed Starter (Network& Operator Station)
(Parameter 195 = 15) in Remote control mode uses network tags
LogicDefinedPt00Data in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 0, which controls the
high-speed contactor coil, and LogicDefinedPt01Data in Output Assembly 144 to
control Relay 1, which controls the low-speed contactor coil. Both
LogicDefinedPt00Data and LogicDefinedPt01Data are maintained values, so the
two-speed starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data has a value of 1. You can program the appropriate state of the
starter when communication is lost using the Network Communication Fault and
Network Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in
Chapter 3
.
In Local control mode, the E300 Operator Station’s “I” key is used to control Output
Relay 0, which controls the high-speed contactor coil. The “II” key controls Output
Relay 1, which controls the low-speed contactor coil. The “0” key is used to de-energize
Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1. These keys are momentary push buttons, so the
two-speed starter remains energized when you release the “I” or “II” button.
To change between Local and Remote control mode press and release the “Local/
Remote” button on the E300 Operator Station. The LED above “Local/Remote”
button illuminates yellow in Local control mode and red in Remote control mode.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching
direction.
The E300 relay issues a trip or warning event if the E300 Operator Station disconnects
from the base relay.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Trip Event
Run Fast
Run Slow
Stop
Fast (Relay 0)
Slow (Relay 1)
Trip Status
Trip Reset
112 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 4 Operating Modes
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5. Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
6. Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
• Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186)
• Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
Or
• Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC
(Parameter 192)
• Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
7. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
8. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 are wired as a control relays in
which the relay is controlled by the communication network or E300 Operator
Station, and both output relays open when a trip event occurs. Figure 70
is a wiring
diagram of a two-speed starter with Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as
control relays.
IMPORTANT
The Two-speed Starter (Network & Operator Station) operating mode uses the value
in network tag LogicDefinedPt00Data to control the starter. When communication is
restored between an automation controller and the E300 relay, the starter energizes
if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data or LogicDefinedPt01Data is set to 1.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 113
Operating Modes Chapter 4
Figure 70 - Two-speed Starter (Network & Operator Station) Wiring Diagram
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on
power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 15.
Two-speed Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode Two Speed Starter (Network& Operator Station)
(Parameter 195 = 24) in Remote control mode uses network tags
LogicDefinedPt00Data in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 0, which controls the
high-speed contactor coil, and LogicDefinedPt01Data in Output Assembly 144 to
control Relay 1, which controls the low-speed contactor coil. Both
LogicDefinedPt00Data and LogicDefinedPt01Data are maintained values, so the
two-speed starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data has a value of 1. You can program the appropriate state of the
starter when communication is lost using the Network Communication Fault and
Network Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in
Chapter 3
.
In Local control mode, Input 0 is used to control Output Relay 0, which controls the
contactor coil of the high-speed contactor, and Input 1 is used to control Output Relay
1, which controls the contactor coil of the low-speed contactor. Both Input 0 and Input
1 are maintained signals, so the two-speed starter remains energized when either Input
0 or Input 1 is active.
Input 3 is used to select between Local and Remote control mode. Activate Input 3 to
select Remote control mode. De-activate Input 3 to select Local control mode.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching
direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Two-speed Starter (Network & Operator Station) operating mode uses the value
in network tag LogicDefinedPt00Data or LogicDefinedPt01Data to control the starter.
When communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300
relay, the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data is set to 1.
I-Run Forward
II-Run Reverse
0-Stop
Control Power
E300 Relay
Relay 0
R03 R04
Relay 1
R13 R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
114 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 4 Operating Modes
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Three digital inputs must be available on the Control Module
3. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
5. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
6. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 are wired as a control relays in
which the relay is controlled by the communication network or Input 0 & Input 1.
Both output relays open when a trip event occurs. Figure 71
is a wiring diagram of a
Two-speed Starter with Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control
relays.
Figure 71 - Two-speed Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Wiring Diagram
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on
power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 24.
Relay 0
R03 R04
Relay 1
R13 R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
Control Power
E300 Relay
IN 0
IN 1
IN 3
Run Fast/Stop
Run Slow/Stop
Local Inputs/
Controller
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 115
Operating Modes Chapter 4
Timing Diagram
Figure 72 - Two-speed Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Timing Diagram
Two-speed Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Three-wire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode Two Speed Starter (Network& Operator Station)
(Parameter 195 = 25) in Remote control mode uses network tags
LogicDefinedPt00Data in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 0, which controls the
high-speed contactor coil, and LogicDefinedPt01Data in Output Assembly 144 to
control Relay 1, which controls the low-speed contactor coil. Both
LogicDefinedPt00Data and LogicDefinedPt01Data are maintained values, so the
two-speed starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data has a value of 1. You can program the appropriate state of the
starter when communication is lost using the Network Communication Fault and
Network Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in
Chapter 3
.
Local control mode uses a normally open momentary push button in Input 0 to
energize Output Relay 0, which controls the high-speed contactor coil. A normally
open momentary push button in Input 1 is used to energize Output Relay 1, which
controls the low-speed contactor coil. A normally closed push button in Input 2 is used
to de-energize Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1. Both Input 0, Input 1, and Input 2
are momentary signals, so the two-speed starter only energizes if Input 2 is active and
Input 0 or Input 1 is momentarily active.
Input 3 is used to select between Local and Remote control mode. Activate Input 3 to
select Remote control mode. De-activate Input 3 to select Local control mode.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching
direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Trip Event
Run Fast
Run Slow
Fast (Relay 0)
Slow (Relay 1)
Trip Status
Trip Reset
116 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 4 Operating Modes
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Four digital inputs must be available on the Control Module
3. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
5. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
6. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 are wired as a control relays in
which the relay is controlled by the communication network or Input 0, Input 1, and
Input 2. Both output relays open when a trip event occurs. Figure 73
is a wiring
diagram of a two-speed starter with Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as
control relays.
Figure 73 - Two-speed Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Three-wire Control Wiring Diagram
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on
power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 25.
Two-Speed Starter (Custom)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode Two Speed Starter (Custom) (Parameter 195 = 53)
operates as a two-speed starter with two output relays that are assigned as normally
open control relays. The Two-speed Starter (Custom) operating mode is used for
applications that want customized DeviceLogix programs. This operating mode
requires minimal configuration rules.
IMPORTANT
The Two-speed Starter (Network & Operator Station) operating mode uses the value
in network tag LogicDefinedPt00Data or LogicDefinedPt01Data to control the starter.
When communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300
relay, the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data is set to 1.
Run Fast
Run Slow
Stop
Control Power
E300 Relay
IN 0
IN 1
IN 2
Local Inputs/
Controller
IN 3
Relay 0
R03 R04
Relay 1
R13 R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 117
Operating Modes Chapter 4
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Set two of the Output Ptxx Assignments (Parameters 202…204) to Control
Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
Wiring Diagram
Figure 74 is a wiring diagram of a Two-speed Starter with Output Relay 0 and Output
Relay 1 configured as control relays. Both Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 go to an
open state when there is a trip event.
Figure 74 - Two-Speed Starter (Custom) Wiring Diagram
DeviceLogix Program
The last saved DeviceLogix program is executed in the E300 relay on power-up or
when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 53.
Timing Diagram
Figure 75 - Two-Speed Starter (Custom) Timing Diagram
Monitor Operating Mode
The E300 relay’s monitor-based operating mode allows you to disable all protection
features of the E300 relay. You can use the E300 relay as a monitoring device to report
current, voltage, power, and energy information.
There is one monitor based operating mode – Custom.
Relay 0
R03 R04
Relay 1
R13 R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
Control Power
E300 Relay
Trip Relay
Trip Reset
Device Status 0
Trip Preset
118 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 4 Operating Modes
Monitor (Custom)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode Monitor (Custom) (Parameter 195 = 54) allows you
to use the E300 relay as a monitoring device. No configuration rules apply in this
operating mode if all motor protection features are disabled.
Rules
1. If any protection trip events are enabled (excluding Configuration, NVS, and
Hardware Fault trip), then set any of the Output Ptxx Assignments (Parameters
202…204) to the appropriate value of Trip Relay, Control Relay, Monitor Lx
Trip Relay, or Monitor Lx Control Relay.
Wiring Diagram
Not Applicable
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 119
Chapter 5
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
This chapter provides detailed information about the protective trip and warning
functions of the E300 Electronic Overload Relay. The protective trip and warning
functions are organized into five sections:
• Current-based
• Vo l t ag e - b as ed
• Power-based
• Control-based
• Analog-based
This chapter explains the trip and warning protection features of the E300 relay and the
associated configuration parameters.
Current Protection
The E300 relay digitally monitors the electrical current that is consumed by an electric
motor. This electric current information is used for the following protective trip and
warning functions:
• Overload Trip/Warning
• Phase Loss Trip
• Ground Fault Trip/Warning
• Stall Trip
• Jam Trip/Warning
• Underload Trip/Warning
• Current Imbalance Trip/Warning
• Line Under Current Trip/Warning
• Line Over Current Trip/Warning
• Line Loss Trip/Warning
Current Trip Enable (Parameter 183) and Current Warning Enable (Parameter 189) are
used to enable the respective current-based protective trip and warning functions.
Current Trip Status (Parameter 4) and Current Warning Status (Parameter 10) are used
to monitor the respective current-based protective trip and warning functions.
Current Trip
The E300 relay trips with an current-based indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• Overload trip protection is enabled
• Current is present
• % Thermal Capacity Utilized reaches 100%
If the E300 relay trips, the:
120 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 5 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 5-short blink pattern
• Bit 4 in Current Trip Status (Parameter 4) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their Protection
Fault state (if so programmed)
Current Warning
The E300 relay indicates an current-based warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• Overload warning is enabled
• Current is present
• % Thermal Capacity Utilized is equal to or greater than the warning level
When the overload warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a yellow short-1 blink pattern
• Bit 0 in Current Warning Status (Parameter 10) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as warning alarm close
Overload Protection
The E300 relay provides overload protection through true RMS current measurements of
the individual phase currents of the connected motor. Based on the highest current
measured, the programmed FLA Setting, and Trip Class, a thermal model that simulates
the actual heating of the motor is calculated. Percent Thermal Capacity Utilized
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output Relays,
Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and Digital Module 4
Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 121
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 5
(Parameter 1) reports this calculated value and can be read via the communication
network
.
Full Load Current Guidelines
USA and Canada Guidelines
• Motor Service Factor ≥ 1.15: For motors with a service factor rating of 1.15 or
greater, program the FLA setting to the full-load current rating on the printed
nameplate.
• Motor Service Factor < 1.15: For motors with a service factor rating less than 1.15,
program the FLA setting to 90% of the full-load current rating on the printed
nameplate.
• Wye-Delta (Y-∆) Applications: Follow the application’s service factor
instructions, except divide the full-load current rating on the printed nameplate by
1.73.
Outside USA and Canada Guidelines
• Maximum Continuous Rated (MCR) Motors: Program the FLA setting to the
full-load current rating on the printed nameplate.
• Star-Delta (Y-∆) Applications: Follow the MCR instructions, except divide the
full-load current rating on the printed nameplate by 1.73.
Parameter Number Parameter Number Description
Overload Trip
4
20
Indicate a trip
Full Load Amps Setting
171 Define the motor’s full-load current rating.
177
Define the high-speed FLA value in two-speed motor applications. Activating FLA2 is described in
Chapter 3.
Trip Class 172
Trip Class is the second of two parameters that affect the E300 relay’s thermal capacity utilization
algorithm. Trip class is defined as the maximum time (in seconds) for an overload trip to occur when the
motor’s operating current is six times its rated current. The E300 relay offers an adjustable trip class
range of 5…30. Enter the application trip class into Trip Class (Parameter 172).
Automatic/Manual Reset 173
Select the reset mode for the E300 relay after an overload or thermistor (PTC) trip. If an overload trip
occurs and automatic reset mode is selected, the E300 relay automatically resets when the value stored
in % Thermal Capacity Utilized (Parameter 1) falls below the value stored in Overload Reset Level
(Parameter 174). If manual reset mode is selected, the E300 Overload Relay can be manually reset after
the % Thermal Capacity Utilized is less than the OL Reset Level.
Overload Warning
10
20
Indicate a warning
Overload Warning Level 175 Define an alert for an impending overload trip and is adjustable from 0…100% TCU.
Time to Trip 2
When the measured motor current exceeds the trip rating of the E300 relay, Overload Time to Trip
(Parameter 2) indicates the estimated time remaining before an overload trip occurs. When the
measured current is below the trip rating, the Overload Time to Trip value is reported as 9,999 seconds.
Time to Reset 174
After an overload trip, the E300 relay reports the time remaining until the device can be reset through
Overload Time to Reset (Parameter 3). When the % Thermal Capacity Utilized value falls to or below the
Overload Reset Level (Parameter 174), the Overload Time to Reset value indicates zero until the
overload trip is reset. After an overload trip is reset, the Overload Time to Reset value is reported as 0
seconds.
Nonvolatile Thermal Memory 1
The E300 relay includes a nonvolatile circuit to provide thermal memory. The time constant of the circuit
corresponds to a Trip Class 20 setting. During normal operation, the thermal memory circuit is
continuously monitored and updated to accurately reflect the thermal capacity utilization of the
connected motor. If power is removed, the thermal memory of the circuit decays at a rate equivalent to
the cooling of a Trip Class 20 application. When the power is re-applied, the E300 relay checks the
thermal memory circuit voltage to determine the initial value of % Thermal Capacity Utilized
(Parameter 1).
122 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 5 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Trip Curves
The following figures illustrate the E300 relay’s time-current characteristics for trip classes
5, 10, 20, and 30.
Figure 76 - Time-Current Characteristics for Trip Classes 5, 10, 20, and 30
For trip class time-current characteristics other than 5, 10, 20, or 30, scale the Class 10
trip time according to the following table:
Table 24 - Time-Current Characteristic Scaling Factors
Automatic/Manual Reset Times
Overload Reset Level (Parameter 174) is adjustable from 1 to 100% TCU. The following
figures illustrate the typical overload reset time delay when Overload Reset Level is set to
75% TCU.
Trip Class Trip Class 10
Multiplier
Trip Class Trip Class 10
Multiplier
Trip Class Trip Class 10
Multiplier
5 0.5 14 1.4 23 2.3
6 0.6 15 1.5 24 2.4
7 0.7 16 1.6 25 2.5
8 0.8 17 1.7 26 2.6
9 0.9 18 1.8 27 2.7
10 1.0 19 1.9 28 2.8
11 1.1 20 2.0 29 2.9
12 1.2 21 2.1 30 3.0
13 1.3 22 2.2
1
10
100
1000
100% 1000%
Time (seconds)
Trip Class 5
Current (% FLA)
Trip Class 30
1
10
100
1000
10000
100% 1000%
Current (% FLA)
Time (seconds)
1
10
100
1000
10000
100%
1000%
Trip Class 20
Time (seconds)
Current (% FLA)
1
10
100
1000
100% 1000%
Time (seconds)
Trip Class 10
Current (% FLA)
Cold Trip
Hot Trip
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 123
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 5
Figure 77 - Overload Reset Times
Phase Loss Protection
A high current imbalance, or phase failure, can be caused by defective contacts in a
contactor or circuit breaker, loose terminals, blown fuses, sliced wires, or faults in the
motor. When a phase failure exists, the motor can experience an additional temperature
rise or excessive mechanical vibration. This may result in a degradation of the motor
insulation or increased stress on the motor bearings. Rapid phase loss detection helps to
minimize the potential damage and loss of production.
ATTENTION: In explosive environment applications, Overload Reset Mode
(Parameter 173) must be set to Manual.
ATTENTION: In an explosive environment application, Overload Reset Level
(Parameter 174) must be set as low as possible or in accordance with the motor
thermal time constant.
Time to Reset in Seconds
OL Reset Level (% TCU)
0 100 200 300 400 500
100
90
80
70
60
50
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000
OL Reset Level (% TCU)
Time to Reset in Seconds
Trip Class 5 Trip Class 10 Trip Class 20 Trip Class 30
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Phase Loss Trip
4
20
Indicate a trip
Phase Loss Inhibit Time 239
Inhibit a phase loss trip from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from
0…250 seconds.
IMPORTANT
The phase loss inhibit timer starts after the maximum phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30%
of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for a phase loss
condition until the Phase Loss Inhibit Time expires.
Phase Loss Trip Delay 240
Define the time period for which a phase loss condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is
adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
124 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 5 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Ground Fault Current Protection
In isolated or high impedance-grounded systems, core-balanced current sensors are
typically used to detect low-level ground faults caused by insulation breakdowns or entry
of foreign objects. Detection of such ground faults can be used to interrupt the system to
prevent further damage or to alert the appropriate personnel to perform timely
maintenance.
The E300 relay provides core-balanced ground fault current detection capability, with the
option of enabling Ground Fault Trip, Ground Fault Warning, or both. The ground fault
detection method and range depends upon the catalog number of the E300 Sensing
Module and Control Module ordered.
Table 25 - Ground Fault Capabilities
Catalog Number Ground Fault Method
Ground Fault Trip/Warning
Range
193-ESM-IG-__-__
Internal 0.5…5.0 A
592-ESM-IG-__-__
193-ESM-VIG-__-__
592-ESM-VIG-__-__
193-EIOGP-22-___
External
(1)
(1) You must use one of the following Catalog Number 193-CBCT_ Core Balance Ground Fault Sensors :
0.02…5.0 A
193-EIOGP-42-___
1 — Ø 20 mm window
2 — Ø 40 mm window
3 — Ø 65 mm window
4 — Ø 85 mm window
ATTENTION: The E300 relay is not a ground fault circuit interrupter for
personnel protection (or Class I) as defined in Article 100 of the NEC.
ATTENTION: The E300 relay is not intended to signal a disconnecting means to
open the faulted current. A disconnecting device must be capable of
interrupting the maximum available fault current of the system on which it is
used.
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Ground Fault Trip
4
20
Indicate a trip
Ground Fault Type‘ 241 Select the internal option or the external option with the appropriate measurement range.
Ground Fault Maximum Inhibit 248
Inhibits a ground fault trip from occurring when the ground fault current exceeds the maximum range
of the core-balance sensor (approximately 6.5 A).
Ground faults can quickly rise from low-level arcing levels to short circuit magnitudes. A motor starting
contactor may not have the necessary rating to interrupt a high magnitude ground fault. In these
circumstances it is desirable for an upstream circuit breaker with the proper rating to interrupt the
ground fault.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 125
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 5
Stall Protection
A motor stalls when its inrush current lasts for a longer than normal period of time during
its starting sequence. As a result, the motor heats up rapidly and reaches the temperature
limit of its insulation. Rapid stall detection during the starting sequence can extend the
motor’s life, and minimize potential damage and loss of production. The E300 relay can
monitor for this condition with its Stall Trip function and stop the motor before damage
and loss of production can occur.
Ground Fault Filter 131
An E300 relay can filter ground fault currents for High Resistance Grounded (HRG) systems from its
current-based protection trip and warning functions, which include:
• Thermal overload
• Current imbalance
• Jam
• Stall
The Ground Fault Filter is useful for smaller-sized motors that trip unexpectedly due to a controlled
ground fault current that is significant relative to the current draw of the electric motor.
This filter only disables the effects of the ground fault current from the current-based motor protection
trip and warning functions. Current-based diagnostic data is reported unfiltered when this feature is
enabled.
Ground Fault Inhibit Time 242
Inhibit a ground fault trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence and is
adjustable from 0…250 seconds. The ground fault inhibit time begins when the Current Present (bit 3)
or Ground Fault Current Present (bit 4) is set in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20).
Ground Fault Trip Delay 243
Define the time period a ground fault condition must be present before a trip occurs and is adjustable
from 0.0…25.0 s.
Ground Fault Trip Level 244
Ground Fault Trip Level (Parameter 244) allows you to define the ground fault current in which the E300
relay trips and is adjustable from:
• 0.500…5.00 A (Internal)
• 0.020…5.00 A (External)
IMPORTANT
The ground fault inhibit timer starts after the maximum phase load current transitions from 0 A to 30%
of the minimum FLA rating of the device or the ground fault current is greater than or equal to 50% of
the minimum ground fault current rating of the device. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for a
ground fault condition until the Ground Fault Current Inhibit Time expires.
Ground Fault Warning
10
20
Indicate a warning
Ground Fault Warning Level 246
Define the ground fault current at which the E300 relay indicates a warning and is adjustable from
0.20…5.00 A.
Ground Fault Warning Delay 245
Define the time period (adjustable from 0.0…25.0 s) for which a ground fault condition must be
present before a warning occurs.
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Stall Trip
4
20
Indicate a trip
Stall Enabled Time 249
Adjust the time the E300 relay monitors for a stall condition during the motor starting sequence and is
adjustable from 0…250 s.
Stall Trip Level 250
Define the locked rotor current and is adjustable from 100…600% of the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
IMPORTANT
Stall Protection is only enabled during the motor starting sequence. If the maximum phase of load
current falls below the programmed Stall Trip Level before the Stall Enabled Time elapses, the E300
relay disables Stall Protection until the next motor starting sequence.
IMPORTANT
The E300 relay considers a motor to have begun its starting sequence if the maximum phase of motor
current transitions from 0A to approximately 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device.
126 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 5 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Jam Protection
A motor goes into a jam condition when a running motor begins to consume current
greater than50% of the motor’s nameplate rating. An example of this condition could be
an overloaded conveyor or jammed gear. These conditions can result in the overheating of
the motor and equipment damage. The E300 relay can monitor for this condition with
its Jam Trip and Warning function to detect for a rapid jam fault to minimize damage and
loss of production.
Underload Protection
Motor current less than a specific level may indicate a mechanical malfunction in the
installation, such as a torn conveyor belt, damaged fan blade, broken shaft, or worn tool.
Such conditions may not harm the motor, but they can lead to loss of production. Rapid
underload fault detection helps to minimize damage and loss of production.
The E300 relay can monitor for this condition with its Underload Trip and Warning
function to detect for a rapid underload fault to minimize damage and loss of production.
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Jam Trip
4
20
Indicate a trip
Jam Inhibit Time 251
Inhibit a jam trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from
0…250 s.
Jam Trip Delay 252
Define the time period a jam condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from
0.1…25.0 s.
Jam Trip Level 253
Define the current at which the E300 relay trips on a jam. It is user-adjustable from 50…600% of the
FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
IMPORTANT
The Jam Inhibitor timer starts after the maximum phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of
the minimum fla SETTING of the device. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for a jam condition
until the Jam Inhibit Time expires.
Jam Warning
10
20
Indicate a warning
Jam Warn Level 254
Define the current at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 50…600% for
the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
IMPORTANT
The Jam Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Jam Inhibit Time has expired,
the Jam Warning indication is instantaneous.
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Underload Trip
4
20
Indicate a trip
Underload Inhibit Time 255
Inhibit an underload trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is
adjustable from 0…250 s.
Underload Trip Delay 256
Define the time period an underload condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from
0.1…25.0 s.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 127
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 5
Current Imbalance Protection
A current imbalance can be caused by an imbalance in the voltage supply, unequal motor
winding impedance, or long and varying wire lengths. When a current imbalance exists,
the motor can experience an additional temperature rise, resulting in degradation of the
motor insulation and reduction of life expectancy. The E300 relay can monitor for this
condition with its Current Imbalance Trip and Warning function to detect for a rapid
current imbalance fault to minimize damage and loss of production.
Current Imbalance can be defined by the following equation:
%CI = 100% * (I
d
/I
a
)
where
%CI = Percent Current Imbalance
I
d
= Maximum Deviation from the Average Current
I
a
= Average Current
Underload Trip Level 257
Define the current at which the E300 relay trips on an underload. It is user-adjustable from 10…100%
of the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
IMPORTANT
The Underload Inhibit Timer starts after the maximum phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30%
of the minimum fla SETTING of the device. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an underload
condition until the Underload Inhibit Time expires.
IMPORTANT
For any given application, the practical limit of the Underload Trip Level (Parameter 246) is dependent
on the FLA Setting and the lower limit of the E300 relay’s current measurement capability.
Underload Warning
10
20
Indicate a warning
Underload Warning Level 258
Define the current at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 10…100% for
the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
IMPORTANT
The Underload Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Underload Inhibit Time
has expired, the Underload Warning indication is instantaneous.
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Current Imbalance Trip
4
20
Indicate a trip
Current Imbalance Inhibit Time 259
Inhibit a current imbalance trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is
adjustable from 0…250 s.
Current Imbalance Trip Delay 260
Define the time period a current imbalance condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is
adjustable from 0.1…25.0 s.
Current Imbalance Trip Level 261
Current Imbalance Trip Level (Parameter 261) allows you to define the percentage at which the E300
relay trips on a current imbalance. It is user-adjustable from 10…100%.
IMPORTANT
The Current Imbalance Inhibit Timer starts after a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of
the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for a current
imbalance condition until the Current Imbalance Inhibit Time expires.
Current Imbalance Warning
10
20
Indicate a warning
Current Imbalance Warning Level 262
Define the percentage at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from
10…100%.
IMPORTANT
The Current Imbalance Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Current
Imbalance Inhibit Time has expired, the Current Imbalance Warning indication is instantaneous.
128 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 5 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Line Undercurrent Protection
For non-motor applications, if the measured current is less than a specific level for a
specific phase, it may indicate an electrical malfunction, such as bad resistive heater
element or non-operating incandescent light bulb. Such conditions may not harm the
power system, but it can lead to loss of production or certification noncompliance.
The E300 relay can monitor for an undercurrent condition per phase with its Line Under
Current Trip and Warning function to detect for a rapid under current in a specific phase
to minimize damage and loss of production.
Line Overcurrent Protection
For non-motor applications when the measured current is greater than a specific level for
a specific phase may indicate an electrical malfunction, such as bad resistive heater
element. Such conditions could harm the power system over time, which could lead to
loss of production.
The E300 relay can monitor for an overcurrent condition per phase with its Line Over
Current Trip and Warning function to detect for a rapid over current in a specific phase
to minimize damage and loss of production.
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Under Current Trip
4
20
Indicate a trip for L1, L2, or L3
Under Current Inhibit Time 265
Inhibit an L1, L2, or L3 Under Current trip and warning from occurring during a load starting sequence.
It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
L1 Under Current Trip Delay
L2 Under Current Trip Delay
L3 Under Current Trip Delay
266
269
272
Define the time period an L1 Under Current condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is
adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
L1 Under Current Trip Level
L2 Under Current Trip Level
L3 Under Current Trip Level
267
270
273
Define the current at which the E300 relay trips on a L1 Under Current. It is user-adjustable from
10…100% of the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
IMPORTANT
The Under Current Inhibit Timer starts after the maximum phase of load current transitions from 0 A to
30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an
undercurrent condition until the Under Current Inhibit Time expires.
IMPORTANT
For any given application, the practical limit of the L1 Under Current Trip Level (Parameter 267) is
dependent on the FLA Setting and the lower limit of the E300 relay’s current measurement capability
Under Current Warning
10
20
Indicate a warning
L1 Under Current Warning Level
L2 Under Current Warning Level
L3 Under Current Warning Level
268
271
274
Define the current at which the E300 relay indicates a L1 Under Current warning. It is user-adjustable
from 10…100% for the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
IMPORTANT
The Under Current Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Under Current
Inhibit Timer has expired, the L1 Under Current Warning indication is instantaneous.
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Over Current Inhibit Time 275
Over Current Inhibit Time (Parameter 275) allows you to inhibit an L1, L2, and L3 Over Current trip and
warning from occurring during a load starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Over Current Trip
4
20
Indicates a trip forL1, L2, or L3
L1 Over Current Trip Delay
L2 Over Current Trip Delay
L3 Over Current Trip Delay
276
279
282
Define the time period an L1 Over Current condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable
from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 129
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 5
Line Loss Protection
For non-motor applications when the measured current is 0 amps a specific phase, this
may indicate an electrical malfunction such as bad resistive heater element or
non-operating incandescent light bulb. Such conditions may not harm the power system,
but it can lead to loss of production or certification noncompliance.
The E300 relay can monitor for a current-based line loss per phase with its Line Loss Trip
and Warning function to detect for a rapid line loss in a specific phase to minimize
damage and loss of production.
Voltage Protection
The E300 relay can digitally monitor the voltage supplied to an electric motor to help
protect against poor voltage quality. You can prevent a contactor from energizing if the
voltage is either too high, too low, or wrong rotation. The following E300 Sensing
Modules provide voltage monitoring capabilities.
Table 26 - Voltage Capabilities
L1 Over Current Trip Level
L2 Over Current Trip Level
L3 Over Current Trip Level
277
280
283
Define the current at which the E300 relay trips on a L1 Over Current. It is user-adjustable from
10…100% of the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
IMPORTANT
The Over Current Inhibit Timer starts after the maximum phase of load current transitions from 0 A to
30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an
overcurrent condition until the Over Current Inhibit Time expires.
Over Current Warning
10
20
Indicate a warning
L1 Over Current Warning Level
L2 Over Current Warning Level
L3 Over Current Warning Level
278
281
284
Define the current at which the E300 relay indicates a L1 Over Current warning. It is user-adjustable
from 10…100% for the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
IMPORTANT
The L1 Over Current Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Over Current
Inhibit Timer has expired, the L1 Over Current Warning indication is instantaneous.
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Line Loss Trip
4
20
Indicates a trip for L1, L2, or L3
Line Loss Inhibit Time 285
Inhibit an L1, L2, and L3 Line Loss trip and warning from occurring during a load starting sequence. It is
adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
L1 Line Loss Trip Delay
L2 Line Loss Trip Delay
L3 Line Loss Trip Delay
286
287
288
L1 Line Loss Trip Delay (Parameter 276) allows you to define the time period an L1 Line Loss condition
must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
IMPORTANT
The Line Loss Inhibit Timer starts when L1, L2, or L3 Line Loss protection is activated by a programmed
digital input (see Input Assignment Parameters 196-201). The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for
Line Loss condition until the Line Loss Inhibit Timer expires.
Line Loss Warning
4
20
Indicate a warning
IMPORTANT
The Line Loss Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Line Loss Inhibit Timer
has expired, the L1 Line Loss Warning indication is instantaneous.
Catalog Number Measurement Method L-L Voltage Trip/Warning Range
193-ESM-VIG-__-__ Internal 20…800V
592-ESM-VIG-__-__ Internal 20…800V
193-ESM-VIG-30A-CT External 20…6500V
130 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 5 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
This voltage information is used for the following protective trip and warning functions:
• Undervoltage trip/warning
• Overvoltage trip/warning
• Voltage imbalance trip/warning
• Phase rotation mismatch trip
• Under frequency trip/warning
• Over frequency trip/warning
Voltage Trip Enable (Parameter 184) and Voltage Warning Enable (Parameter 190) are
used to enable the respective voltage-based protective trip and warning functions.
Voltage Trip Status (Parameter 5) and Voltage Warning Status (Parameter 11) are used to
view the status of the respective voltage-based protective trip and warning functions.
Voltage Trip
The E300 relay trips with a voltage indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• A voltage trip is enabled
• Voltage is present
• A voltage inhibit time has expired
• The minimum phase voltage is less than the trip level for a time period greater
than the trip delay.
If the E300 relay trips on a voltage, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 1-long / 1-short blink pattern
• Bit 0 in Voltage Trip Status (Parameter 5) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their Protection
Fault state (if so programmed)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 131
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 5
Voltage Warning
The E300 relay indicates a voltage warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• A voltage warning is enabled
• Voltage is present
• A voltage condition exists
• Inhibit Time has expired
When the voltage warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 1-long / 1-short blink pattern
• Bit 0 in Voltage Warning Status (Parameter 11) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a warning alarm close
Undervoltage Protection
Electric motors consume more electric current when the voltage supplied to the motor is
lower than the motor nameplate rating. This can damage to an electric motor over an
extended period of time. The E300 relay can monitor for this condition with its Under
Voltage Trip and Warning function to detect for low voltage levels to minimize motor
damage and loss of production.
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output Relays,
Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and Digital Module 4
Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Under Voltage Trip
5
20
Indicate a trip
Under Voltage Inhibit Time 355
Inhibit an under voltage trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is
adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Under Voltage Trip Delay 356
Define the time period an under voltage condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable
from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
132 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 5 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Overvoltage Protection
The winding insulation for electric motors degrades faster when more voltage is supplied
to the motor than the motor nameplate rating. This can damage to an electric motor over
an extended period of time. The E300 relay can monitor for this condition with its Over
Voltage Trip and Warning function to detect for high voltage levels to minimize motor
damage and loss of production.
Voltage Imbalance Protection
A voltage imbalance can be caused by poor power quality and unequal distribution of
power. When a voltage imbalance exists, the motor can experience an additional
temperature rise, resulting in degradation of the motor insulation and reduction of life
expectancy. The E300 relay can monitor for this condition with its Voltage Imbalance
Trip and Warning function to detect for a rapid voltage imbalance fault to minimize
damage and loss of production.
Voltage Imbalance can be defined by the following equation:
%V
Imb
= 100% * (V
d
/V
a
)
where
Under Voltage Trip Level 357
Define the voltage at which the E300 relay trips on an under voltage. It is user-adjustable from
0…6553.5 volts.
IMPORTANT
The Under Voltage Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L. The E300
relay does not begin monitoring for an under voltage condition until the Under Voltage Inhibit Time
expires.
Under Voltage Warning
11
20
Indicate a warning
Under Voltage Warn Level 358
Under Voltage Warn Level (Parameter 358) allows you to define the voltage at which the E300 relay
indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 0…6553.5 volts.
IMPORTANT
The Under Voltage Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Under Voltage
Inhibit Time has expired, the Under Voltage Warning indication is instantaneous.
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Over Voltage Trip
5
20
Indicate a trip
Over Voltage Inhibit Time 359
Inhibit an over voltage trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is
adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Over Voltage Trip Delay 360
Define the time period an over voltage condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable
from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Over Voltage Trip Level 361
Define the voltage at which the E300 relay trips on an over voltage. It is user-adjustable from
0…6553.5 volts.
IMPORTANT
The Over Voltage Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L. The E300 relay
does not begin monitoring for an over voltage condition until the Over Voltage Inhibit Time expires.
Over Voltage Warning
11
20
Indicate a warning
Over Voltage Warn Level 362
Define the voltage at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 0…6553.5
volts.
IMPORTANT
The Over Voltage Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Over Voltage Inhibit
Time has expired, the Over Voltage Warning indication is instantaneous.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 133
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 5
%V
Imb
= Percent Voltage Imbalance
V
d
= Maximum Deviation from the Average Voltage
V
a
= Average Voltage
Phase Rotation Protection
Wiring of a three-phase voltage system can affect the rotational direction of an electric
motor. The E300 relay can help protect against the improper phase rotation so that an
electric motor rotates in the proper direction, ABC or ACB, to prevent equipment from
being damaged.
Frequency Protection
The E300 relay has the capability to help protect against poor voltage quality by offering
frequency-based protection. This protection is used when electric power is provided by
stand-alone electric generators. You can prevent a contactor from energizing if the voltage
frequency is either too high or too low. The E300 relay can monitor for this condition
with its Over and Under Frequency Trip and Warning function, and it can detect for an
improper voltage frequency to minimize motor damage and loss of production.
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Voltage Imbalance Trip
5
20
Indicate a trip
Voltage Imbalance Inhibit Time 365
Inhibit a voltage imbalance trip from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from
0…250 seconds.
Voltage Imbalance Trip Delay 366
Define the time period a voltage imbalance condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is
adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Voltage Imbalance Trip Level 367
Define the percentage at which the E300 relay trips on a voltage imbalance. It is user-adjustable from
10…100%.
IMPORTANT
The Voltage Imbalance Inhibit Timer starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L. The
E300 relay does not begin monitoring for a voltage imbalance condition until the Voltage Imbalance
Inhibit Time expires.
Voltage Imbalance Warning
11
20
Indicate a warning
Voltage Imbalance Warning Level 368
Define the percentage at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from
10…100%.
IMPORTANT
The Voltage Imbalance Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Voltage
Imbalance Inhibit Time has expired, the Voltage Imbalance Warning indication is instantaneous.
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Phase Rotation Trip
5
20
Indicate a trip
Phase Rotation Inhibit Time 363
Inhibit a phase rotation mismatch trip and warning from occurring. It is adjustable from 0…250
seconds.
Phase Rotation Trip Type 364
Define the required voltage phase rotation for the motor application. E300 relay trips on a phase
rotation mismatch when this parameter does not match the measured voltage phase rotation. It is
user-adjustable, ABC or ACB.
IMPORTANT
The Phase Rotation Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L. The E300
relay does not begin monitoring for a phase rotation mismatch condition until the Phase Rotation
Inhibit Time expires.
134 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 5 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Power Protection
The E300 relay can digitally monitor the power that is supplied to an electric motor to
help protect against poor power quality or alert you when power consumed by the motor
differs from what is expected. This protection is useful for pump cavitation and pump
material change detection. The following E300 Sensing Modules provide power
monitoring capabilities.
Table 27 - Power Capabilities
Parameter Name Parameter Name Description
Under Frequency Trip
5
20
Indicate a trip
Under Frequency Inhibit Time 369
Inhibit an under frequency trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is
adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Under Frequency Trip Delay 370
Define the time period an under frequency condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is
adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Under Frequency Trip Level 371
Define the frequency at which the E300 relay trips on an under frequency. It is user-adjustable from
46…65 Hz.
IMPORTANT
The Under Frequency Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L. The E300
relay does not begin monitoring for an under frequency condition until the Under Frequency Inhibit
Time expires.
Under Frequency Warning
11
20
Indicate a warning
Under Frequency Warn Level 372
Define the frequency at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from
46…65 Hz.
IMPORTANT
The Under Frequency Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Over Frequency
Inhibit Time has expired, the Over Frequency Warning indication is instantaneous.
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Over Frequency Trip
5
20
Indicate a trip
Over Frequency Inhibit Time 373
Inhibit an over frequency trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is
adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Over Frequency Trip Delay 374
Define the time period an over frequency condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable
from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Over Frequency Trip Level 375
Define the frequency at which the E300 relay trips on an over frequency. It is user-adjustable from
46…65 Hz.
IMPORTANT
The Over Frequency Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L. The E300
relay does not begin monitoring for an over frequency condition until the Over Frequency Inhibit Time
expires.
Over Frequency Warning
11
20
Indicate a warning
Over Frequency Warn Level 376
Over Frequency Warn Level (Parameter 376) allows you to define the frequency at which the E300 relay
indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 46…65 Hz.
IMPORTANT
The Over Frequency Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Over Frequency
Inhibit Time has expired, the Over Frequency Warning indication is instantaneous.
Catalog Number Measurement Method L-L Voltage Trip/Warning Range
193-ESM-VIG-__-__ Internal 20…800V
592-ESM-VIG-__-__ Internal 20…800V
193-ESM-VIG-30A-CT External 20…6500V
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 135
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 5
This power information is used for the following protective trip and warning functions:
• Under Real Power (kW) Trip/Warning
• Over Real Power (kW) Trip/Warning
• Under Reactive Power (kVAR) Trip/Warning
• Over Reactive Power (kVAR) Trip/Warning
• Under Apparent Power (kVA) Trip/Warning
• Over Apparent Power (kVA) Trip/Warning
• Under Power Factor Trip/Warning
• Over Power Factor Trip/Warning
Power Trip Enable (Parameter 185) and Power Warning Enable (Parameter 191) are used
to enable the respective power-based protective trip and warning functions.
Power Trip Status (Parameter 6) and Power Warning Status (Parameter 12) are used to
view the status of the respective power-based protective trip and warning functions.
Power Trip
The E300 relay trips with power indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• A power trip is enabled
• Current is present
• Voltage is present
• Power inhibit time has expired
• The total power is less than the trip level for a time period greater than the trip
delay.
If the E300 relay trips on power, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 2-long / 1-short blink pattern
• Bit 0 in Power Trip Status (Parameter 6) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their Protection
Fault state (if so programmed)
136 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 5 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Power Warning
The E300 relay indicates a power warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• A Power warning is enabled
• Current is present
• Voltage is present
• Power inhibit time has expired
• The power is equal to or less than the warning level
When the power warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 2-long / 1-short blink pattern
• Bit 0 in Power Warning Status (Parameter 12) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Real Power (kW) Protection
The E300 relay has the capability to help protect against real power (kW) for specific
applications that require the monitoring of both voltage and current. You can help
protect or issue a warning if the real power (kW) consumption of an electric motor is
either too high or too low.
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output Relays,
Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and Digital Module 4
Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Under kW Trip
6
20
Indicate a trip
Under kW Inhibit Time 378
Inhibit an under real power (kW) trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence.
It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Under kW Trip Delay 379
Define the time period an under real power (kW) condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is
adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 137
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 5
Reactive Power (kVAR) Protection
The E300 relay has the capability to help protect against reactive power (kVAR) for
specific applications that require the monitoring of both voltage and current. You can
help protect or issue a warning if the reactive power (kVAR) of an electric motor is either
too high or too low.
Under kW Trip Level 380
Define the real power (kW) at which the E300 relay trips on an under real power (kW). It is
user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Under kW Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a phase of
load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 relay does
not begin monitoring for an under real power (kW) condition until the Under kW Inhibit Time expires.
Under kW Warning
12
20
Indicate a warning
Under kW Warn Level 381
Define the real power (kW) at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from
0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Under kW Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Under kW Inhibit Time
has expired, the Under kW Warning indication is instantaneous.
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Over kW Trip
6
20
Indicate a trip
Over kW Inhibit Time 382
Inhibit an over real power (kW) trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It
is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Over kW Trip Delay 383
Define the time period an over real power (kW) condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is
adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Over kW Trip Level 384
Define the total real power (kW) at which the E300 relay trips on over real power (kW). It is
user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Over kW Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a phase of load
current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 relay does not
begin monitoring for an over real power (kW) condition until the Over kW Inhibit Time expires.
Over kW Warning
12
20
Indicate a warning
Over kW Warn Level 385
Define the real power (kW) at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from
0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Over kW Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Over kW Inhibit Time has
expired, the Over kW Warning indication is instantaneous.
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Under kVAR Consumed Trip
6
20
Indicate a trip
Under kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time 386
Inhibit an under reactive power (kVAR) consumed trip and warning from occurring during the motor
starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Under kVAR Consumed Trip Delay 387
Define the time period an under reactive power (kVAR) consumed condition must be present before a
trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Under kVAR Consumed Trip Level 388
Define the reactive power (kVAR) consumed at which the E300relay trips on an under reactive power
(kVAR) consumed. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Under kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a
phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300
relay does not begin monitoring for an under reactive power (kVAR) consumed condition until the
Under kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time expires.
138 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 5 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Under kVAR Consumed Warning
12
20
Indicate a warning
Under kVAR Consumed Warn Level 389
Define the reactive power (kVAR) consumed at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is
user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Under kVAR Consumed Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Under
kVAR consumed Inhibit Time has expired, the Under kVAR Consumed Warning indication is
instantaneous.
Under kVAR Generated Trip
6
20
Indicate a trip
Under kVAR Generated Inhibit Time 394
Inhibit Time (Parameter 394) allows you to inhibit an under power factor leading trip and warning from
occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Under kVAR Generated Trip Delay 395
Define the time period an under reactive power (kVAR) generated condition must be present before a
trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Under kVAR Generated Trip Level 396
Define the reactive power (kVAR) generated at which the E300 relay trips on an under reactive power
(kVAR) generated. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Under kVAR Generated Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a
phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300
relay does not begin monitoring for an under reactive power (kVAR) generated condition until the
Under kVAR Generated Inhibit Time expires.
Under kVAR Generated Warning
12
20
Indicate a warning
Under kVAR Generated Warn Level 397
Under kVAR Generated Warn Level (Parameter 397) allows you to define the reactive power (kVAR)
generated at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Under kVAR Generated Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Under
kVAR generated Inhibit Time has expired, the Under kVAR Generated Warning indication is
instantaneous.
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Over kVAR Consumed Trip
6
20
Indicate a trip
Over kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time 390
Inhibit an over reactive power (kVAR) consumed trip and warning from occurring during the motor
starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Over kVAR Consumed Trip Delay 391
Define the time period an over reactive power (kVAR) consumed condition must be present before a trip
occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Over kVAR Consumed Trip Level 392
Define the total reactive power (kVAR) consumed at which the E300 relay trips on over reactive power
(kVAR) consumed. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Over kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a
phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300
relay does not begin monitoring for an over reactive power (kVAR) consumed condition until the Over
kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time expires.
Over kVAR Consumed Warning
12
20
Indicate a warning
Over kVAR Consumed Warn Level 393
Over kVAR Consumed Warn Level (Parameter 393) allows you to define the reactive power (kVAR)
consumed at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Over kVAR Consumed Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Over kVAR
Consumed Inhibit Time has expired, the Over kVAR Consumed Warning indication is instantaneous.
Over kVAR Generated Trip
6
20
Indicate a trip
Over kVAR Generated Inhibit Time 398
Inhibit an over reactive power (kVAR) generated trip and warning from occurring during the motor
starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Over kVAR Generated Trip Delay 399
Define the time period an over reactive power (kVAR) generated condition must be present before a trip
occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 139
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 5
Apparent Power (kVA) Protection
The E300 relay has the capability to help protect against apparent power (kVA) for
specific applications that require the monitoring of both voltage and current. You can
help protect or issue a warning if the apparent power (kVA) consumption of an electric
motor is either too high or too low.
Over kVAR Generated Trip Level 400
Define the total reactive power (kVAR) generated at which the E300 relay trips on over reactive power
(kVAR) generated. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
IIMPORTANT
The Over kVAR Generated Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a
phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300
relay does not begin monitoring for an over reactive power (kVAR) generated condition until the Over
kVAR Generated Inhibit Time expires.
Over kVAR Generated Warning
12
20
Indicate a warning
Over kVAR Generated Warn Level 401
Define the reactive power (kVAR) generated at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is
user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Over kVAR Generated Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Over kVAR
Generated Inhibit Time has expired, the Over kVAR Generated Warning indication is instantaneous.
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Under kVA Trip
6
20
Indicate a trip
Under kVA Inhibit Time 402
Inhibit an under apparent power (kVA) trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting
sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Under kVA Trip Delay 403
Define the time period an under apparent power (kVA) condition must be present before a trip occurs. It
is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Under kVA Trip Level 404
Under kVA Trip Level (Parameter 404) allows you to define the apparent power (kVA) at which the E300
relay trips on an under apparent power (kVA). It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kVA.
IMPORTANT
The Under kVA Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a phase of
load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 relay does
not begin monitoring for an under apparent power (kVA) condition until the Under kVA Inhibit Time
expires.
Under kVA Warning
12
20
Indicate a warning
Under kVA Warn Level 405
Under kVA Warn Level (Parameter 405) allows you to define the apparent power (kVA) at which the
E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kVA.
IMPORTANT
The Under kVA Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Under kVA Inhibit Time
has expired, the Under kVA Warning indication is instantaneous.
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Over kVA Trip
6
20
Indicate a trip
Over kVA Inhibit Time 406
Inhibit an over apparent power (kVA) trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting
sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Over kVA Trip Delay 407
Define the time period an over apparent power (kVA) condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is
adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
140 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 5 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Power Factor Protection
The E300 relay has the capability to help protect against power factor for specific
applications that require the monitoring of both voltage and current. You can help
protect or issue a warning if the power factor of an electric motor is either too high or too
low.
Over kVA Trip Level 408
Over kVA Trip Level (Parameter 408) allows you to define the total apparent power (kVA) at which the
E300 relay trips on over apparent power (kVA). It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kVA.
IMPORTANT
The Over kVA Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a phase of load
current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 relay does not
begin monitoring for an over apparent power (kVA) condition until the Over kVA Inhibit Time expires.
Over kVA Warning
12
20
Indicate a warning
Over kVA Warn Level 409
Over kVA Warn Level (Parameter 409) allows you to define the apparent power (kVA) at which the E300
relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kVA.
IMPORTANT
The Over kVA Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Over kVA Inhibit Time
has expired, the Over kVA Warning indication is instantaneous.
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Under Power Factor Lagging Trip
6
20
Indicate a trip
Under Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time 410
Inhibit an under power factor lagging trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting
sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Under Power Factor Lagging Trip Delay 411
Define the time period an under power factor lagging condition must be present before a trip occurs. It
is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Under Power Factor Lagging Trip Level 412
Define the power factor lagging at which the E300 relay trips on an under power factor lagging. It is
user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Under Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L
and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The
E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an under power factor lagging condition until the Under
Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time expires.
Under Power Factor Lagging Warning
12
20
Indicate a warning
Under Power Factor Lagging Warn Level 413
Define the power factor lagging at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from
0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Under Power Factor Lagging Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the
Under Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time has expired, the Under Power Factor Lagging Warning
indication is instantaneous.
Under Power Factor Leading Trip
6
20
Indicate a trip
Under Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time 418
Inhibit an under power factor leading trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting
sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Under Power Factor Leading Trip Delay 419
Define the time period an under power factor leading condition must be present before a trip occurs. It
is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 141
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 5
Under Power Factor Leading Trip Level 420
Define the power factor leading at which the E300 relay trips on an under power factor leading. It is
user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Under Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L
and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The
E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an under power factor leading condition until the Under
Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time expires.
Under Power Factor Leading Warning
12
20
Indicate a warning
Under Power Factor Leading Warn Level 421
Define the power factor leading at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from
0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Under Power Factor Leading Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the
Under Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time has expired, the Under Power Factor Leading Warning
indication is instantaneous.
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Over Power Factor Lagging Trip
6
20
Indicate a trip
Over Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time 414
Inhibit an over power factor lagging trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting
sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Over Power Factor Lagging Trip Delay 415
Define the time period an over power factor lagging condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is
adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Over Power Factor Lagging Trip Level 416
Define the total power factor lagging at which the E300 relay trips on over power factor lagging. It is
user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Over Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L
and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The
E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an over power factor lagging condition until the Over Power
Factor Lagging Inhibit Time expires.
Over Power Factor Lagging Warning
12
20
Indicate a warning
Over Power Factor Lagging Warn Level 417
Define the power factor lagging at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from
0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Over Power Factor Lagging Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Over
Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time has expired, the Over Power Factor Lagging Warning indication is
instantaneous.
Over Power Factor Leading Trip
6
20
Indicate a trip
Over Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time 422
Inhibit an over power factor leading trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting
sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Over Power Factor Leading Trip Delay 423
Define the time period an over power factor leading condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is
adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Over Power Factor Leading Trip Level 424
Define the total power factor leading at which the E300 relay trips on over power factor leading. It is
user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Over Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L
and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The
E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an over power factor leading condition until the Over Power
Factor Leading Inhibit Time expires.
Over Power Factor Leading Warning
12
20
Indicate a warning
Over Power Factor Leading Warn Level 425
Define the power factor leading at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from
0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Over Power Factor Leading Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Over
Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time has expired, the Over Power Factor Leading Warning indication is
instantaneous.
142 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 5 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Control Protection
The E300 relay provides a number of control-based protection functions including:
• Te s t Tr i p
• Operator Station Trip
• Remote Trip
• Start Inhibit
• Preventive Maintenance
• Configuration Trip
• Option Match Trip/Warning
• Expansion Bus Trip/Warning
• Non Volatile Storage Trip
• Te s t Mo de Tri p
Control Trip Enable (Parameter 186) and Control Warning Enable (Parameter 192) are
used to enable the respective control-based protective trip and warning functions.
Control Trip Status (Parameter 7) and Control Warning Status (Parameter 13) are used
to monitor the respective current-based protective trip and warning functions.
Control Trip
The E300 relay trips with a control-based indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• A control-based protection is enabled
• You press the blue reset button on the Communication Module for more than 3
seconds.
If the E300 relay trips on a control, the following occurs:
• The TRIP/WARN LED flashes a red 3-long / 1-short blink pattern
• Bit 0 in Control Trip Status (Parameter 7) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their Protection
Fault state (if so programmed)
Control Warning
The E300 relay provides a warning indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• Warning condition exists
If the E300 relay warns, the following occurs:
• The TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 3-long / 2-short blink pattern
• Bit 1 in Control Warning Status (Parameter 13) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a warning alarm closes
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 143
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 5
Test Trip
The E300 relay provides the capability to put the overload relay into a Test Trip state. You
can implement this feature when commissioning a motor control circuit to verify the
response of the E300 relay, its associated Expansion I/O modules, and the networked
automation system.
Thermistor (PTC) Protection
The following E300 relay control modules can accept up to 6 thermistors (PTC)
temperature sensors wired in series to monitor the temperature of a motor’s windings,
rotor, and/or bearings.
• 193-EIOGP-42-24D
• 193-EIOGP-22-120
• 193-EIOGP-22-240
The thermistor (PTC) based temperature sensors connect to the IT1 and IT2 terminals
of the E300 Control Module.If the E300 relay trips on a thermistor.
DeviceLogix Protection
An E300 relay with firmware v5.000 or higher has a DeviceLogix logic engine. You can
create custom logic programs for distributed motor control applications. See Chapter 8
for more information on DeviceLogix. DeviceLogix provides you with the capability to
create a customized protection algorithm that can generate a trip or warning event.
Operator Station Trip
The E300 relay provides the capability to plug and play its optional operator stations. The
operator station protection feature trips the E300 relay when you press the red 0 (stop)
button. This feature is a failsafe mechanism to allow you to de-energize a contactor coil
anytime the red 0 (stop) button is pressed.
Operator Station Trip should be disabled when an operator station is being used to send
start and stop signals to an automation control system.
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Test Trip
7
20
Indicate a trip
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Thermistor (PTC) Trip
7
20
Indicate a trip
Thermistor (PTC) Warning
13
20
Indicate a warning
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
DeviceLogix Trip
7
20
Indicate a trip
DeviceLogix Warning
13
20
Indicate a warning
144 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 5 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Remote Trip
The E300 relay provides the capability to remotely cause the E300 relay to trip via a
network command or assigned digital input on the Control Module (see Chapter 3
for
digital input assignments). This feature allows the capability of tripping the E300 relay
from a remote source such as a vibration switch or external monitoring relay.
Start Inhibit Protection
This protective function allows you to limit the number of starts in a given time period
and limit the operating hours for an electric motor. A start is defined as the E300 relay
sensing a transition in current from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA rating of the device.
The Blocked Start protective function is set by Starts Per Hour (Parameter 205) and/or
Starts Interval (Parameter 206).Time to Start
Preventive Maintenance
The E300 relay offers preventive maintenance warnings based on the number of start
cycles and the number of operating hours. These warnings can be used to alert you that
the number of starts or number of operating hours has been reached, and it is time to
perform preventive maintenance.
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Operator Station Trip
7
20
Indicate a trip
You can also press the red O button on an operator station to trigger a trip.
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Remote Trip
7
20
Indicate a trip
A trip can also occur when a Control Module’s digital input with a remote trip assignment is activated or
the Communication Module receives a remote trip command from the communication network
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Blocked Start Trip
7
20
Indicate a trip
Starts Per Hour 205 Number of starts within the last hour (60 minutes). This value is adjustable from 0…120 starts.
Starts Interval 206 Time that you must wait between starts. This value is adjustable from 0…3600 seconds.
Starts Available 30
Number of starts currently available based on the blocked start settings and the actual motor starting
events.
Time to Start 31
Amount of the time remaining until a new start can be issued. If the Time to Start time has elapsed, this
parameter reports zero until the next Blocked Start trip occurs.
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Number of Starts Warning
13
20
Indicate a warning
Total Starts 207 Set the number of starts until the starts counter warning occurs.
Starts Counter 29
Number of times a motor has been started. This value can be reset to zero using the Clear Command
(Parameter 165) function Clear Operating Statistics.
Operating Hours Warning
13
20
Indicate a warning
Total Operating Hours 208 Set the number operating hours that a motor can operate until the operating hours warning occurs.
Operating Time 28
Number hours that a motor has been running. This value can be reset to zero using the Clear Command
(Parameter 165) function Clear Operating Statistics.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 145
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 5
Hardware Fault
The E300 relay continuously monitors the status of the Control, Sensing, and
Communication Modules. The E300 relay issues a hardware fault trip if there is an issue
with the Control, Sensing, and Communication Modules or if one of the modules is
missing or incompatible. The Hardware Fault Trip is always enabled.
Contactor Feedback Protection
An E300 relay with firmware v5.000 or higher has the capability to control motors using
its Operating Modes. You can select one of the pre-programmed Operating Modes that
monitor the feedback status of a contactor by wiring the auxiliary contacts of the
contactor into one of the digital inputs of the E300 relay. See Chapter 4
for more
information on Operating Modes.
Nonvolatile Storage Fault
The E300 relay continuously monitors the status of its nonvolatile storage. The E300
relay issues a nonvolatile storage fault trip if there is an issue with its nonvolatile storage or
if it becomes corrupt. The Nonvolatile Storage Fault Trip is always enabled.
Test Mode Trip
Some motor control center enclosures include a Test Position in which the motor power
is disconnected from the enclosure, but the control power is still active. This allows motor
control center commissioning staff to verify that the motor starter is mechanically
working and communication is established with the automation control system. The
E300 relay provides the capability to put the overload relay into a Test Mode Trip state if
motor control center enclosure is in a test position, and the E300 relay detects motor
current and/or voltage is present.
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Hardware Fault Trip
7
20
Indicate a trip
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Feedback Timeout 213
Amount time in milliseconds a Feedback based Operating Mode waits to receive a contactor feedback
signal after the contactor has been issued an energize command.
Contactor Feedback Trip
7
20
Indicate a trip
Contactor Feedback Warning
13
20
Indicate a warning
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Nonvoltaile Storage Fault Trip
7
20
Indicate a trip
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Test Mode Trip
7
20
Indicate a trip
IMPORTANT
Motor current is detected when a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA
setting of the device
146 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 5 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Analog Protection
The E300 relay’s Analog I/O Expansion Modules scan up to three analog signals per
module. This information can be used to trigger an over analog level Trip or Warning.
The analog-based protection features can be used with the following analog applications:
• Monitoring motor winding and bearing temperatures that are measured by RTD
sensors
• Monitoring liquid, air, or steam flow
• Monitoring temperature
• Monitoring weight
• Monitoring levels
• Monitoring a potentiometer
• Monitoring PTC or NTC thermistor sensors
Analog Trip Enable (Parameter 187) and Analog Warning Enable (Parameter 193) are
used to enable the respective analog-based protective trip and warning functions.
Analog Trip Status (Parameter 8) and Analog Warning Status (Parameter 14) are used to
monitor the respective analog-based protective trip and warning functions.
Analog Trip
The E300 relay trips with an analog module trip indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• The trip is enabled
• The measured analog input signal is greater than the trip level for a time period
greater than the level trip delay.
If the E300 relay trips on an analog module channel, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 4-long / 1-short blink pattern
• Bit 0 in Analog Trip Status (Parameter 8) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their Protection
Fault state (if so programmed)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 147
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 5
Analog Warning
The E300 relay indicates an analog warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Over Level Warning is enabled
• The maximum phase current is equal to or greater than the Analog Module 1 –
Channel 00 Warning Level
When the warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 4-long / 1-short blink pattern
• Bit 0 in Analog Warning Status (Parameter 14) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Analog Module
The E300 supports as many as 4 analog modules. Analog I/O Expansion Module scans
up to three analog signals. An over level trip or warning can be configured for each input
channel.
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output Relays,
Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and Digital Module 4
Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
148 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 5 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Parameter Name Parameter Number Description
Analog Module Over Level Trip
8
20
Indicate a trip
Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay
443
452
461
474
483
492
505
514
523
536
545
554
Define the time period a l evel condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from
0.1…25.0 seconds.
Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Trip Level
Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Trip Level
Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Trip Level
Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Trip Level
Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Trip Level
Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Trip Level
Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Trip Level
Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Trip Level
Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Trip Level
Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Trip Level
Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Trip Level
Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Trip Level
444
453
462
475
484
493
506
515
524
537
546
555
Define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 relay trips on a level trip. It is
user-adjustable from -32768…+32767.
Analog Module Over Level Warning
14
20
Indicate a warning
Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Warning Level
Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Warning Level
Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Warning Level
Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Warning Level
Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Warning Level
Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Warning Level
Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Warning Level
Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Warning Level
Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Warning Level
Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Warning Level
Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Warning Level
Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Warning Level
445
454
463
476
485
494
507
516
525
538
547
556
Define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 relay trips on a warning. It is
user-adjustable from -32768…+32767.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 149
Chapter 6
Commands
This chapter provides detailed information about the reset, clear, and
pre-configuration functions of the E300™ Electronic Overload Relay. The E300 relay
provides three types of commands:
•Trip reset
• Configuration preset
• Clear command
Trip Reset
Trip Reset (Parameter 163) allows you to reset an E300 relay when it is in a tripped
state. Trip Reset has the same functionality as pressing the blue reset button on E300
communication module and using the Trip Reset bit in the consumed output
assemblies of a communication network.
A trip reset can only be performed when all conditions for the trip event have been
cleared. For an overload trip event, the % Thermal Capacity Utilized (Parameter 1)
must be below the value that is specified in Overload Reset Level (Parameter 174).
Configuration Preset
The E300 relay has a number of preset configurations that allow you to quickly
configure all configuration parameters that are needed for a specific operating mode in
one command. This also allows you to restore the factory default values for all
configuration parameters in the E300 relay.
The following pages list the available configuration presets and the values for the
associated pre-configured configuration values.
Factory Defaults
When the Factory Defaults configuration preset command is selected, the E300 relay
restores all configuration parameters back to their original factory default values.
Figure 78 - Factory Default Values
No. Parameter Name Default
Value
Units No. Parameter Name Default
Value
Units No. Parameter Name Default
Value
Units
139 TripHistoryMaskI 0xFFFF 304 OutPt00PrFltAct Goto Value 428 Screen1Param1 1
140 TripHistoryMaskV 0x003F 305 OutPt00PrFltVal Open 429 Screen1Param2 50
141 TripHistoryMaskP 0x0FFF 306 OutPt00ComFltAct Goto Value 430 Screen2Param1 2
142 TripHistoryMaskC 0x27FF 307 OutPt00ComFltVal Open 431 Screen2Param2 3
143 TripHistoryMaskA 0x0FFF 308 OutPt00ComIdlAct Goto Value 432 Screen3Param1 51
145 WarnHistoryMaskI 0xFFFF 309 OutPt00ComIdlVal Open 433 Screen3Param2 52
146 WarnHistoryMaskV 0x003F 310 OutPt01PrFltAct Goto Value 434 Screen4Param1 38
147 WarnHistoryMaskP 0x0FFF 311 OutPt01PrFltVal Open 435 Screen4Param2 39
148 WarnHistoryMaskC 0x1FFF 312 OutPt01ComFltAct Goto Value 436 DisplayTimeout 300 Seconds
150 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 6 Commands
149 WarnHistoryMaskA 0x0FFF 313 OutPt01ComFltVal Open 437 InAnMod1Ch00Type Disable
171 FLASetting 0.50 Amps 314 OutPt01ComIdlAct Goto Value 438 InAMod1Ch0Format Eng Units
172 TripClass 10 315 OutPt01ComIdlVal Open 439 InAMod1C0TmpUnit Degrees C
173 OLPTCResetMode Automatic 316 OutPt02PrFltAct Goto Value 440 InAMod1C0FiltFrq 17 Hz
174 OLResetLevel 75 %TCU 317 OutPt02PrFltVal Open 441 InAMod1C0OpCktSt Upscale
175 OLWarningLevel 85 %TCU 318 OutPt02ComFltAct Goto Value 442 InAnMod1Ch0RTDEn 3-Wire
176 SingleOrThreePh Three Phase 319 OutPt02ComFltVal Open 443 InAMod1C0TripDly 1.0 Seconds
177 FLA2Setting 0.50 Amps 320 OutPt02ComIdlAct Goto Value 444 InAMod1C0TripLvl 0
183 TripEnableI 0x0003 321 OutPt02ComIdlVal Open 445 InAMod1C0WarnLvl 0
184 TripEnableV 0 322 OutDig1PrFltAct Goto Value 446 InAnMod1Ch01Type Disable
185 TripEnableP 0 323 OutDig1PrFltVal Open 447 InAMod1Ch1Format Eng Units
186 TripEnableC 0x20C9 324 OutDig1ComFltAct Goto Value 448 InAMod1C1TmpUnit Degrees C
187 TripEnableA 0 325 OutDig1ComFltVal Open 449 InAMod1C1FiltFrq 17 Hz
189 WarningEnableI 0 326 OutDig1ComIdlAct Goto Value 450 InAMod1C1OpCktSt Upscale
190 WarningEnableV 0 327 OutDig1ComIdlVal Open 451 InAnMod1Ch1RTDEn 3-Wire
191 WarningEnableP 0 328 OutDigp2PrFltAct Goto Value 452 InAMod1C1TripDly 1.0 Seconds
192 WarningEnableC 0 329 OutDig2PrFltVal Open 453 InAMod1C1TripLvl 0
193 WarningEnableA 0 330 OutDig2ComFltAct Goto Value 454 InAMod1C1WarnLvl 0
195 SetOperatingMode
Net
Overload
331 OutDig2ComFltVal Open 455 InAnMod1Ch02Type Disable
196 InPt00Assignment Normal 332 OutDig2ComIdlAct Goto Value 456 InAMod1Ch2Format Eng Units
197 InPt01Assignment Normal 333 OutDig2ComIdlVal Open 457 InAMod1C2TmpUnit Degrees C
198 InPt02Assignment Normal 334 OutDig3PrFltAct Goto Value 458 InAMod1C2FiltFrq 17 Hz
199 InPt03Assignment Normal 335 OutDig3PrFltVal Open 459 InAMod1C2OpCktSt Upscale
200 InPt04Assignment Normal 336 OutDig3ComFltAct Goto Value 460 InAnMod1Ch2RTDEn 3-Wire
201 InPt05Assignment Normal 337 OutDig3ComFltVal Open 461 InAMod1C2TripDly 1.0 Seconds
202 OutPt0Assignment * Trip Relay 338 OuDig3ComIdlAct Goto Value 462 InAMod1C2TripLvl 0
203 OutPt1Assignment Normal 339 OutDig3ComIdlVal Open 463 InAMod1C2WarnLvl 0
204 OutPt2Assignment Normal 340 OutDig4PrFltAct Goto Value 464 OutAnMod1Type Disable
205 StartsPerHour 2 341 OutDig4PrFltVal Open 465 OutAnMod1Select Ave %FLA
206 StartsInterval 600 Seconds 342 OutDig4ComFltAct Goto Value 466 OutAnMod1FltActn Zero
207 PMTotalStarts 0 343 OutDig4ComFltVal Open 467 OutAnMod1IdlActn Zero
208 PMOperatingHours 0 Hrs 344 OutDig4ComIdlAct Goto Value 468 InAnMod2Ch00Type Disable
209 ActFLA2wOutput Disable 345 OutDig4ComIdlVal Open 469 InAMod2Ch0Format Eng Units
211 SecurityPolicy 0x801F 346 CommOverride Disable 470 InAMod2C0TmpUnit Degrees C
212 Language English 347 NetworkOverride Disable 471 InAMod2C0FiltFrq 17 Hz
213 FeedbackTimeout 500 350 PtDevOutCOSMask 0x0000 472 InAMod2C0OpCktSt Upscale
214 TransitionDelay 10000 352 VoltageMode Delta 473 InAnMod2Ch0RTDEn 3-Wire
215 InterlockDelay 100 353 PTPrimary 480 474 InAMod2C0TripDly 1.0 Seconds
216 EmergencyStartEn Disable 354 PTSecondary 480 475 InAMod2C0TripLvl 0
221 ControlModuleTyp Ignore 355 UVInhibitTime 10 Seconds 476 InAMod2C0WarnLvl 0
222 SensingModuleTyp Ignore 356 UVTripDelay 1.0 Seconds 477 InAnMod2Ch01Type Disable
223 CommsModuleType Ignore 357 UVTripLevel 100.0 Volt 478 InAMod2Ch1Format Eng Units
224 OperStationType Ignore 358 UVWarningLevel 400.0 Volt 479 InAMod2C1TmpUnit Degrees C
225 DigitalMod1Type Ignore 359 OVInhibitTime 10 Seconds 480 InAMod2C1FiltFrq 17 Hz
226 DigitalMod2Type Ignore 360 OVTripDelay 1.0 Seconds 481 InAMod2C1OpCktSt Upscale
227 DigitalMod3Type Ignore 361 OVTripLevel 500.0 Volt 482 InAnMod2Ch1RTDEn 3-Wire
228 DigitalMod4Type Ignore 362 OVWarningLevel 490.0 Volt 483 InAMod2C1TripDly 1.0 Seconds
229 AnalogMod1Type Ignore 363 PhRotInhibitTime 10 Seconds 484 InAMod2C1TripLvl 0
No. Parameter Name Default
Value
Units No. Parameter Name Default
Value
Units No. Parameter Name Default
Value
Units
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 151
Commands Chapter 6
230 AnalogMod2Type Ignore 364 PhaseRotTripType ABC 485 InAMod2C1WarnLvl 0
231 AnalogMod3Type Ignore 365 VIBInhibitTime 10 Seconds 486 InAnMod2Ch02Type Disable
232 AnalogMod4Type Ignore 366 VIBTripDelay 1.0 Seconds 487 InAMod2Ch2Format Eng Units
233 MismatchAction 0x0000 367 VIBTripLevel 15 % 488 InAMod2C2TmpUnit Degrees C
239 PLInhibitTime 0 Seconds 368 VIBWarningLevel 10 % 489 InAMod2C2FiltFrq 17 Hz
240 PLTripDelay 1 Seconds 369 UFInhibitTime 10 Seconds 490 InAMod2C2OpCktSt Upscale
241 GroundFaultType Internal 370 UFTripDelay 1.0 Seconds 491 InAnMod2Ch2RTDEn 3-Wire
242 GFInhibitTime 10 Seconds 371 UFTripLevel 57 Hz 492 InAMod2C2TripDly 1.0 Seconds
243 GFTripDelay 0.5 Seconds 372 UFWarningLevel 58 Hz 493 InAMod2C2TripLvl 0
244 GFTripLevel 2.50 Amps 373 OFInhibitTime 10 Seconds 494 InAMod2C2WarnLvl 0
245 GFWarningDelay 0 Seconds 374 OFTripDelay 1.0 Seconds 495 OutAnMod2Type Disable
246 GFWarningLevel 2.00 Amps 375 OFTripLevel 63 Hz 496 OutAnMod2Select Ave %FLA
247 GFFilter Disable 376 OFWarningLevel 62 Hz 497 OutAnMod2FltActn Zero
248 GFMaxInhibit Disable 377 PowerScale kW 498 OutAnMod2dlActn Zero
249 StallEnabledTime 10 Seconds 378 UWInhibitTime 10 Seconds 499 InAnMod3Ch00Type Disable
250 StallTripLevel 600 %FLA 379 UWTripDelay 1.0 Seconds 500 InAMod3Ch0Format Eng Units
251 JamInhibitTime 10 Seconds 380 UWTripLevel 0.000 kW 501 InAMod3C0TmpUnit Degrees C
252 JamTripDelay 5.0 Seconds 381 UWWarningLevel 0.000 kW 502 InAMod3C0FiltFrq 17 Hz
253 JamTripLevel 250 %FLA 382 OWInhibitTime 10 Seconds 503 InAMod3C0OpCktSt Upscale
254 JamWarningLevel 150 %FLA 383 OWTripDelay 1.0 Seconds 504 InAnMod3Ch0RTDEn 3-Wire
255 ULInhibitTime 10 Seconds 384 OWTripLevel 0.000 kW 505 InAMod3C0TripDly 1.0 Seconds
256 ULTripDelay 5.0 Seconds 385 OWWarningLevel 0.000 kW 506 InAMod3C0TripLvl 0
257 ULTripLevel 50 %FLA 386 UVARCInhibitTime 10 Seconds 507 InAMod3C0WarnLvl 0
258 ULWarningLevel 70 %FLA 387 UVARCTripDelay 1.0 Seconds 508 InAnMod3Ch01Type Disable
259 CIInhibitTime 10 Seconds 388 UVARCTripLevel 0.000 kVAR 509 InAMod3Ch1Format Eng Units
260 CITripDelay 5.0 Seconds 389 UVARCWarnLevel 0.000 kVAR 510 InAMod3C1TmpUnit Degrees C
261 CITripLevel 35 % 390 OVARCInhibitTime 10 Seconds 511 InAMod3C1FiltFrq 17 Hz
262 CIWarningLevel 20 % 391 OVARCTripDelay 1.0 Seconds 512 InAMod3C1OpCktSt Upscale
263 CTPrimary 5 392 OVARCTripLevel 0.000 kVAR 513 InAnMod3Ch1RTDEn 3-Wire
264 CTSecondary 5 393 OVARCWarnLevel 0.000 kVAR 514 InAMod3C1TripDly 1.0 Seconds
265 UCInhibitTime 10 Seconds 394 UVARGInhibitTime 10 Seconds 515 InAMod3C1TripLvl 0
266 L1UCTripDelay 1.0 Seconds 395 UVARGTripDelay 1.0 Seconds 516 InAMod3C1WarnLvl 0
267 L1UCTripLevel 35 % 396 UVARGTripLevel 0.000 kVAR 517 InAnMod3Ch02Type Disable
268 L1UCWarningLevel 40 % 397 UVARGWarnLevel 0.000 kVAR 518 InAMod3Ch2Format Eng Units
269 L2UCTripDelay 1.0 Seconds 398 OVARGInhibitTime 10 Seconds 519 InAMod3C2TmpUnit Degrees C
270 L2UCTripLevel 35 % 399 OVARGTripDelay 1.0 Seconds 520 InAMod3C2FiltFrq 17 Hz
271 L2UCWarningLevel 40 % 400 OVARGTripLevel 0.000 kVAR 521 InAMod3C2OpCktSt Upscale
272 L3UCTripDelay 1.0 Seconds 401 OVARGWarnLevel 0.000 kVAR 522 InAnMod3Ch2RTDEn 3-Wire
273 L3UCTripLevel 35 % 402 UVAInhibitTime 10 Seconds 523 InAMod3C2TripDly 1.0 Seconds
274 L3UCWarningLevel 40 % 403 UVATripDelay 1.0 Seconds 524 InAMod3C2TripLvl 0
275 OCInhibitTime 10 Seconds 404 UVATripLevel 0.000 kVA 525 InAMod3C2WarnLvl 0
276 L1OCTripDelay 1.0 Seconds 405 UVAWarningLevel 0.000 kVA 526 OutAnMod3Type Disable
277 L1OCTripLevel 100 % 406 OVAInhibitTime 10 Seconds 527 OutAnMod3Select Ave %FLA
278 L1OCWarningLevel 90 % 407 OVATripDelay 1.0 Seconds 528 OutAnMod3FltActn Zero
279 L2OCTripDelay 1.0 Seconds 408 OVATripLevel 0.000 kVA 529 OutAnMod3dlActn Zero
280 L2OCTripLevel 100 % 409 OVAWarningLevel 0.000 kVA 530 InAnMod4Ch00Type Disable
281 L2OCWarningLevel 90 % 410 UPFLagInhibTime 10 Seconds 531 InAMod4Ch0Format Eng Units
282 L3OCTripDelay 1.0 Seconds 411 UPFLagTripDelay 1.0 Seconds 532 InAMod3C0TmpUnit Degrees C
283 L3OCTripLevel 100 % 412 UPFLagTripLevel -90 % 533 InAMod4C0FiltFrq 17 Hz
No. Parameter Name Default
Value
Units No. Parameter Name Default
Value
Units No. Parameter Name Default
Value
Units
152 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 6 Commands
284 L3OCWarningLevel 90 % 413 UPFLagWarnLevel -95 % 534 InAMod4C0OpCktSt Upscale
285 LineLossInhTime 10 Seconds 414 OPFLagInhibTime 10 Seconds 535 InAnMod4Ch0RTDEn 3-Wire
286 L1LossTripDelay 1.0 Seconds 415 OPFLagTripDelay 1.0 Seconds 536 InAMod4C0TripDly 1.0 Seconds
287 L2LossTripDelay 1.0 Seconds 416 OPFLagTripLevel -95 % 537 InAMod4C0TripLvl 0
288 L3LossTripDelay 1.0 Seconds 417 OPFLagWarnLevel -90 % 538 InAMod4C0WarnLvl 0
291 Datalink0 0 418 UPFLeadInhibTime 10 Seconds 539 InAnMod4Ch01Type Disable
292 Datalink1 0 419 UPFLeadTripDelay 1.0 Seconds 540 InAMod4Ch1Format Eng Units
293 Datalink2 0 420 UPFLeadTripLevel 90 % 541 InAMod4C1TmpUnit Degrees C
294 Datalink3 0 421 UPFLeadWarnLevel 95 % 542 InAMod4C1FiltFrq 17 Hz
295 Datalink4 0 422 OPFLeadInhibTime 10 Seconds 543 InAMod4C1OpCktSt Upscale
296 Datalink5 0 423 OPFLeadTripDelay 1.0 Seconds 544 InAnMod4Ch1RTDEn 3-Wire
297 Datalink6 0 424 OPFLeadTripLevel 95 % 545 InAMod4C1TripDly 1.0 Seconds
298 Datalink7 0 425 OPFLeadWarnLevel 90 % 546 InAMod4C1TripLvl 0
426 DemandPeriod 15 Min 547 InAMod4C1WarnLvl 0
427 NumberOfPeriods 1 548 InAnMod4Ch02Type Disable
549 InAMod4Ch2Format Eng Units
550 InAMod4C2TmpUnit Degrees C
551 InAMod4C2FiltFrq 17 Hz
552 InAMod4C2OpCktSt Upscale
553 InAnMod4Ch2RTDEn 3-Wire
554 InAMod4C2TripDly 1.0 Seconds
555 InAMod4C2TripLvl 0
556 InAMod4C2WarnLvl 0
557 OutAnMod4Type Disable
558 OutAnMod4Select Ave %FLA
559 OutAnMod4FltActn Zero
560 OutAnMod4dlActn Zero
561 FnlFltValStDur Zero
562 OutPt00FnlFltVal Open
563 OutPt01FnlFltVal Open
564 OutPt02FnlFltVal Open
565 OutDig1FnlFltVal Open
566 OutDig2FnlFltVal Open
567 OutDig3FnlFltVal Open
568 OutDig4FnlFltVal Open
569 NetStrtComFltAct Goto Value
570 NetStrtComFltVal Open
571 NetStrtComIdlAct Goto Value
572 NetStrtComIdlVal Open
573 NetStrtFnlFltVal Open
574 VoltageScale Volts
No. Parameter Name Default
Value
Units No. Parameter Name Default
Value
Units No. Parameter Name Default
Value
Units
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 153
Commands Chapter 6
Clear Command
Clear Command (Parameter 165) allows you to clear historical logs, operating
statistics, and energy data within the nonvolatile memory of the E300 relay.
Table 28 - Clear Command Functions
Function Name Parameter Name Parameter No. Description
Clear Operating Statistics
Operating Time 28
sets related parameters to a value of zero (0) when command is issued
Starts Counter 29
Clear History Logs
Trip History 0 127
sets related parameters to a value of zero (0) when command is issued
Trip History 1 128
Trip History 2 129
Trip History 3 130
Trip History 4 131
Warning History 0 132
Warning History 1 133
Warning History 2 134
Warning History 3 135
Warning History 4 136
Clear % TCU Thermal Capacity Utilized 1 sets related parameters to a value of zero (0) when command is issued
Clear kWh
kWh x 10
9
80
sets related parameters to a value of zero (0) when command is issued
kWh x 10
6
81
kWh x 10
3
82
kWh x 10
0
83
kWh x 10
-3
84
Clear kVARh
kVARh Consumed x 10
9
85
sets related parameters to a value of zero (0) when command is issued
kVARh Consumed x 10
6
86
kVARh Consumed x 10
3
87
kVARh Consumed x 10
0
88
kVARh Consumed x 10
-3
89
kVARh Generated x 10
9
90
kVARh Generated x 10
6
91
kVARh Generated x 10
3
92
kVARh Generated x 10
0
93
kVARh Generated x 10
-3
94
kVARh Net x 10
9
95
kVARh Net x 10
6
96
kVARh Net x 10
3
97
kVARh Net x 10
0
98
kVARh Net x 10
-3
99
Clear kVAh
kVAh x 10
9
100
sets related parameters to a value of zero (0) when command is issued
kVAh x 10
6
101
kVAh x 10
3
102
kVAh x 10
0
103
kVAh x 10
-3
104
Clear Max. kW Demand Max kW Demand 106 sets related parameters to a value of zero (0) when Clear %TCU command is issued
Clear Max kVAR Demand Max kVAR Demand 108 sets related parameters to a value of zero (0) when Clear %TCU command is issued
Clear Max kVA Demand Max kVA Demand 110 sets related parameters to a value of zero (0) when Clear %TCU command is issued
154 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 6 Commands
Clear All
% Thermal Capacity Utilized 1
sets related parameters to a value of zero (0) when command is issued
Operating Time 28
Starts Counter 29
kWh x 10
9
80
kWh x 10
6
81
kWh x 10
3
82
kWh x 10
0
83
kWh x 10
-3
84
kVARh Consumed x 10
9
85
kVARh Consumed x 10
6
86
kVARh Consumed x 10
3
87
kVARh Consumed x 10
0
88
kVARh Consumed x 10
-3
89
kVARh Generated x 10
9
90
kVARh Generated x 10
6
91
kVARh Generated x 10
3
92
kVARh Generated x 10
0
93
kVARh Generated x 10
-3
94
kVARh Net x 10
9
95
kVARh Net x 10
6
96
kVARh Net x 10
3
97
kVARh Net x 10
0
98
kVARh Net x 10
-3
99
kVAh x 10
9
100
kVAh x 10
6
101
kVAh x 10
3
102
kVAh x 10
0
103
kVAh x 10
-3
104
Max kW Demand 106
Max kVAR Demand 108
Max kVA Demand 110
Trip History 0 127
Trip History 1 128
Trip History 2 129
Trip History 3 130
Trip History 4 131
Warning History 0 132
Warning History 1 133
Warning History 2 134
Warning History 3 135
Warning History 4 136
Function Name Parameter Name Parameter No. Description
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 155
Chapter 7
Metering and Diagnostics
This chapter provides detailed information about the metering and diagnostic
information that the E300™ Electronic Overload Relay generates. The metering and
diagnostic functions are organized into seven sections:
• Device Monitor
• Current Monitor
•Voltage Monitor
•Power Monitor
•Energy Monitor
•Trip/Warning History
•Trip Snapshot
Device Monitor
The E300 relay's device monitor diagnostics provides information on the status of the
device, which includes:
• Thermal overload protection
• Trip and warning protection functions
• Digital inputs and relay outputs
• Operator station
• Hardware options
•Time and date
Table 29 - Device Monitor Parameters
Parameter Name Parameter No. Description
Percent Thermal Capacity Utilized
(%TCU)
1
• reports the calculated percent thermal capacity utilization of the motor that is being monitored
• when the percent thermal capacity utilization equals 100%, the E300 relay issues an overload trip
Time to Trip 2
• overload Time to Trip indicates the estimated time remaining before an overload trip occurs when the
measured motor current exceeds the trip rating of the E300 relay
• when the measured current is below the trip rating, the value is reported as 9,999 seconds
Time To Reset 3
• reports the time remaining until the device can be reset after an overload trip
• when the %TCU value falls to or below the Overload Reset Level (Parameter 174), the Overload Time to
Reset value indicates zero until the overload trip is reset
• after an overload trip is reset, the value is reported as 0 seconds
Current Trip Status 4 • reports the status of the current-based protective trip functions
Voltage Trip Status 5 • reports the status of the voltage-based protective trip functions
Power Trip Status 6 • reports the status of the voltage-based protective trip functions
Control Trip Status 7 • reports the status of the control-based protective trip functions
Current Warning Status 10 • reports the status of the current-based protective warning functions
Voltage Warning Status 11 • reports the status of the control-based protective warning functions
Power Warning Status 12 • reports the status of the control-based protective warning functions
Control Warning Status 13 • reports the status of the control-based protective warning functions
Input Status 0 16 • reports the state of the digital inputs on the E300 relay Control Module
156 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 7 Metering and Diagnostics
Input Status 1 17 • reports the state of the digital inputs on the E300 relay Digital Expansion Modules
Output Status 18 • reports the state of the relay outputs on the E300 relay Control Module and Digital Expansion Modules
Operator Station Status 19 • reports the state of the E300 relay Operator Station input buttons and output LEDs
Device Status 0 20
• reports the general status of the E300 relay and the sensing capabilities that are present
• Device Status 0 bit 14, "Ready", is cleared under the following circumstances:
– Device Status 0 bit 0, "Trip Present", is set
– The E300 relay has not completed its power-up initialization
– The processing of data in a configuration assembly is in progress
–A CopyCat function is in progress
– A Factory Defaults command has been invoked and is in progress.
Device Status 1 21
• reports the specific features of the E300 relay Control and Sensing Modules
• reports which Expansion Digital Modules or Analog Modules are present on the E300 relay Expansion
Bus
Firmware Revision Number 22 • reports the firmware revision number of the E300 relay system
Control Module ID 23 • identifies which specific Control Module is present in the E300 relay system
Sensing Module ID 24 • identifies which specific Sensing Module is present in the E300 relay system
Operator Station ID 25 • identifies which specific Operator Station is present on the Expansion Bus of the E300 relay system
Expansion Digital Module ID 26
• identifies which specific Expansion Digital Modules are present on the Expansion Bus of the E300 relay
system
Expansion Analog Module ID 27
• identifies which specific Expansion Analog Modules are present on the Expansion Bus of the E300 relay
system
Operating Time 28
• represents the number of hours that a motor has been running
• you can reset this value can be reset to zero using the Clear Command (Parameter 165) function Clear
Operating Statistics
Starts Counter 29
• represents the number of times a motor has been started
• you can reset this value can be reset to zero using the Clear Command (Parameter 165) function Clear
Operating Statistics
Starts Available 30
• reports the number of starts currently available based on the blocked start settings and the actual
motor starting events
Time to Start 31
• reports the amount of time remaining until a new start can be issued
• if the Time to Start time has elapsed, this parameter reports zero until the next Blocked Start trip occurs
Year 32 • reports the year in the virtual real-time clock of the E300 relay
Month 33 • reports the month in the virtual real-time clock of the E300 relay
Day 34 • reports the day in the virtual real-time clock of the E300 relay
Hour 35 • reports the hour in the virtual real-time clock of the E300 relay
Minute 36 • reports the minute in the virtual real-time clock of the E300 relay
Second 37 • reports the second in the virtual real-time clock of the E300 relay
Invalid Configuration Parameter 38
• reports the parameter number that is causing a configuration trip in the E300 relay
• see Chapter 3
for more information about a configuration fault
Invalid Configuration Cause 39
• reports the reason for the configuration trip in the E300 relay
• see Chapter 3 for more information about a configuration fault
Mismatch Status 40
• reports the module that is causing a mismatch trip or warning in the E300 relay
• see Chapter 3
for more information about a mismatch fault
Parameter Name Parameter No. Description
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 157
Metering and Diagnostics Chapter 7
Current Monitor
The E300 relay current monitor diagnostics provides information on the current
consumed by the load that the E300 relay is monitoring, and it provides diagnostics for
a three-phase current system including imbalance and ground fault current.
Table 30 - Current Monitor Parameters
Voltage Monitor
The E300 relay’s voltage monitor diagnostics provides information on the voltage
being supplied to the load. The voltage diagnostics include three-phase voltage, phase
imbalance, phase rotation, and frequency.
Table 31 - Voltage Monitor Parameters
Parameter Name Parameter No. Description
L1 Current 43
• reports the current in Amperes flowing through the L1 and T1 power terminals of the E300 relay
Sensing Module
L2 Current 44
• reports the current in Amperes flowing through the L2 and T2 power terminals of the E300 relay
Sensing Module
L3 Current 45
• reports the current in Amperes flowing through the L3 and T3 power terminals of the E300 relay
Sensing Module
Average Current 46
• reports the average current of the monitored current
• When single or three phase (Parameter 176) is set to three-phase, average current is calculated as
follows:
– Average Current = (L1 Current + L2 Current + L3 Current) / 3
• When single or three phase (Parameter 176) is set to single phase, average current is calculated as
follows:
– Average Current = (L1 Current + L2 Current) / 2
L1 Percent FLA 47
• reports the L1 current in comparison to the active Full Load Amps programmed in FLA (Parameter 171)
and FLA2 (Parameter 177)
– L1 Percent FLA = L1 Current / Full Load Amp
L2 Percent FLA 48
• reports the L2 current in comparison to the active Full Load Amps programmed in FLA (Parameter 171)
and FLA2 (Parameter 177)
– L2 Percent FLA = L2 Current / Full Load Amps
L3 Percent FLA 49
• reports the L3 current in comparison to the active Full Load Amps programmed in FLA (Parameter 171)
and FLA2 (Parameter 177)
– L3 Percent FLA = L3 Current / Full Load Amps
Average Percent FLA 50
• reports the average current in comparison to the active Full Load Amps programmed in FLA (Parameter
171) and FLA2 (Parameter 177)
– Average Percent FLA = Average Current / Full Load Amps
Ground Fault Current 51
• reports the ground fault current measured by the internal core balanced current transformer of the
E300 relay Sensing Module or external core balanced current transformer
Current Imbalance 52
• reports the percentage of uneven current consumption in the monitored power system
• Current Imbalance is defined by the following equation
– Current Imbalance = 100% * (I
d
/I
a
)
where I
d
= Maximum Line Current Deviation from the Average Current; I
a
= Average Current
Parameter Name Parameter No. Description
L1-L2 Voltage 53
• reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T1 and T2 power terminals of the E300 relay Sensing
Module
L2-L3 Voltage 54
• reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T2 and T3 power terminals of the E300 relay Sensing
Module
L3-L1 Voltage 55
• reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T3 and T1 power terminals of the E300 relay Sensing
Module
Average L-L Voltage 56
• reports the average voltage of the monitored L-L voltages
• when Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to Three Phase, Average L-L Voltage is calculated as
follows:
– Average L-L Voltage = (L1-L2 Voltage + L2-L3 Voltage + L3-L1 Voltage) / 3
• When Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to Single Phase, Average L-L Voltage is calculated as
follows:
– Average L-L Voltage = (L1-L2 Voltage + L2-L3 Voltage) / 2
L1-N Voltage 57 • reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T1 power terminal of the E300 relay Sensing Module
158 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 7 Metering and Diagnostics
Power Monitor
The E300 relay’s power monitor diagnostics provides information on the power being
supplied to the load. The power diagnostics include real power (kW), reactive power
(kVAR), apparent power (kVA), and power factor.
Table 32 - Power Monitor Parameters
L2-N Voltage 58 • reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T2 power terminal of the E300 relay Sensing Module
L3-N Voltage 59 • reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T3 power terminal of the E300 relay Sensing Module
Average L-N Voltage 60
• reports the average voltage of the monitored L-N voltages
• When Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to Three Phase, Average L-N Voltage is calculated as
follows:
– Average L-N Voltage = (L1-N Voltage + L2-N Voltage + L3-N Voltage) / 3
• When Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to Single Phase, Average L-N Voltage is calculated as
follows:
– Average L-N Voltage = (L1-N Voltage + L2-N Voltage) / 2
Voltage Imbalance 61
• reports the percentage of uneven voltage being supplied by the monitored power system
• Voltage Imbalance is defined by the following equation:
– Voltage Imbalance = 100% * (V
d
/V
a
); where V
d
= Maximum L-L Voltage Deviation from the
Average L-L Voltage, V
a
= Average L-L Voltage
Frequency 62
• reports the voltage frequency in Hertz of the monitored power system from the E300 relay Sensing
Module
Phase Rotation 63
• reports the voltage phase rotation as ABC or ACB of the monitored power system from the E300 relay
Sensing Module.
Parameter Name Parameter No. Description
Parameter Name Parameter No. Description
Power Scale 377
• allows the E300 relay to display the values of Parameters 64…75 as Kilowatts or Megawatts
– generally used for large medium voltage-based power systems,
L1 Real Power 64
• reports the real power for line 1 in kW or MW depending on the configuration value for Power Scale
(Parameter 377)
• when Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any Delta base setting, L1 Real Power is set to 0
L2 Real Power 65
• reports the real power for line 2 in kW or MW depending on the configuration value for Power Scale
(Parameter 377)
• when Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any Delta base setting, L2 Real Power is set to 0
L3 Real Power 66
• reports the real power for line 3 in kW or MW depending on the configuration value for Power Scale
(Parameter 377)
• when Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any Delta base setting, L3 Real Power is set to 0
• when Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to Single Phase, L3 Real Power is set to 0
Total Real Power 67
• reports the total real power of the monitored power conductors in kW or MW depending on the
configuration value for Power Scale (Parameter 377)
• when Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to Three Phase, Total Real Power is calculated as
follows:
– Total Real Power = (L1 Real Power + L2 Real Power + L3 Real Power)
• when Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to Single Phase, Total Real Power is calculated as
follows:
– Total Real Power = (L1 Real Power + L2 Real Power)
L1 Reactive Power 68
• reports the reactive power for line 1 in kVAR or MVAR depending on the configuration value for Power
Scale (Parameter 377)
• when Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any Delta base setting, L1 Reactive Power is set to 0
L2 Reactive Power 69
• reports the reactive power for line 2 in kVAR or MVAR depending on the configuration value for Power
Scale (Parameter 377)
• when Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any Delta base setting, L2 Reactive Power is set to 0
L3 Reactive Power 70
• reports the reactive power for line 3 in kVAR or MVAR depending on the configuration value for Power
Scale (Parameter 377)
• when Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any Delta base setting, L3 Reactive Power is set to 0.
• when Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to Single Phase, L3 Reactive Power is set to 0
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 159
Metering and Diagnostics Chapter 7
Energy Monitor
The E300 relay’s energy monitor diagnostics provides information on the electrical
energy the load is consuming. The energy diagnostics include kWh, kVARh, kVAh, kW
Demand, kVAR Demand, and kVA Demand.
Table 33 - Power Monitor Parameters
Total Reactive Power 71
• reports the total Reactive power of the monitored power conductors in kVAR or MVAR depending on
the configuration value for Power Scale (Parameter 377)
• when Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to Three Phase, Total Reactive Power is calculated as
follows:
– Total Reactive Power = (L1 Reactive Power + L2 Reactive Power + L3 Reactive Power)
• when Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to Single Phase, Total Reactive Power is calculated as
follows:
– Total Reactive Power = (L1 Reactive Power + L2 Reactive Power)
L1 Apparent Power 72
• reports the apparent power for line 1 in kVA or MVA depending on the configuration value for Power
Scale (Parameter 377)
• when Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any Delta base setting, L1 Apparent Power is set to 0
L2 Apparent Power 73
• reports the apparent power for line 2 in kVA or MVA depending on the configuration value for Power
Scale (Parameter 377)
• when Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any Delta base setting, L2 Apparent Power is set to 0
L3 Apparent Power 74
• reports the apparent power for line 3 in kVA or MVA depending on the configuration value for Power
Scale (Parameter 377)
• when Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any Delta base setting, L3 Apparent Power is set to 0
• when Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to Single Phase, L3 Apparent Power is set to 0
Total Apparent Power 75
• reports the total apparent power of the monitored power conductors in kVA or MVA depending on the
configuration value for Power Scale (Parameter 377)
• when Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to Three Phase, Total Apparent Power is calculated as
follows:
– Total Apparent Power = (L1 Apparent Power + L2 Apparent Power + L3 Apparent Power)
• when Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to Single Phase, Total Apparent Power is calculated
as follows:
– Total Apparent Power = (L1 Apparent Power + L2 Apparent Power)
L1 Power Factor 76
• reports the power factor for line 1 in percentage
• when Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any Delta base setting, L1 Power Factor is set to 0
L2 Power Factor Power 77
• reports the power factor for line 2 in percentage
• when Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any Delta base setting, L2 Power Factor is set to 0
L3 Power Factor 78
• reports the power factor for line 3 in percentage
• when Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any Delta base setting, L3 Power Factor is set to 0
• when Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to Single Phase, L3 power factor is set to 0
Total Power Factor 79
• reports the total power factor of the monitored power conductors in percentage
• when Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to Three Phase, Total Power Factor is calculated as
follows:
• Total Power Factor = (L1 Power Factor + L2 Power Factor + L3 Power Factor) / 3
• when Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to Single Phase, Total Power Factor is calculated as
follows:
– Total Power Factor = (L1 Power Factor + L2 Power Factor) / 2
Parameter Name Parameter No. Description
Parameter Name Parameter No. Description
kWh 10
9
80
• reports a component of total real energy (kWh)
• multiply this value by 10
9
and add to the other kWh parameters
– represents XXX,000,000,000.000 kWh
kWh 10
6
81
• reports a component of total real energy (kWh)
• multiply this value by 10
6
and add to the other kWh parameters
– represents 000,XXX,000,000.000 kWh
kWh 10
3
82
• reports a component of total real energy (kWh)
• multiply this value by 10
3
and add to the other kWh parameters
– represents 000,000,XXX,000.000 kWh
kWh 10
0
83
• reports a component of total real energy (kWh)
• multiply this value by 10
0
and add to the other kWh parameters
– represents 000,000,000,XXX.000 kWh
160 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 7 Metering and Diagnostics
kWh 10
-3
84
• reports a component of total real energy (kWh)
• multiply this value by 10
-3
and add to the other kWh parameters
– represents 000,000,000,000. XXX kWh
kVARh Consumed 10
9
85
• reports a component of total reactive energy consumed (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10
9
and add to the other kVARh Consumed parameters
– represents XXX,000,000,000.000 kVARh
kVARh Consumed 10
6
86
• reports a component of total reactive energy consumed (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10
6
and add to the other kVARh Consumed parameters
–represents 000,XXX,000,000.000 kVARh
kVARh Consumed 10
3
87
• reports a component of total reactive energy consumed (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10
3
and add to the other kVARh Consumed parameters
– represents 000,000,XXX,000.000 kVARh
kVARh Consumed 10
0
88
• reports a component of total reactive energy consumed (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10
0
and add to the other kVARh Consumed parameters
– represents 000,000,000,XXX.000 kVARh
kVARh Consumed 10
-3
89
• reports a component of total reactive energy consumed (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10
-3
and add to the other kVARh Consumed parameters
– represents 000,000,000,000. XXX kVARh
kVARh Generated 10
9
90
• reports a component of total reactive energy generated (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10
9
and add to the other kVARh Generated parameters
– represents XXX,000,000,000.000 kVARh
kVARh Generated 10
6
91
• reports a component of total reactive energy generated (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10
6
and add to the other kVARh Generated parameters
–represents 000,XXX,000,000.000 kVARh
kVARh Generated 10
3
92
• reports a component of total reactive energy generated (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10
3
and add to the other kVARh Generated parameters
– represents 000,000,XXX,000.000 kVARh
kVARh Generated 10
0
93
• reports a component of total reactive energy generated (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10
0
and add to the other kVARh Generated parameters
– represents 000,000,000,XXX.000 kVARh
kVARh Generated 10
-3
94
• reports a component of total reactive energy generated (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10
-3
and add to the other kVARh Generated parameters
– represents 000,000,000,000. XXX kVARh
kVARh Net 10
9
95
• reports a component of total reactive energy net (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10
9
and add to the other kVARh Net parameters
– represents XXX,000,000,000.000 kVARh
kVARh Net 10
6
96
• reports a component of total reactive energy net (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10
6
and add to the other kVARh Net parameters
–represents 000,XXX,000,000.000 kVARh
kVARh Net 10
3
97
• reports a component of total reactive energy net (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10
3
and add to the other kVARh Net parameters
– represents 000,000,XXX,000.000 kVARh
kVARh Net 10
0
98
• reports a component of total reactive energy net (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10
0
and add to the other kVARh Net parameters
– represents 000,000,000,XXX.000 kVARh
kVARh Net 10
-3
99
• reports a component of total reactive energy net (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10
-3
and add to the other kVARh Net parameters
– represents 000,000,000,000. XXX kVARh
kVAh 10
9
100
• reports a component of total apparent energy (kVAh)
• multiply this value by 10
9
and add to the other kVAh parameters
– represents XXX,000,000,000.000 kVAh
kVAh 10
6
101
• reports a component of total apparent energy (kVAh)
• multiply this value by 10
6
and add to the other kVAh parameters
–represents 000,XXX,000,000.000 kVAh
kVAh 10
3
102
• reports a component of total apparent energy (kVAh)
• multiply this value by 10
3
and add to the other kVAh parameters
– represents 000,000,XXX,000.000 kVAh
kVAh 10
0
103
• reports a component of total apparent energy (kVAh)
• multiply this value by 10
0
and add to the other kVAh parameters
– represents 000,000,000,XXX.000 kVAh
kVAh 10
-3
104
• reports a component of total apparent energy (kVAh)
• multiply this value by 10
-3
and add to the other kVAh parameters
– represents 000,000,000,000. XXX kVAh
Parameter Name Parameter No. Description
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 161
Metering and Diagnostics Chapter 7
Analog Monitor
The E300 relay’s Analog I/O Expansion Modules scan up to three analog signals per
module. This information can be used to monitor the following analog applications:
• Motor winding and bearing temperatures that are measured by RTD sensors
• Liquid, air, or steam flow
• Temperature
•Weight
• Vessel level
• Potentiometer
• PTC or NTC thermistor sensors
Table 34 - Analog Monitor Parameters
Trip / Warning History
The E300 relay provides a trip and warning history in which the last five trips and last
five warnings are recorded into nonvolatile storage. A mask is available to limit which
trip and warning events are logged to the history’s memory.
Trip History Codes
When the E300 relay issues a trip, the reason for the trip is recorded into the Trip
History. Ta ble 35
lists the codes that are available for the trip history records.
kW Demand 105 • reports the average real energy usage in kW over a defined period
Max. kW Demand 106 • reports the maximum kW Demand since the last Max kW Demand Reset command
kVAR Demand 107 • reports the average reactive energy usage in kVAR over a defined period
Max kVAR Demand 108 • reports the maximum kVAR Demand since the last Max kVAR Demand Reset command
kVA Demand 109 • reports the average reactive energy usage in kVA over a defined period
Max kVA Demand 110 • reports the maximum kVA Demand since the last Max kVA Demand Reset command
Parameter Name Parameter No. Description
Parameter Name Parameter No. Description
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00 111 • reports the monitored value of Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01 112 • reports the monitored value of Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02 113 • reports the monitored value of Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02
Analog Module 1 Status 123 • reports the status of Analog Module 1
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00 114 • reports the monitored value of Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01 115 • reports the monitored value of Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02) 116 • reports the monitored value of Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02
Analog Module 2 Status 124 • reports the status of Analog Module 2
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00 117 • reports the monitored value of Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01 118 • reports the monitored value of Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02 119 • reports the monitored value of Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02
Analog Module 3 Status 125 • reports the status of Analog Module 3
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00 120 • reports the monitored value of Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01 121 • reports the monitored value of Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02 122 • reports the monitored value of Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02
Analog Module 4 Status 126 • reports the status of Analog Module 4
162 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 7 Metering and Diagnostics
Table 35 - Trip History Codes
Trip History Code Description
0 No Fault Conditions Detected
1 Motor current overload condition
2 Phase current Loss is detected in one of the motor phases
3 Power conductor or motor winding is shorting to ground
4 Motor has not reached full speed by the end of Stall Enable Time
5 Motor current has exceeded the programmed jam trip level
6 Motor current has fallen below normal operating levels
7 Phase to phase current imbalance detected
8 L1Current was below L1 Undercurrent Level longer than Trip Delay
9 L2Current was below L2 Undercurrent Level longer than Trip Delay
10 L3Current was below L3 Undercurrent Level longer than Trip Delay
11 L1 Current was over L1 Overcurrent Level longer than Trip Delay
12 L2 Current was over L2 Overcurrent Level longer than Trip Delay
13 L3 Current was over L3 Overcurrent Level longer than Trip Delay
14 L1 Current Lost for longer than the L1 Loss Trip Delay
15 L2 Current Lost for longer than the L2 Loss Trip Delay
16 L3 Current Lost for longer than the L3 Loss Trip Delay
17 Line to Line Under-Voltage condition detected
18 Line to Line Over-Voltage condition detected
19 Phase to phase voltage imbalance detected
20 The unit detects the supply voltage phases are rotated
21 Line voltage frequency is below trip level
22 Line voltage frequency has exceeded trip level
25 Sensing Module boot loader failed to load firmware
26 Sensing Module output enable open
27 Sensing Module missing interrupts
28 Sensing Module not calibrated
29 Sensing Module frame type failure
30 Sensing Module flash configuration failure
31 Sensing Module detected an overrun error
32 Sensing Module is not responding
33 Total Real Power (kW) is below trip level
34 Total Real Power (kW) has exceeded trip level
35 Under Total Reactive Power Consumed (+kVAR) condition detected
36 Over Total Reactive Power Consumed (+kVAR) condition detected
37 Under Total Reactive Power Generated (-kVAR) condition detected
38 Over Total Reactive Power Generated (-kVAR) condition detected
39 Total Apparent Power (VA or kVA or MVA) is below trip level
40 Total Apparent Power (VA or kVA or MVA) exceeded trip level
41 Under Total Power Factor Lagging (-PF) condition detected
42 Over Total Power Factor Lagging (-PF) condition detected
43 Under Total Power Factor Leading (+PF) condition detected
44 Over Total Power Factor Leading (+PF) condition detected
49 Test trip caused by holding the Test/Reset button for 2 seconds
50 PTC input indicates that the motor stator windings overheated
51 DeviceLogix defined trip was generated
52 The Stop button the Operator Station was pressed
53 Remote trip command detected
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 163
Metering and Diagnostics Chapter 7
54 Maximum starts per hour exceeded
55 Hardware configuration fault. Check for shorts on input terminal
58 DeviceLogix Feedback Timeout Trip was detected
59 Control Module CAN0 initialization failure
60 Control Module CAN0 bus failure
61 Control Module CAN1 initialization failure
62 Control Module CAN1 bus failure
63 Control Module ADC0 failure
64 Control Module detected too many CRC errors
65 Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 1 exceeded its Trip Level
66 Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 1 exceeded its Trip Level
67 Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 1 exceeded its Trip Level
68 Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 2 exceeded its Trip Level
69 Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 2 exceeded its Trip Level
70 Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 2 exceeded its Trip Level
71 Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 3 exceeded its Trip Level
72 Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 3 exceeded its Trip Level
73 Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 3 exceeded its Trip Level
74 Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 4 exceeded its Trip Level
75 Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 4 exceeded its Trip Level
76 Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 4 exceeded its Trip Level
77 External NVS Chip has detected communication timeout error
78 External NVS Chip has detected a CRC error
79 External NVS Chip has detected data out of range
81 Digital Expansion Module 1 is not operating properly
82 Digital Expansion Module 2 is not operating properly
83 Digital Expansion Module 3 is not operating properly
84 Digital Expansion Module 4 is not operating properly
85 Analog Expansion Module 1 is not operating properly
86 Analog Expansion Module 2 is not operating properly
87 Analog Expansion Module 3 is not operating properly
88 Analog Expansion Module 4 is not operating properly
90 Control Module installed does not match the expected type
91 Sensing Module installed does not match the expected type
92 Comms Module installed does not match the expected type
93 Operator Station installed does not match expected type
94 Digital Module installed does not match the expected type
95 Analog Module installed does not match the expected type
96 Test Mode is engaged and current/voltage was detected
97 Heap memory could not be allocated
98 Vendor ID hardware fault
Trip History Code Description
164 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 7 Metering and Diagnostics
Trip History Parameters
Table 36 - Trip History Parameters
Warning History
When the E300 relay issues a warning, the reason for the warning is recorded into the
Warn i n g Hi s t or y. Ta bl e 37
lists the codes that are available for the warning history
records.
Table 37 - Warning History Codes
Parameter Name Parameter No. Description
Trip History 0 127 • reports the most recent trip event
Trip History 1 128 • reports the second most recent trip event
Trip History 2 129 • reports the third most recent trip event
Trip History 3 130 • reports the fourth most recent trip event
Trip History 4 131 • reports the fifth most recent trip event
Trip History Mask You can decide which trip events are recorded into the E300 relay’s trip history by using the Trip History Masks
Current Trip History Mask 139 • allows you to select which current-based trip events are recorded in the trip history
Voltage Trip History Mask 140 • allows you to select which voltage-based trip events are recorded in the trip history
Power Trip History Mask 141 • allows you to select which power-based trip events are recorded in the trip history
Control Trip History Mask 142 • allows you to select which control-based trip events are recorded in the trip history
Analog Trip History Mask 143 • allows you to select which analog-based trip events are recorded in the trip history
Warning History Code Description
0 No Warning Conditions Detected
1 Approaching a motor current overload condition
3 Power conductor or motor winding is shorting to ground
5 Motor current has exceeded the programmed jam warning level
6 Motor current has fallen below normal operating levels
7 Phase to phase current imbalance detected
8 L1 Current was below L1 Undercurrent Warning Level
9 L2 Current was below L2 Undercurrent Warning Level
10 L3 Current was below L3 Undercurrent Warning Level
11 L1 Current was over L1 Overcurrent Warning Level
12 L2 Current was over L2 Overcurrent Warning Level
13 L3 Current was over L3 Overcurrent Warning Level
14 L1 Current Lost for longer than the L1 Loss Trip Delay
15 L2 Current Lost for longer than the L2 Loss Trip Delay
16 L3 Current Lost for longer than the L3 Loss Trip Delay
17 Line to Line Under-Voltage condition detected
18 Line to Line Over-Voltage condition detected
19 Phase to phase voltage imbalance detected
20 The unit detects the supply voltage phases are rotated
21 Line voltage frequency is below the warning level
22 Line voltage frequency has exceeded warning level
33 Total Real Power (kW) is below warning level
34 Total Real Power (kW) has exceeded warning level
35 Under Reactive Power Consumed (+kVAR) condition detected
36 Over Reactive Power Consumed (+kVAR) condition detected
37 Under Reactive Power Generated (-kVAR) condition detected
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 165
Metering and Diagnostics Chapter 7
38 Over Reactive Power Generated (-kVAR) condition detected
39 Total Apparent Power (kVA) is below warning level
40 Total Apparent Power (kVA) exceeded warning level
41 Under Total Power Factor Lagging (-PF) condition detected
42 Over Total Power Factor Lagging (-PF) condition detected
43 Under Total Power Factor Leading (+PF) condition detected
44 Over Total Power Factor Leading (+PF) condition detected
50 PTC input indicates that the motor stator windings overheated
51 DeviceLogix defined warning was generated
56 Invalid parameter config. See parameters 38-39 for details
58 DeviceLogix Feedback Timeout Trip was detected
60 Number of Starts Warning Level Exceeded
61 Operating Hours Warning Level Exceeded
65 Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 1 exceeded its Warning Level
66 Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 1 exceeded its Warning Level
67 Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 1 exceeded its Warning Level
68 Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 2 exceeded its Warning Level
69 Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 2 exceeded its Warning Level
70 Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 2 exceeded its Warning Level
71 Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 3 exceeded its Warning Level
72 Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 3 exceeded its Warning Level
73 Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 3 exceeded its Warning Level
74 Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 4 exceeded its Warning Level
75 Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 4 exceeded its Warning Level
76 Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 4 exceeded its Warning Level
81 Digital Expansion Module 1 is not operating properly
82 Digital Expansion Module 2 is not operating properly
83 Digital Expansion Module 3 is not operating properly
84 Digital Expansion Module 4 is not operating properly
85 Analog Expansion Module 1 is not operating properly
86 Analog Expansion Module 2 is not operating properly
87 Analog Expansion Module 3 is not operating properly
88 Analog Expansion Module 4 is not operating properly
90 Control Module installed does not match the expected type
91 Sensing Module installed does not match the expected type
92 Comms Module installed does not match the expected type
93 Operator Station installed does not match expected type
94 Digital Module installed does not match the expected type
95 Analog Module installed does not match the expected type
98 A hardware fault condition was detected
Warning History Code Description
166 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 7 Metering and Diagnostics
Warning History Parameters
Table 38 - Warning History Parameters
Trip Snapshot
The trip snapshot populates the seven parameters within it, to offer some insight into
the reason for the trip. This information is available until the unit trips/is tripped
again, at which time it is overwritten. This includes doing a test trip.
Table 39 - Trip Snapshot Parameters
Parameter Name Parameter No. Description
Warning History 0 133 • reports the most recent warning event
Warning History 1 134 • reports the second most recent warning event
Warning History 2 135 • reports the third most recent warning event
Warning History 3 136 • reports the fourth most recent warning event
Warning History 4 137 • reports the fifth most recent warning event
Warning History Mask You can decide which warning events are recorded into the E300 relay’s warning history by using the Warning History Masks
Current Warning History Mask 145 • allows you to select which current-based warning events are recorded in the warning history
Voltage Warning History Mask 146 • allows you to select which voltage-based warning events are recorded in the warning history
Power Warning History Mask 147 • allows you to select which power-based warning events are recorded in the warning history
Control Warning History Mask 148 • allows you to select which control-based warning events are recorded in the warning history
Analog Warning History Mask 149 • allows you to select which control-based warning events are recorded in the warning history
Parameter Name Parameter No. Description
Trip Snapshot L1-L2 Voltage 156
• reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T1 and T2 power terminals of the E300 relay Sensing Module at the time of
the most recent trip event
Trip Snapshot L2-L3 Voltage 157
• reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T2 and T3 power terminals of the E300 relay Sensing Module at the time of
the most recent trip event
Trip Snapshot L3-L1 Voltage 158
• reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T3 and T1 power terminals of the E300 relay Sensing Module at the time of
the most recent trip event
Trip Snapshot Total Real Power 159 • reports the total real power of the monitored power conductors in kW at the time of the most recent trip event
Trip Snapshot Total Reactive Power 160 • reports the total Reactive power of the monitored power conductors in kVAR at the time of the most recent trip event
Trip Snapshot Total Apparent Power 161 • reports the total apparent power of the monitored power conductors in kVA at the time of the most recent trip event
Trip Snapshot Total Power Factor 162 • reports the total power factor of the monitored power conductors in percentage at the time of the most recent trip event
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 167
Chapter 8
DeviceLogix™ Functionality
The E300™ Electronic Overload Relay with firmware v5.000 and higher supports
DeviceLogix functionality, which is a logic engine that resides within the E300 relay.
You can select one of the preprogrammed DeviceLogix programs (see Operating
Modes on page 53) embedded in the E300 relay, or you can create a custom program in
function block or ladder logic. You can use the E300 Add-on Profile in Studio 5000
software or RSNetWorx™ for DeviceNet™ software to program the device.
Output Relay Overrides
You can use DeviceLogix functionality to provide specific output relay performance
under specific communication or network conditions. You can use the following
parameters to allow a DeviceLogix program to override the E300 output relay
configuration states controlled by the Communication Fault Modes and
Communication Idle Modes (see Output Relay Configuration States
on page 36).
Table 40 - Output Relay Override Parameters
IMPORTANT
A DeviceLogix program only runs if the logic has been enabled, which can be done
with E300 Add-on Profile in Studio 5000, RSNetWorx for DeviceNet, Connected
Component Workbench software, or the DeviceNet Configuration Terminal
(Cat. No. 193-DNCT).
Parameter Name Parameter No. Description
Communication Fault & Idle
Override
346
• defines whether or not DeviceLogix functionality controls the E300 output relays when either a communication fault
(missing I/O connection) or communication idle (network scanner or programmable logic controller is not in Run mode)
condition exists
– If DeviceLogix functionality is enabled but Communication Fault & Idle Override is disabled, the operation of the E300
output relays is controlled by the Communication Fault Mode and Communication Idle Mode parameters if a
communication fault or communication idle condition occurs.
– If DeviceLogix functionality and Communication Fault & Idle Override are both enabled, the E300 outputs relays are
controlled by the DeviceLogix program regardless of the Communication Fault Mode or Communication Idle Mode.
– If DeviceLogix functionality is not enabled, the E300 output relays are controlled by the Communication Fault Mode or
Communication Idle Mode parameters if a communication fault or communication idle condition occurs – regardless
of the override configuration of the Communication Fault & Idle Override parameter.
– If DeviceLogix functionality is transitioned from enable to disable, the E300 output relays immediately go to the
appropriate Communication Fault Mode or Communication Idle Mode.
Network Fault Override 347
• defines whether or not DeviceLogix functionality controls the E300 output relays when either a duplicate node address is
detected or a network bus off condition exists
– If DeviceLogix functionality is enabled but Network Fault is disabled, the operation of the E300 output relays is
controlled by the Communication Fault Mode parameters if a network fault condition occurs.
– If DeviceLogix functionality and Network Fault are both enabled, the E300 outputs relays are controlled by the
DeviceLogix program regardless of the Communication Fault Mode.
– If DeviceLogix functionality is not enabled, the E300 output relays are controlled by the Communication Fault Mode
parameters if a network fault condition occurs – regardless of the Network Fault Override configuration.
– If DeviceLogix functionality is transitioned from enable to disable, the E300 output relays immediately go to the
appropriate Communication Fault Mode.
168 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 8 DeviceLogix™ Functionality
DeviceLogix Programming
DeviceLogix functionality has many applications and the implementation is only
limited to the imagination of the programmer. Remember that the application of
DeviceLogix functionality is only designed to handle simple logic routines. Program
DeviceLogix functionality by using simple Boolean math operators (such as AND,
OR, NOT), timers, counters, and latches. Decision making is made by combining
these Boolean operations with any of the available I/O. The inputs and outputs used to
interface with the logic can come from the network or from the E300 digital inputs
and output relays. There are many reasons to use the DeviceLogix functionality, but
some of the most common are listed below:
• Increased system reliability
• Improved diagnostics and reduced troubleshooting
• Operation independent of PLC or Network status
• Continue to run process in the event of network interruptions
• Critical operations can be safely shut down through local logic
See publication RA-UM003
for more information about the capabilities of
DeviceLogix functionality and how to use the DeviceLogix program editor
(1)
(1) DeviceLogix programs have a maximum limit of 100 instructions.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 169
Chapter 9
EtherNet/IP Communication
This chapter provides the necessary instructions to successfully connect the E300™
Electronic Overload Relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module (Catalog Number
193-ECM-ETR) to an Ethernet network and configure it to communicate to an
EtherNet/IP scanner such as an Allen-Bradley Logix controller.
Network Design
The E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module has dual Ethernet ports that
function as an Ethernet switch with RJ45 ports to connect Ethernet cable CAT5 type
or better to. Rockwell Automation offers a wide variety of Allen-Bradley Ethernet
patch cables with its Bulletin 1585 line of Ethernet cables (http://
ab.rockwellautomation.com/Connection-Devices/RJ45-Network-Media).
The E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module supports a Star, Linear, and
Ring Ethernet topology. Figure 79
shows an example of a Star Ethernet Topology, in
which all Ethernet nodes wire back to a central Ethernet switch, hub, or router.
Figure 79 - Star Ethernet Topology
Rockwell Automation also offers a line of managed and unmanaged
Allen-Bradley Ethernet Switches with its Stratix family of Ethernet switches. See http:/
/ab.rockwellautomation.com/Networks-and-Communication/Ethernet-IP-
Infrastructure for more information.
The E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module also supports an Ethernet Ring
topology in which all Ethernet nodes are wired in series with one another until a
170 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 9 EtherNet/IP Communication
complete network ring is made as shown in Figure 80. The E300 relay EtherNet/IP
Communication Module supports Rockwell Automation's Device Level Ring (DLR)
topology as a slave device in which the EtherNet/IP network continues to
communicate if one of the network chains is disrupted.
Figure 80 - Ring Ethernet Topology
For information on Ethernet basics, including the following features, see Ethernet
Design Considerations Reference Manual, publication ENET-RM002
.
• Set network parameters
• DNS addressing
• Duplicate IP address detection
Set the IP Address
The E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module ships with DHCP enabled. You
can set the network Internet Protocol (IP) address by using:
• The EtherNet/IP node address selection switches
• A Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP)/Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP) server (for example, the Rockwell Automation BOOTP-DHCP
Server Utility, which is included with Rockwell Software's RSLinx Classic
software)
• A web browser and MAC scanner software
EtherNet/IP Node Address Selection Switches
The E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module comes with three node address
selection switches that allow you to select the last octet for the IP address
192.168.1.xxx.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 171
EtherNet/IP Communication Chapter 9
Figure 81 - E300 Relay Node Addressing
When the node address selection switches are set to a value greater than 255 (excluding
888), the IP address is set to DHCP Enabled or programmed for a static IP address.A
power cycle is required for any selection changes to take effect.
Assign Network Parameters via the BOOTP/ DHCP Utility
By default, the E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module is DHCP Enabled.
The BOOTP/DHCP utility is a standalone program that is located in the
BOOTPDHCP Server folder accessed from the Start menu.
This utility recognizes DHCP-enabled devices and provides an interface to configure a
static IP address for each device. To assign network parameters via the BOOTP/
DHCP utility, perform this procedure:
1. Execute the BOOTP/DHCP software.
2. Choose Tool >Network Settings.
Node Address Function
001 - 254 Set IP Address to 192.168.1.xxx
255 - 887
889 - 999
Set IP Address via DHCP or use static IP Address
888 Reset to factory defaults
000 Administration mode
EXAMPLE
When the left dial is set to 1, the middle dial is set to 2, and the right dial is set to 3,
the resulting IP address is: 192.168.1.123.
IMPORTANT
Before starting the BOOTP/DHCP utility, make sure you have the hardware MAC ID of
the module, which is printed on the front of the E300 relay EtherNet/IP
Communication Module. The MAC ID has a format similar to: 00-0b-db-14-55-35.
x100
8
0
2
46
x10
8
0
2
46
x1
8
0
2
46
Network Information
-MAC ID
-Serial Number
-Firmware Revision
Node Address
172 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 9 EtherNet/IP Communication
3. If appropriate for the network, type the subnet mask, gateway address, primary/
secondary server addresses, and domain name in their respective fields.
4. Click OK.
The Request History panel displays the hardware addresses of modules issuing
BOOTP or DHCP requests.
5. Double-click the MAC address of the module to be configured.
NOTE: The MAC address is printed underneath the sliding front cover of the E300
relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module. The format of the hardware address
resembles: 00-0b-db-14-55-35
The New Entry window appears with the module's Ethernet Address (MAC).
6. Type the IP address, host name, and a module description.
7. Click OK.
8. Cycle power to the E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module.
9. To permanently assign this configuration to the module: Select the module in
the Relation List panel and click Disable BOOTP/DHCP.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 173
EtherNet/IP Communication Chapter 9
When module power is cycled, it uses the assigned configuration and does not issue a
DHCP request.
If you do not click Disable BOOTP/DHCP, on a power cycle, the module clears the
current IP configuration and again begins sending DHCP requests.
Assign Network Parameters Via a Web Browser and MAC Scanner
Software
If you do not have access to a DHCP software utility, you can assign network
parameters via a web browser (for example, Microsoft® Internet Explorer) and Media
Access Control (MAC) scanner software (for example, MAC Scanner from Colasoft® -
http://www.colasoft.com/). Follow these steps to configure the module using this
method.
1. Locate and identify the MAC ID printed on the label of the E300 relay
EtherNet/IP Communication Module. This address has a format that is similar
to: 00-0b-db-14-55-35
2. Connect the E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module to the same
wide area network (WAN) as your personal computer.
3. Initiate the MAC scanner software.
4. Select the appropriate subnet to scan for available MAC addresses.
5. Scan the Subnet for all available MAC addresses
.
6. Identify the IP address assigned to the MAC ID of the E300 relay EtherNet/IP
Communication Module. The IP address has a format that is similar to
192.168.0.100.
Web Server
As a security precaution, the embedded web server of the E300 relay EtherNet/IP
Communication Module is disabled by default. To temporarily enable the web server
or to make it permanently available, you must enter into Administration Mode. To do
this, set the rotary dials that are located underneath the front cover of the E300 relay
EtherNet/IP Communication Module to 000 and cycle power. The device then goes
online with the IP Address used at the time of the previous startup.
Web Server Security and System Password
The E300 EtherNet/IP Communication Module’s web server allows you to view any
diagnostic and parameter information. Security measures are built into the web server
to deter a malicious user from making any unwanted EtherNet/IP system changes and
E300 configuration parameter edits. When you attempt to make an EtherNet/IP
174 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 9 EtherNet/IP Communication
system change or E300 configuration parameter edit, you are prompted to enter a user
name and password.
You can find the module serial number on the label of the EtherNet/IP
communication module.
We recommend that you change the password for user name Administrator. you can
change the password on the password configuration web page.
Reset the System Password
If you forget or misplace the password for user name Administrator, you can restore
the password to the factory default value by turning the rotary dials on the E300
EtherNet/IP Communication Module to 8-8-8 and cycling power. This resets all
EtherNet/IP communication settings and E300 configuration parameters back to the
factory default values.
Permanently Enable the Web Server
In Administrative Mode, you can change any configuration parameter of the E300
relay, including permanently enabling the embedded web server, by following these
steps:
1. Enter Administrative Mode by turning the rotary dials to 000 and cycle power
on the E300 relay.
2. Access the web page.
3. Navigate to Administrative Settings->Network Configuration.
4. You are prompted for a user name and password. Enter "Administrator" for the
user name, and enter the appropriate password.
Field Firmware Revision 1.003 and Earlier
Default (case sensitive)
Firmware Revision 1.004 and Later
Default (case sensitive)
User name Administrator Administrator
Password <blank> <serial number of EtherNet/IP communication module>
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 175
EtherNet/IP Communication Chapter 9
5. Enable the Web Server Control and press Apply Changes.
View and Configure
Parameters via the Web
Server
The web server in the E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module, when
enabled, can view and configure parameters for the E300 relay. You can use the web
interface to edit parameters for E300 relay if it is not being scanned by an EtherNet/IP
scanner.
View Parameters
Follow the steps below to view parameters using the web interface of the E300 relay
EtherNet/IP Communication Module.
1. Using a web browser, open the web page of the E300 relay EtherNet/IP
Communication Module by typing its IP address for the URL.
176 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 9 EtherNet/IP Communication
2. Navigate to the Parameters folder and select a parameter group. The example
below shows the information from the Current Monitoring parameters.
3. To increase the update rate of the data being viewed, enter a faster update time
in the refresh rate box shown below:
4. E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module web page displays up to 17
parameters per web page. If more than 17 parameters exist for a parameter
group, use the navigation arrows to display the other parameters.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 177
EtherNet/IP Communication Chapter 9
Edit Parameters
Follow the steps below to edit configuration parameters using the web interface of the
E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module.
1. Select a parameter group that contains programmable parameters, then click
the Edit button. The value options appears.
2. Click the down arrow on the pull-down boxes to adjust fixed values and/or
enter numerical values in the fields without an arrow to adjust the values.
3. Click Apply once all parameter edits have been completed. The E300 relay
EtherNet/IP Communication Module downloads the new parameter values to
the device.
4. A confirmation window appears. Press OK.
NOTE: If you attempt to edit a configuration parameter when a Class 1 EtherNet/IP
connection exists between an EtherNet/IP scanner and the E300 relay EtherNet/IP
Communication Module, a message similar to the one shown below appears when the
Apply button is pressed.
178 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 9 EtherNet/IP Communication
Back up/Restore Parameters
With an E300 Series B Control Module and v7.xxx firmware installed, you have the
option to back up or restore the device configuration parameters through the E300
web server interface. (Note: the backup/restore feature does not include any
administrative parameters or DeviceLogix programming). To use this feature, perform
the following steps:
1. Navigate to the target E300 device web server and select the Backup/Restore
option along the left-hand menu.
2. To back up the current E300 parameter configuration: select Backup. The
Backup process completes in a few seconds and the web server then prompts
you to save the corresponding *.JSON configuration file.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 179
EtherNet/IP Communication Chapter 9
3. To restore a previous E300 parameter configuration: Browse to a valid E300
parameter configuration *.JSON file. Select Restore. The restoration process
completes in a few seconds.
Integration with Logix-based
Controllers
The E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module supports two types of
EtherNet/IP communication.
• I/O data - Used for deterministic, data control with Logix-based controllers. I/
O tags are automatically assigned when you configure the E300 relay in a Logix
project. The E300 relay also supports Automatic Device Configuration, in
which the Logix-based controller manages device configuration parameters.
• Message (MSG) instructions - Used for non-deterministic data that is not
critical for control. Use MSG instructions read and write data and have a lower
priority than I/O data. For information on MSG instructions, see Logix5000
Controllers Messages Programming Manual, 1756-PM012.
Configure an E300 Relay in a Logix Project
Use the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application to configure an E300 relay in a Logix
project. Download and install the Add-on Profile. Download firmware, associated files
(such as AOP, DTM, and EDS), and access product release notes from only the
Product Compatibility and Download Center at http://
www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/support/pcdc.page
1. Go Online with the controller.
180 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 9 EtherNet/IP Communication
2. Right click on the Ethernet tree and select either Discover Modules or New
Module.
If the upload is successful, a display appears indicating the success of this command.
Press OK to continue.
If the upload is not successful due to communication errors, a display appears
indicating that there was an upload error and the device uses default settings. Click OK
to continue. Identify and fix the reason for the communication error and press Upload
again, or press Cancel to remove any module definition changes.
If the upload is not successful due to an E300 configuration trip, a display appears
indicating that the profile is using its existing settings. Click OK to continue. Read
parameters 38 and 39 from the E300 relay to determine the reason for the
configuration trip. Fix the issue and press Upload again, or press Cancel to remove any
module definition changes.
Access I/O Data
To access the data provided by the E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module,
navigate to the input tags.
Option Description
Discover Modules
Module discovery identifies the available devices on the specific EtherNet/IP network.
1. Select the preconfigured E300 relay that is on the EtherNet/IP network
2. Click Create
3. Upload the configuration data
New Module
New module lets you manually add a E300 relay offline to a Logix project.
1. Search for an E300 relay
2. Click Create
3. Enter a name for the E300 relay
4. Upload the configuration data
5. Select the preconfigured E300 relay that is on the EtherNet/IP network
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 181
EtherNet/IP Communication Chapter 9
To control the output relays or issue a remote reset command to the E300 relay,
navigate to the output tags.
E-mail/Text
The E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module can send e-mail messages and
text notifications for different trip and warning events using a Simple Mail Transfer
Protocol (SMTP) server.
The subject and body contents in the e-mail message is created from the:
• Type of trip or warning that is detected
•Device name
• Device description
• Device location
• Contact information
182 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 9 EtherNet/IP Communication
The first word in the e-mail subject is the device name. If a device name is not
configured, then the product name attribute from the identity object is used.
E-mail Configuration
To be able to send an e-mail, you must configure the IP address of the host name of a
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) server and select notifications. Follow these
steps to configure an e-mail notification.
1. In the web browser, enter the IP address of the E300 relay EtherNet/IP
Communication Module URL of the web browser.
2. Select Administrative Settings>Device Identity
3. Type the Device Identity information into the fields as described below and
press Apply.
EXAMPLE
E-mail Subject:
E300 Overload Relay has detected a fault
E-mail Body:
Fault Status:
Device Name: E300 Overload Relay
Device Description: Motor Starters
Device Location: Bay 6-U29
Contact Info: Contact Person contactperson@thecontact.com
Device Name The name of the E300 relay.
Device Description The description of the E300 relay.
Device Location The location of the E300 relay.
Contact Information The contact information for the E300 relay.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 183
EtherNet/IP Communication Chapter 9
4. Select Administrative Settings>E-Mail Configuration
5. Type the information into the e-mail notification fields as stated below.
Multiple e-mail addresses can be entered into the E-mail Recipient field by
separating each e-mail address with a semicolon (;). The E-mail Recipient field
is limited to 255 characters.
6. Check the desired notification time, fault conditions, and local conditions to be
included in notification e-mails to the recipient. You can change these after the
initial configurations.
7. Click Apply to accept the configuration
8. When an E300 relay event occurs, the e-mail message looks like the following:
E-mail Recipient The e-mail address of the person who receives the notifications.
E-Mail Sender The e-mail address from which the notification is sent.
SMTP Server Consult with the network administrator for the SMTP server address.
SMTP Username Consult with the network administrator for the SMTP username.
SMTP Password Consult with the network administrator for the SMTP password.
SMTP Port Consult with the network administrator which SMTP port number to
use. Port 25 is the most common SMTP port.
184 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 9 EtherNet/IP Communication
Text Notifications
The E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module can send a text message to a
wireless phone by e-mailing the wireless phone's service provider. The format for the
text message is provided by the service provider and looks similar to the example
formats below.
• AT&T™: 10-digit wireless phone nu[email protected]
• Sprint®: 10-digit wireless phone number@messaging.sprint.pcs.com
Limitations
Based on the functionality of the E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module,
there are some limitations on when the e-mails can be triggered.
• If two events occur at the same time, an e-mail is only sent for the most
significant error.
• If the device has been configured to send an e-mail for a lower prioritized event
and this event occurs at the same time as a higher prioritized event for which
the device has not been programmed to send an e-mail, an e-mail is not sent for
either event.
• The Clear e-mail is only sent when all events have been cleared and an event e-
mail has previously been sent.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 185
EtherNet/IP Communication Chapter 9
Notes:
186 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 9 EtherNet/IP Communication
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 187
Chapter 10
DeviceNet Communication
This chapter provides the necessary instructions to connect the E300 Electronic
Overload Relay DeviceNet Communication Module (Catalog Number
193-ECM-DNT) to a DeviceNet network and configure it to communicate to a
DeviceNet master node such as an Allen-Bradley® 1756-DNB module.
The following recommendations are intended to deliver smooth startup and operation.
• Use the node commissioning tool in RSNetWorx™ when you modify the E300
Overload Relay node address.
• Verify that you have the most current configuration information before you
save a RSNetWorx configuration file.
• If you intend to use the automatic device recovery (ADR) function of the
DeviceNet scanner, verify that the device configuration is correct before saving
it to memory.
• The “Restore Device Defaults” button in RSNetWorx resets the E300 Overload
Relay node address setting to 63.
DeviceNet Node
Commissioning
E300 Overload Relays are shipped with a default hardware node address (MAC ID)
setting of 9-9 (node address 63) and the data rate set to Autobaud. Each device on a
DeviceNet network must have a unique node address, which can be set to a value from
0 to 63. Most DeviceNet systems use address 0 for the master device (Scanner). Leave
node address 63 vacant for introduction of new slave devices. You can change the node
address and data rate for E300 Overload Relays by using software or by setting the
hardware switches that are on the front of each unit. While both methods yield the
same result, it is a good practice to choose one method and use it consistently
throughout the system.
188 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 10 DeviceNet Communication
Setting the Hardware Switches
Figure 82 - E300 Overload Relay DeviceNet Node Addressing
For example, when the left dial is set to 0 and the right dial is set to 1, the resulting
DeviceNet node address is: 01.
For node address switch values in the range of 0 to 63, cycle power to the E300
Overload Relay to initialize the new setting.
Using RSNetWorx for DeviceNet
Follow these additional steps for node address switch settings in the range of 64…76
and 78…98. To begin the configuration of an E300 Overload Relay using software,
execute the RSNetWorx software and complete the following procedure. You must use
RSNetWorx for DeviceNet Revision 27.00.00 or later.
Recognizing the E300 Overload Relay Online
1. Launch the RSNetWorx software, then select Online from the Network pull-
down menu.
2. Select the appropriate DeviceNet personal computer interface, then click OK.
3. If the RSNetWorx software gives notification to upload or download devices
before viewing configuration, click OK to upload or download these devices.
4. RSNetWorx now browses the network and displays all nodes it has detected on
the network. For some versions of RSNetWorx software, the E300 Overload
Relay EDS files may not be included. In this event, the device is identified as an
“Unrecognized Device”.
x10 x1
Network Information
-Serial Number
-Firmware Revision
Node Address
Node Address Function Node Address Function
00…63 Set node address to xx 88 Reset to factory defaults
64…76
78…98
Software sets node address 77 Administration mode
TIP
You must configure the E300 DeviceNet drivers using RSLinx before they available to
RSNetWorx
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 189
DeviceNet Communication Chapter 10
If the screen appears as shown, continue with Building and Registering an EDS
File.
5. If RSNetWorx software recognizes the device as an E300 Overload Relay (or
E3/E3 Plus in emulation mode), skip ahead to the following section – Using the
Node Commissioning Tool of RSNetWorx for DeviceNet.
You can also commission a node by using the DeviceNet Configuration
Terminal, Cat. No. 193-DNCT.
Building and Registering an EDS File
NOTE: If you are using DeviceLogix functionality, you must download the EDS file
from https://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/support/networks/eds.page?
Perform the following steps to build and register the EDS file.
1. Right-click the Unrecognized Device icon. The Register Device menu appears.
2. Select Yes. The EDS Wizard appears.
3. Select Next, then Create an EDS File.
4. Select Next.
5. Select Upload EDS.
6. Select Next. The EDS Wizard screen appears:
7. (Optional) Type a value in the Catalog and File Description Text fields, then
select Next.
190 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 10 DeviceNet Communication
8. On the input/output screen in the EDS Wizard, select the Polled checkbox,
then enter a value of 8 for Input and 1 for Output.
9. Select Next. RSNetWorx uploads the EDS file from the E300 Overload Relay.
10. Select Next to display the icon options for the node.
11. Select the E300 Overload Relay icon, then click Change Icon.
12. Select OK after selecting the desired icon.
13. Select Next.
14. Select Next when you are prompted to register this device.
15. Select Finish.
After a short time, the RSNetWorx software updates the online screen by replacing the
Unrecognized Device with the name and icon given by the EDS file that you have
registered.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 191
DeviceNet Communication Chapter 10
Using the Node Commissioning Tool of RSNetWorx for DeviceNet
1. Select Node Commissioning from the Tools pull-down menu.
2. Select Browse.
3. Select the E300 Overload Relay that is located at node 01.
4. Select OK.
The Node Commissioning screen shows Current Device Settings entries that
are completed. It also provides the current network baud in the New E300
Overload Relay Settings area. Do not change the baud setting unless you are
sure it must be changed.
5. Type the node address that you want in the New Device Settings section. In this
example, the new node address is 01.
6. Select Apply.
When the new node address is successfully applied, the Current Device Settings
section of the window updates. If an error occurs, check to see if the device is
properly powered up and connected to the DeviceNet network.
7. Select Close to close the Node Commissioning window.
192 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 10 DeviceNet Communication
8. Select Single Pass Browse from the Network pull-down menu to update the
RSNetWorx software and verify that the node address is set correctly.
Produced and Consumed Assembly Configurations
The Input and Output Assembly format for the E300 Overload Relay is identified by
the value in Output Assembly, Parameter 289, and Input Assembly, Parameter 290.
These values determine the amount and arrangement of the information
communicated to the master scanner.
Selection of Input and Output Assemblies (Produced and Consumed Assemblies)
defines the format of I/O message data that is exchanged between the E300 Overload
Relay and other devices on the DeviceNet network. The consumed information is used
to command the state of the slave device outputs. Produced information typically
contains the state of the inputs and current fault status of the slave device.
The default Consumed and Produced Assemblies are shown in Ta ble 41
through
Tab le 44
. For additional formats, refer to Appendix C.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 193
DeviceNet Communication Chapter 10
Table 41 - DeviceNet Input Assembly Instance 131
Table 42 - DeviceNet Input Assembly Instance 131 Attributes
Instance 131—Basic Overload
Member Size Param
INTDINT15 14131211109876543210
0
0
Device Status 0 0 16 20
1 Device Status 1 1 16 21
2
1
Input Status 0 2 16 16
3 Input Status 1 3 16 17
4
2
Output Status 4 16 18
5 OpStation Status 5 16 19
6
3
Reserved % Thermal Utilized 6 8 1
7 Average % FLA 7 16 50
8
4 Average Current 8 32 46
9
Attribute ID Access Rule Member Index Name Data Type Value
1 Get — Number of Members in Member List UINT 10
Get — Member List Array of STRUCT —
Get 0
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 14 00
Get 1
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 15 00
Get 2
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 10 00
Get 3
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 11 00
Get 4
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 12 00
Get 5
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 13 00
Get 6
Member Data Description UINT 8
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 01 00
Get 7
Member Data Description UINT 8
Member Path Size UINT 0
Member Path Packed EPATH —
Get 8
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 32 00
Get 9
Member Data Description UINT 32
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 2E 00
3 Get — Data UINT See data format above
4Get —Size UINT 20
100 Get — Name SHORT_STRING “Basic Overload”
194 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 10 DeviceNet Communication
Table 43 - DeviceNet Output Assembly Instance 144
Instance 131—Default Consumed Assembly
Member Size Path
INTDINT1514131211109876543210
0
0
Output Status 0 0 16 Param 18
1
NetworkStart 1 X 1 — Symbolic
NetworkStart2 X 2 — Symbolic
TripReset X 3 — Symbolic
EmergencyStop X 4 — Symbolic
RemoteTrip X 5 — Symbolic
Reserved XXX 6 ——
X HMILED1Green 7 — Symbolic
X HMILED2Green 8 — Symbolic
X HMILED3Green 9 — Symbolic
X HMILED3Red 10 — Symbolic
X HMILED4Red 11 — Symbolic
XXX Reserved 12 ——
2
1
PtDeviceIns 13
16
Symbolic
3 AnDeviceIns 14 Symbolic
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 195
DeviceNet Communication Chapter 10
Table 44 - DeviceNet Output Assembly Instance 144 Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Member Index Name Data Type Value
1 Get — Number of Members in Member List UINT 15
Get — Member List Array of STRUCT —
Get 0
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 20 0F 00 25 12 00
Get 1
Member Data Description UINT 1
Member Path Size UINT 14
Member Path Packed EPATH 6DH & “NetworkStart1”
Get 2
Member Data Description UINT 1
Member Path Size UINT 14
Member Path Packed EPATH 6DH & “NetworkStart2”
Get 3
Member Data Description UINT 1
Member Path Size UINT 10
Member Path Packed EPATH 69H & “TripReset”
Get 4
Member Data Description UINT 1
Member Path Size UINT 14
Member Path Packed EPATH 6DH & “EmergencyStop”
Get 5
Member Data Description UINT 1
Member Path Size UINT 11
Member Path Packed EPATH 6AH & “RemoteTrip”
Get 6
Member Data Description UINT 3
Member Path Size UINT 0
Member Path Packed EPATH —
Get 7
Member Data Description UINT 1
Member Path Size UINT 13
Member Path Packed EPATH 6CH & “HMILED1Green”
Get 8
Member Data Description UINT 1
Member Path Size UINT 13
Member Path Packed EPATH 6CH & “HMILED2Green”
Get 9
Member Data Description UINT 1
Member Path Size UINT 13
Member Path Packed EPATH 6CH & “HMILED3Green”
Get 10
Member Data Description UINT 1
Member Path Size UINT 11
Member Path Packed EPATH 6AH & “HMILED3Red”
Get 11
Member Data Description UINT 1
Member Path Size UINT 11
Member Path Packed EPATH 6AH & “HMILED4Red”
Get 12
Member Data Description UINT 3
Member Path Size UINT 0
Member Path Packed EPATH —
Get 13
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 12
Member Path Packed EPATH 6BH & “PtDeviceIns”
Get 14
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 12
Member Path Packed EPATH 6BH & “AnDeviceIns”
3 Get — Data UINT See data format above
4Get —Size UINT 8
100 Get — Name SHORT_STRING “E300 Consumed”
196 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 10 DeviceNet Communication
Choose the size and format of the I/O data that is exchanged by the E300 Overload
Relay by selecting Input and Output Assembly Instance numbers. Each assembly has a
given size (in bytes). This instance number is written to the Input Assembly and
Output Assembly parameters. The different instances/formats allow user
programming flexibility and network optimization.
Mapping the Scanner to the Scan List
The Automap feature that is available in all Rockwell Automation scanners
automatically maps the information. If you are not using the default I/O assemblies,
you must change the values in the scan list.
To change the values, right-click on the E300 device and select Properties. Once the
configuration window opens, navigate to the I/O Data tab to view the present device
configuration.
Commissioning the
Protection Functions
This section describes the use of RSNetWorx for DeviceNet to configure the function
settings of the E300 Overload Relay. The product should now be configured and
communicating on the DeviceNet network. The last step is to program the overload
setup parameters 171…177 according to the desired application requirements. You can
do this by using software such as RSNetWorx for DeviceNet, another hand-held
DeviceNet tool, or the E300 Diagnostic Station.
1. Using the RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software, right-click on the E300 device
and select properties. Navigate to the Parameters tab to view the present device
configuration. You can view the parameters as a linear list or grouped according
to their respective functions.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 197
DeviceNet Communication Chapter 10
You can change editable parameters by selecting them and altering the value
that is needed, based on the motor overload application.
2. Once you have programmed all necessary parameters, use the appropriate radio
button to download the configuration to the E300 device. See page 9
for
information about the complete parameter spreadsheet that is attached to this
PDF, which contains a description of each programmable parameter and its
intended function.
DeviceLogix Interface in
RSNetWorx for DeviceNet
The DeviceLogix interface can be accessed from RSNetWorx. Right-click on the target
E300 device and select properties. Navigate to the DeviceLogix tab to being using
DeviceLogix. For additional details specific to DeviceLogix, DeviceLogix™
Functionality on page 167.
E3/E3 Plus Overload Emulation Mode
The E300 Overload Relay used with the Series B Control Module supports an E3
Plus™ overload relay emulation mode when it is attached to a DeviceNet
communication module. This lets you reuse configuration parameters from the E3 Plus
overload relay when you use configuration tools like ADR, the DeviceNet
Configuration Terminal (193-DNCT), and RSNetWorx for DeviceNet.
198 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 10 DeviceNet Communication
To configure an E300 Overload Relay to operate in E3 Plus emulation mode, using
RSNetWorx for DeviceNet, perform the following steps:
1. Right-click on the target E300 device and select properties. Navigate to the
Parameters tab to view the present device configuration.
2. Select parameter 300 to enable emulation mode.
3. Select the E3/E3 Plus device that is appropriate for the target application. The
E3/E3 Plus device selection must be compatible with the target hardware that is
installed or a configuration error will be encountered (for example, a 1…5 A
E3/E3 Plus overload relay cannot be selected with a 60 A sensing module
installed).
4. Delete the E300 component and add the respective E3/E3 Plus device to the
corresponding DeviceNet network and configure it.
A single-pass browse of the DeviceNet network also detects the emulated E3/
E3 Plus device.
5. The E300 Overload Relay’s parameter set is now reduced considerably and is
configurable as the selected E3/E3 Plus device (example shown is E3 Plus,
9…45 A).
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 199
DeviceNet Communication Chapter 10
To revert back to the native E300 device, note that the emulation mode parameter as
an E3/E3 Plus device is parameter 303. Navigate to this parameter and select “disable”
to return to E300 functionality. Then follow steps 4
…5 to update the corresponding
DeviceNet network accordingly.
You can also use the E300 Diagnostic Station to modify the parameters referenced in
this section. Once E3/E3 Plus emulation mode is activated, it is reflected in the
Diagnostic Station. In this mode, you cannot modify the full parameter set. This must
be done using an appropriate DeviceNet interface such as RSNetWorx for DeviceNet.
200 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 10 DeviceNet Communication
Notes:
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 201
Chapter 11
Firmware and EDS Files
This chapter provides detailed information about firmware compatibility among the
various E300™ Electronic Overload Relay modules and provides instructions on how to
update firmware for an E300 relay module.
Firmware Compatibility
The sensing, control, and communication modules of an E300 relay have their own
firmware for the functionality of the module and its subsystems. You can update each
module and its associated subsystems by using the ControlFLASH utility, which is the
same utility that is used to download firmware into a Logix-based controller. The
ControlFLASH kits for E300 firmware system revisions v1.085, v2.085, v3.083,
v4.083, and v5.082 use one command to update all E300 relay modules and subsystems
for that specific system release. Consult the Product Compatibility and Download
Center to find the most current firmware revision.
Updating Firmware
Download firmware, associated files (such as AOP, EDS, and DTM), and access
product release notes from the Product Compatibility and Download Center at http:/
/www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/support/pcdc.page.
After you have downloaded and installed the firmware, run the ControlFLASH
application by selecting ControlFLASH from the Start menu.
Electronic Data Sheet (EDS)
File Installation
Before the E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module is configured to
communicate on an EtherNet/IP network, it must be registered to the software that
configures the network (for example, RockwellAutomation RSLinx Classic and
RSNetWorx for EtherNet/IP software). Register the module by installing an EDS file.
You need the EDS file for the E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module and
DeviceNet Communication Module. You can get the EDS files from one of two
locations:
• Embedded in the module
• The Allen-Bradley EDS file download website.
Download the EDS File
Embedded in the Module
The EDS file for the E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module is embedded
within the module. Using RSLinx Classic, you can install the E300 relay EtherNet/IP
Communication Module's EDS file from the RSLinx Classic RSWho screen using
these steps:
202 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 11 Firmware and EDS Files
1. Open RSLinx Classic and browse the EtherNet/IP network that has the E300
relay. It is identified with a yellow question mark. Right click on the
unrecognized device and select "Upload EDS File from Device".
From the EDS File Download Site
The EDS file for the E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module can also be
downloaded from the Allen-Bradley EDS File download site. Using a web browser on
the personal computer that is connected to the internet, you can download the EDS
file by following these steps:
1. Type http://www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/support/
networks/eds.page? on the address line of the web browser.
2. Select EtherNet/IP as the network type, enter 193 for the Bulletin Number,
and click Search.
3. Locate the EDS file for the E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module
and download it to the personal computer.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 203
Firmware and EDS Files Chapter 11
Install the EDS File
1. Start the EDS Hardware Installation Tool located at Start>Programs>Rockwell
Software>RSLinx Tools and Add a new device
2. Using the EDS Wizard, install the downloaded E300 relay EtherNet/IP
Communication Module EDS file.
3. When finished, RSLinx Classic recognizes the newly registered E300 relay
EtherNet/IP Communication Module.
204 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 11 Firmware and EDS Files
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 205
Firmware and EDS Files Chapter 11
Notes:
206 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 11 Firmware and EDS Files
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 207
Chapter 12
Troubleshooting
This chapter helps you troubleshoot the E300™ Electronic Overload Relay using its
advisory LEDs and diagnostic parameters.
Status Indicators
All E300 relay Communication Modules and Operator Station have two diagnostic
status indicators: Power LED and Trip/Warn LED. You can use these diagnostic status
indicators to help identify the state of the E300 relay and the reason for the trip or
warning event.
Power
The E300 relay Power LED identifies the state of the E300 relay system.
Table 45 - Power LED for EtherNet/IP and DeviceNet Communication Modules
ATTENTION: Servicing energized industrial control equipment can be
hazardous. Electrical shock, burns, or unintentional actuation of controlled
industrial equipment may cause death or serious injury. For safety of
maintenance personnel and others who may be exposed to electrical
hazards associated with the maintenance activities, follow the local safety-
related work practices (for example, the NFPA 70E, Part II, Electrical Safety
for Employee Workplaces, in the United States) when working on or near
energized equipment. Maintenance personnel must be trained in the safety
practices, procedures, and requirements that pertain to their respective job
assignments. Do not work alone on energized equipment.
ATTENTION: Do not attempt to defeat or override fault circuits. The cause of
a fault indication must be determined and corrected before attempting
operation. Failure to correct a control system or mechanical malfunction may
result in personal injury and/or equipment damage due to uncontrolled
machine system operation.
Blinking Green Device Ready/ Ready Mode
Solid Green Device Active (Current Detected) / Run Mode
Solid Red Device Error
Blinking Red
(1)
(1) Available on Operator Station.
Communication Error
Blinking Green/Red
(1)
CopyCat in Progress
208 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 12 Troubleshooting
Module Status (MS)
Tab le 46 explains the states of the Module Status (MS) LED of the E300 EtherNet/IP
Communication Module.
Table 46 - EtherNet/IP Communication Module Status Troubleshooting
Tab le 47
explains the states of the Module Status (MS) LED of the E300 DeviceNet
Communication Module.
Table 47 - DeviceNet Communication Module Status Troubleshooting
LED Color State Possible Cause Corrective Action
None —
The E300 EtherNet/IP Communication Module is
not receiving power.
Check the control power connection on the A1 and A2 terminals of the
E300 Control Module.
Green, Red, Not
Illuminated
Flashing (once) Normal This is a normal power-up sequence.
Green Flashing
The E300 EtherNet/IP Communication Module is
not being scanned by the EtherNet/IP master.
Check the Ethernet scan list for the correct scanner configuration.
Green Solid
Normal operating state, the E300 EtherNet/IP
Communication Module is allocated to its master.
No action is required.
Red Flashing
One or more EtherNet/IP connections timed out. Reset the E300 EtherNet/IP Communication Module.
The E300 Overload Relay is in a fault state.
Reset the E300 EtherNet/IP Communication Module or verify the validity of the data in the
configuration assembly.
Red Solid Diagnostics test failed on power-up/reset. Cycle power to the device. If the fault still exists, replace the device.
LED Color State Possible Cause Corrective Action
None —
The E300 DeviceNet Communication Module is
not receiving power.
Check the DeviceNet control power on the A1 and A2 terminals of the E300 Control
Module.
Green, Red, Not
Illuminated
Flashing (once) Normal This is a normal power-up sequence.
Green Flashing Normal (Program / Non-Run Mode)
The E300 Module is in Program/Non-run Mode where no I/O connection exists or an I/O
connection exists while not in Run Mode.
Green Solid Normal (Run Mode) The E300 Module is in Run Mode where I/O connection(s) is in Run State.
Red Flashing Recoverable Fault State The E300 Module has been mis-configured and results in a fault condition.
Red Solid Unrecoverable Fault State.
The E300 Module has become inoperable due to a defective and/or intermittent
component within the unit. In most instances, activating the Trip/Reset button will not
remove this fault condition and the only way to recover from this condition is to replace
the E300 module or identify/replace the faulty component(s). In some scenarios, pressing
the Trip/Reset button may clear this fault condition. In this case, the cause for the fault is
most likely to be environmentally related and therefore component replacement is not
required.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 209
Troubleshooting Chapter 12
Network Status (NS)
Tab le 48 identifies possible causes and corrective actions when troubleshooting the
E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module.
Table 48 - EtherNet/IP Communication Module Network Status Troubleshooting
Tab le 49
identifies possible causes and corrective actions when troubleshooting the
E300 relay DeviceNet Communication Module.
Table 49 - DeviceNet Communication Module Network Status Troubleshooting
Trip/Warn
The E300 relay Power LED identifies the reason for the trip or warning event. The
E300 relay displays a long and short blinking pattern to identify the reason for the trip
or warning event.
Table 50 - Trip / Warn LED for EtherNet/IP and DeviceNet Communication Modules
Status LED Color State Possible Cause Corrective Action
Network Status (NS)
None —
The E300 EtherNet/IP Communication Module is not
receiving power.
Verify that the proper control voltage exists between
terminals A1 and A2 on the E300 Control Module.
Green, Red,
Not Illuminated
Flashing (once) Normal This is a normal power-up sequence.
Green Flashing
The E300 EtherNet/IP Communication Module is online,
but with no connections established.
Check the EtherNet/IP master and its scan list for correct
scanner configuration.
Green Solid
Normal operating state and the E300 EtherNet/IP
Communication Module is allocated to a master.
No action is required.
Red Flashing One or more EtherNet/IP connections timed out. Reset the EtherNet/IP master device.
Red Solid
Diagnostics test failed on power-up/reset. An internal
fault exists.
Cycle power to the unit. If the fault still exists, replace
the unit.
Duplicate EtherNet/IP module address exists. Two
modules cannot have the same address.
Change the IP address to a valid setting and reset the
device.
A fatal communication error occurred. Check Ethernet media for proper installation.
Link1 or Link2
None —
The E300 EtherNet/IP Communication Module is not
properly connected to an Ethernet network.
Check the Ethernet cabling to make sure it is properly
installed.
Green Flashing The Ethernet network is properly connected. No action is required.
Green Solid Communication is occurring on the Ethernet network. No action is required.
Status LED Color State Possible Cause Corrective Action
Network Status (NS)
None —
The E300 DeviceNet Communication Module is not
receiving power.
Check the DeviceNet control power on the A1 and A2
terminals of the E300 Control Module.
Green, Red, Not
Illuminated
Flashing (once) Normal This is a normal power-up sequence.
Green Flashing
The E300 DeviceNet Communication Module is online
but has no connections established to other nodes.
The E300 Module may require commissioning due to
configuration missing, incomplete, or incorrect.
Green Solid Normal
The E300 DeviceNet Communication Module is
allocated to a master.
Red Flashing One or more DeviceNet I/O connections timed out. Verify configuration and/or reset DeviceNet master.
Red Solid
The E300 DeviceNet Communication Module has
detected an error that has rendered it incapable of
communicating on the network.
Verify configuration and/or reset DeviceNet master.
Cycle power to the E300 Module. If the fault still exists,
identify/replace the faulty component(s). Change the
node address to a valid setting and reset the E300
Module. Verify integrity of the DeviceNet network and
corresponding cabling to ensure proper installation.
Blinking Red Trip Event
Blinking Yellow Warning Event
210 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 12 Troubleshooting
Tab le 51 lists the blink patterns for the E300 relay trip and warning events.
Table 51 - Blink Patterns for Trip/Warn Events
Code Long Blink Pattern Short Blink Pattern
Current
Overload 0 1
Phase Loss 0 2
Ground Fault Current 0 3
Stall 0 4
Jam 0 5
Underload 0 6
Current Imbalance 0 7
L1 Under Current 0 8
L2 Under Current 0 9
L3 Under Current 0 10
L1 Over Current 0 11
L2 Over Current 0 12
L3 Over Current 0 13
L1 Line Loss 0 14
L2 Line Loss 0 15
L3 Line Loss 0 16
Voltage Under Voltage 1 1
Over Voltage 1 2
Voltage Imbalance 1 3
Phase Rotation Mismatch 1 4
Under Frequency 1 5
Over Frequency 1 6
Power Under kW 2 1
Over kW 2 2
Under kVAR Consumed 2 3
Over kVAR Consumed 2 4
Under kVAR Generated 2 5
Over kVAR Generated 2 6
Under kVA 2 7
Over kVA 2 8
Under PF Lagging 2 9
Over PF Lagging 2 10
Under PF Leading 2 11
Over PF Leading 2 12
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 211
Troubleshooting Chapter 12
Reset a Trip
The E300 relay trip condition can be reset by taking one of the following actions:
• Actuating the Blue Trip/Reset button on the E300 relay Communication
Module
• Actuating the Reset button on the E300 relay Operator Station
• Setting the Trip Reset bit in the E300 relay’s Output Assembly via the
communication network
• Actuating a reset signal to one of the assigned digital inputs
• Setting Overload Reset Mode (Parameter 173) to “Automatic” to allow the unit
to automatically reset after an overload trip
• Setting Trip Reset (Parameter 163) to a value of 1, “Trip Reset”
Control Tes t 3 1
PTC 3 2
DeviceLogix 3 3
Operator Station 3 4
Remote Trip 3 5
Blocked Start 3 6
Hardware Fault 3 7
Configuration 3 8
Option Match 3 9
Feedback Timeout 3 10
Expansion Bus 3 11
Number Of Starts 3 12
Operating Hours 3 13
Nonvolatile Memory 3 14
Test Mode 3 15
Analog
Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 00 4 1
Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 01 4 2
Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 02 4 3
Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 00 4 4
Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 01 4 5
Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 02 4 6
Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 00 4 7
Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 01 4 8
Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 02 4 9
Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 00 4 10
Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 01 4 11
Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 02 4 12
Code Long Blink Pattern Short Blink Pattern
ATTENTION: Resetting a trip does not correct the cause for the trip. Take
corrective action before you reset the trip.
IMPORTANT
An overload trip cannot be reset until the value of Percent Thermal Capacity Utilized
(Parameter 1) is below the value set in Overload Reset Level (Parameter 174).
212 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 12 Troubleshooting
Trip/Warn LED
Troubleshooting
Trip Description Possible Cause Corrective Action
Test Trip 1. Operation of the Test/Reset 1. Operate the Test/Reset button to clear
Overload
1. Motor overloaded 1. Check and correct source of overload (load, mechanical transmission components, motor bearings).
2. Improper parameter settings 2. Set parameter values to match the motor and application requirements.
Phase Loss
1. Missing supply phase 1. Check for open line (for example, blown fuse).
2. Poor electrical connection
2. Check all power terminations from the branch circuit-protecting device down to the motor for proper
tightness. Make sure that the overload connection to the contactor is secure.
3. Contactor operation 3. Inspect contactor for proper operation.
4. Improper parameter setting 4. Single-phase applications require that Single/Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to “single phase”.
Ground Fault
1. Power conductor or motor winding is
shorting to ground
1. Check power conductors and motor windings for low resistance to ground.
2. Motor winding insulation is decayed 2. Check motor winding insulation for low resistance to ground.
3. Foreign Object short 3. Check for foreign objects.
4. External ground fault sensor (core balance
current transformer) has improper
connection
4. Check cable connections.
Stall
1. Motor has not reached full speed by the
end of the Stall Enabld Time (Parameter
249)
1. Check for source of stall (for example, excessive load, or mechanical transmission component failure).
2. Improper parameter settings
2. Stall Enabled Time (Parameter 249) is set too low for the application. Check to make sure that FLA Setting
(Parameter 171) is set correctly.
Jam
1. Motor current has exceeded the
programmed jam level
1. Check for the source of the jam (i.e., excessive load or mechanical transmission component failure).
2. Improper parameter settings
2. Jam Trip Level (Parameter 253) is set too low for the application. Check to make sure that FLA Setting
(Parameter 171) is set correctly.
PTC
1. Motor stator windings overheated
1. Check for source of motor overtemperature (for example, overload, obstructed cooling, high ambient
temperature, excessive starts/hour).
2. Thermistor leads short-circuited or broken 2. Inspect thermistor leads for short-circuit or open
Current Imbalance
1. Imbalance in incoming power 1. Check power system (for example, blown fuse).
2. Motor winding imbalance 2. Repair motor, or if acceptable, raise value of Current Imbalance Trip Level (Parameter 261), CI Trip Level
3. Motor idling 3. Raise value of Current Imbalance Trip Level (Parameter 261) to an acceptable level.
4. Contactor or circuit breaker operation 4. Inspect contactor and circuit breaker for proper operation.
Nonvolatile Storage
Fault
1. Firmware Downgrade corrupted:
Nonvolatile memory
1.Execute the Clear Command to the operating Statistics, History Logs, and % TCU
2. Internal product failure 2. Consult the factory.
Hardware Fault
1. Firmware of sensing module is not
compatible with control module firmware
1. Verify firmware revisions of control module and sensing module
2. Update firmware of control module to v2.0 or higher
2. Hardware configuration failure
3. Consult the factory.
4. Verify that the Sensing, Control, and Communication Module are connected properly.
5. Verify that connection pins between sensing module and control module are not bent.
Configuration Fault
1. Single/Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set
to "Single Phase" and current is being
sensed in phase L3 during motor operation.
1. For three-phase applications, Single/Three Phase (Parameter 176) should be set to “Three-Phase”; for single-
phase applications, verify that current is flowing through L1 and L2 only.
2. Operating Mode "Overload (Network)"
does not have an assigned Trip Relay
2. Verify that one of the Output Assignments (Parameters 202…204) is configured as a "Trip Relay"
3. Illegal configuration value
3. Review Invalid Configuration Parameter (Parameter 38) and Invalid Configuration Cause (Parameter 39) to
identify which configuration parameter is illegal and the reason why.
Remote Trip
1. Contact closure of remote sensor (for
example, vibration switch).
1. Take corrective action to address the issue that caused the sensor to actuate.
2. Check sensor for proper operation.
3. Check wiring.
Total Starts Warning
1. Starts Counter (Parameter 29) is equal to
or greater than the value set in Total Starts
(Parameter 207)
1. Set Clear Command (Parameter 165) to "Clear Operating Statistics" to reset Starts Counter (Parameter 29)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 213
Troubleshooting Chapter 12
Total Operating
Hours Warning
1. Operating Time (Parameter 28) is equal to
or greater than the value set in Total
Operating Hours (Parameter 208)
1. Clear Command (Parameter 165) to "Clear Operating Statistics" to reset Operating Time (Parameter 28)
Blocked Start
1. The number of starts count within the
past hour period equals the value set in the
Starts Per Hour (Parameter 205)
1. Check Time to Start (Parameter 31) and wait that amount of time, or change the configuration to allow more
starts/hour.
2. The time expired since the most recent
start is less than the value set in the Starts
Interval (Parameter 206)
2. Check Time to Start (Parameter 31) and wait that amount of time, or change the configuration to shorten the
interval between starts.
Trip Description Possible Cause Corrective Action
214 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter 12 Troubleshooting
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 215
Appendix A
Wiring Diagrams
E300 Wiring Configurations
The following pages illustrate various wiring configurations for the E300™ Electronic
Overload Relay
Figure 83 - Delta Configuration with Two Potential Transformers (Open Delta)
Delta Source
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
Delta Load
Open Delta
Potential
Transformer
CT Sensing Module
10 M
10 M
10 M
L1
T1
L2
T2
L3
T3
S1
S2
V1
V2
V3
216 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix A Wiring Diagrams
Figure 84 - Wye Configuration with Two Potential Transformers (Open Delta)
Wye Source
Grounded or ungrounded neutral
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
Open Delta
Potential
Transformer
CT Sensing Module
10 M
10 M
10 M
L1
T1
L2
T2
L3
T3
S1
S2
V1
V2
V3
Wye Load
Grounded or ungrounded neutral
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 217
Wiring Diagrams Appendix A
Figure 85 - Grounded B Phase Configuration With Two Potential Transformers (Open Delta)
Grounded B Phase
Delta Source
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
Delta Load
Open Delta
Potential
Transformer
CT Sensing Module
10 M
10 M
10 M
L1
T1
L2
T2
L3
T3
S1
S2
V1
V2
V3
218 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix A Wiring Diagrams
Figure 86 - Delta Configuration with Three Potential Transformers (Delta-to-Delta)
Delta Source
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
Delta Load
Delta to Delta Potential
Transformer
CT Sensing Module
10 M
10 M
10 M
L1
T1
L2
T2
L3
T3
S1
S2
V1
V2
V3
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 219
Wiring Diagrams Appendix A
Figure 87 - Wye Configuration with Three Potential Transformers (Delta-to-Delta)
Wye Source
Grounded or ungrounded neutral
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
CT Sensing Module
10 M
10 M
10 M
L1
T1
L2
T2
L3
T3
S1
S2
V1
V2
V3
Wye Load
Grounded or ungrounded neutral
Delta to Delta Potential
Transformer
220 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix A Wiring Diagrams
Figure 88 - Delta Configuration with Three Potential Transformers (Wye-to-Wye)
Delta Source
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
Delta Load
Wye to Wye Potential
Transformer
CT Sensing Module
10 M
10 M
10 M
L1
T1
L2
T2
L3
T3
S1
S2
V1
V2
V3
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 221
Wiring Diagrams Appendix A
Figure 89 - Wye Configuration with Three Potential Transformers (Wye-to-Wye)
Wye Source
Grounded or ungrounded neutral
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
CT Sensing Module
10 M
10 M
10 M
L1
T1
L2
T2
L3
T3
S1
S2
V1
V2
V3
Wye Load
Grounded or ungrounded neutral
Wye to Wye Potential
Transformer
222 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix A Wiring Diagrams
Figure 90 - Delta Configuration with Wye-to-Delta Potential Transformers
Delta Source
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
Delta Load
Wye to Delta Potential
Transformer
CT Sensing Module
10 M
10 M
10 M
L1
T1
L2
T2
L3
T3
S1
S2
V1
V2
V3
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 223
Wiring Diagrams Appendix A
Figure 91 - Wye Configuration with Wye-to-Delta Potential Transformers
Wye Source
Grounded or ungrounded neutral
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
CT Sensing Module
10 M
10 M
10 M
L1
T1
L2
T2
L3
T3
S1
S2
V1
V2
V3
Wye Load
Grounded or ungrounded neutral
Wye to Delta Potential
Transformer
224 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix A Wiring Diagrams
Figure 92 - Delta Configuration with Delta-to-Wye Potential Transformers
Delta Source
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
Delta Load
Delta to Wye Potential
Transformer
CT Sensing Module
10 M
10 M
10 M
L1
T1
L2
T2
L3
T3
S1
S2
V1
V2
V3
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 225
Wiring Diagrams Appendix A
Figure 93 - Wye with Delta-to-Wye Potential Transformers
Wye Source
Grounded or ungrounded neutral
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
Signal filter and
short-circuit
protection
CT Sensing Module
10 M
10 M
10 M
L1
T1
L2
T2
L3
T3
S1
S2
V1
V2
V3
Wye Load
Grounded or ungrounded neutral
Delta to Wye Potential
Transformer
226 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix A Wiring Diagrams
Notes:
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 227
Appendix B
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
The E300™ Electronic Overload Relay’s EtherNet/IP Communication Module
supports the following Common Industrial Protocol (CIP).
Table 52 - CIP Object Classes
Identity Object — CLASS CODE 0x0001
The instances of the Identity Object in Ta b le 53 are supported:
Table 53 - Identity Object Instances
The class attributes in Ta ble 54
are supported for the Identity Object:
Table 54 - Identity Object Class Attributes
Class Object
0x0001 Identity
0x0002 Message Router
0x0003 DeviceNet
0x0004 Assembly
0x0005 Connection
0x0008 Discrete Input Point
0x0009 Discrete Output Point
0x000A Analog Input Point
0x000F Parameter Object
0x0010 Parameter Group Object
0x001E Discrete Output Group
0x0029 Control Supervisor
0x002B Acknowledge Handler
0x002C Overload Object
0x004E Base Energy Object
0x004F Electrical Energy Object
0x008B Wall Clock Time Object
0x0097 DPI Fault Object
0x0098 DPI Warning Object
0x00C2 MCC Object
Instance Name Revision Attribute
1 Operating System Flash The firmware rev of the Control firmware stored in flash memory
2 Boot code Flash The firmware rev of the Boot Code stored in flash memory
3 Sensing Module The firmware rev of the Sensing Module firmware
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value
1 Get Revision UINT 1
228 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix B Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
Instance 1 of the Identity Object contains the attributes in Table 55 and Tab le 56:
Table 55 - Identity Object Instance 1 Attributes
Table 56 - Extended Device Status Field (bits 4-7) in “Status” Instance Attribute 5
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value
1 Get Vendor UINT 1 = Allen-Bradley
2GetDevice TypeUINT3
3 Get Product Code UINT 651
4Get
Revision
Major Revision
Minor Revision
Structure of:
USINT
USINT
Firmware revision of the Control firmware
5GetStatusWORD
Bit 0 – 0=not owned; 1=owned by master
Bit 2 – 0=Factory Defaulted; 1=Configured
Bits 4-7 – Extended Status (see Tabl e 56
)
Bit 8 – Minor Recoverable fault
Bit 9 – Minor Unrecoverable fault
Bit 10 – Major Recoverable fault
Bit 11 – Major Unrecoverable fault
6 Get Serial Number UDINT unique number for each device
7Get
Product Name
String Length
ASCII String
Structure of:
USINT
STRING
“193-EIO Application”
8 Get State USINT See CIP Common Spec
9Get
Configuration
Consistency Value
UINT
16 bit CRC or checksum of all data included in
the following data sets:
Parameter included in the configuration
assembly
MCC Object configuration data
DeviceLogix program data
Base Energy Object attribute 16
Value Description
0 Self-Testing or Unknown
1 Firmware Update in Progress
2 At least one faulted I/O connection
3 No I/O connections established
4Nonvolatile Configuration bad
5 Major Fault – either bit 10 or bit 11 is true (1)
6 At least one I/O connection in run mode
7 At least one I/O connection established, all in idle mode
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 229
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects Appendix B
Instance 2 of the Identity Object contains the attributes in Table 57:
Table 57 - Identity Object Instance 2 Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value
1 Get Vendor UINT 1 = Allen-Bradley
2 Get Device Type UINT 3
3 Get Product Code UINT 651
4Get
Revision
Major Revision
Minor Revision
Structure of:
USINT
USINT
Firmware revision of the Boot Code
5GetStatusWORD
Bit 0 – 0=not owned; 1=owned by master
Bit 2 – 0=Factory Defaulted; 1=Configured
Bits 4-7 – Extended Status (see Table 56
)
Bit 8 – Minor Recoverable fault
Bit 9 – Minor Unrecoverable fault
Bit 10 – Major Recoverable fault
Bit 11 – Major Unrecoverable fault
6 Get Serial Number UDINT unique number for each device
7Get
Product Name
String Length
ASCII String
Structure of:
USINT
STRING
“193-EIO Boot Code”
8 Get State USINT See CIP Common Spec
9Get
Configuration
Consistency Value
UINT
16 bit CRC or checksum of all data included in the
following data sets:
Parameter included in the configuration
assembly
MCC Object configuration data
DeviceLogix program data
Base Energy Object attribute 16
230 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix B Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
Instance 3 of the Identity Object contains the attributes in Table 58:
Table 58 - Identity Object Instance 3 Attributes
The common services in Ta ble 59
are implemented for the Identity Object.
Table 59 - Identity Object Common Services
Message Router — CLASS CODE 0x0002
No class or instance attributes are supported. The message router object exists only to
rout explicit messages to other objects.
Assembly Object — CLASS CODE 0x0004
The class attributes in Ta ble 60 are supported for the Assembly Object:
Table 60 - Assembly Object Class Attributes
Attribute
ID
Access
Rule
Name Data Type Value
1 Get Vendor UINT 1 = Allen-Bradley
2 Get Device Type UINT 3
3 Get Product Code UINT 651
4Get
Revision
Major Revision
Minor Revision
Structure of:
USINT
USINT
Firmware revision of the Sensing Module firmware
5GetStatus WORD
Bit 0 – 0=not owned; 1=owned by master
Bit 2 – 0=Factory Defaulted; 1=Configured
Bits 4-7 – Extended Status (see Table 56
)
Bit 8 – Minor Recoverable fault
Bit 9 – Minor Unrecoverable fault
Bit 10 – Major Recoverable fault
Bit 11 – Major Unrecoverable fault
6 Get Serial Number UDINT unique number for each device
7Get
Product Name
String Length
ASCII String
Structure of:
USINT
STRING
“193-EIO Sensing Module”
8 Get State USINT See CIP Common Spec
9Get
Configuration
Consistency Value
UINT
16 bit CRC or checksum of all data included in the
following data sets:
Parameter included in the configuration assembly
MCC Object configuration data
DeviceLogix program data
Base Energy Object attribute 16
Service Code Implemented for: Service Name
Class Instance
0x0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x05 No Yes Reset
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value
2 Get Max. Instance UINT 199
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 231
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects Appendix B
The static assembly instance attributes in Tab le 61 are supported for each assembly
instance.
Table 61 - Assembly Instance Attributes
The services in Ta b l e 6 2
are implemented for the Assembly Object.
Table 62 - Assembly Object Services
Tab le 63
summarizes the instances of the Assembly Object that are implemented:
Table 63 - Assembly Object Instance Summary
Instance 2
Tab le 64 summarizes Attribute 3 Format. For additional information regarding I/O
assemblies, see Appendix C
.
Table 64 -
Instance 2 — Basic Overload Output Assembly from ODVA Profile
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value
1Get
Number of Members
in Member List
UINT
2Get
Member List Array of STRUCT Array of CIP paths
Member Data
Description
UINT Size of Member Data in bits
Member Path Size UINT Size of Member Path in bytes
Member Path Packed EPATH
Member EPATHs for each assembly
instance
3 Conditional Data Array of BYTE
4 Get Size UINT Number of bytes in attribute 3
100 Get Name String STRING
Service Code Implemented for: Service Name
Class Instance
0x0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single
Inst Type Name Description
2 Consumed Trip Reset Cmd Required ODVA Consumed Instance
50 Produced Trip Status Required ODVA Produced Instance
100 Produced DataLinks Object 8 Datalinks Produced Assembly
120 Config Configuration Configuration Assembly
144 Consumed E300 Consumed Default Consumed Assembly
198 Produced Current Diags Produced Assembly with Current Diagnostics Only
199 Produced All Diags Default Produced Assembly
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0 Fault Reset
232 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix B Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
Table 65 - Instance 2 Attributes
Instance 50
Table 6 6 summarizes Attribute 3 Format:
Table 66 - Instance 50 — Basic Overload Input Assembly from ODVA Overload Profile
Table 67 - Instance 50 Attributes
Attribute
ID
Access
Rule
Member
Index
Name Data Type Value
1Get
Number of Members in Member
List
UINT 2
2Get
Member List Array of STRUCT
0
Member Data Description UINT 2
Member Path Size UINT 0
Member Path Packed EPATH
1
Member Data Description UINT 1
Member Path Size UINT 12
Member Path Packed EPATH 6BH and “Fault Reset”
3 Set Data UINT See data format above
4Get Size UINT 1
100 Get Name SHORT_STRING “Trip Reset Cmd”
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0Tripped
Attribute
ID
Access
Rule
Member
Index
Name Data Type Value
1 Get Number of Members in Member List UINT 1
2Get
Member List Array of STRUCT
0
Member Data Description UINT 1
Member Path Size UINT 8
Member Path Packed EPATH 67H and “Tripped”
3 Get Data UINT See data format above
4Get Size UINT 1
100 Get Name SHORT_STRING “Trip Status”
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 233
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects Appendix B
Instance 120 - Configuration Assembly Revision 2
Tab le 68 shows Attribute 3 Format and Attribute 2 Member List for revision 2 of the
assembly.
Table 68 - Instance 120 — Configuration Assembly
INTDINT1514131211109876543210Size (bits)Param
0
0
ConfigAssyRev = 2 16 1100
1
SetOperatingMode 8 195
Reserved 8 1102
2
1 FLASetting 32 171
3
4
2 FLA2Setting 32 177
5
6
3
Tri pClass 8 172
XOLPTCResetMode 1 173
X SingleOrThreePh 1 176
XGFFilter 1247
X GFMaxInghibit 1 248
X X PhaseRotTrip 1 364
XPowerScale1377
X Reserved 2 1101
7
OLResetLevel 8 174
OLWarningLevel 8175
8
4
Tri pEnableI 16 183
9 WarningEnableI 16 189
10
5
Tri pEnableV 16 184
11 WarningEnableV 16 190
12
6
Tri pEnableP 16 185
13 WarningEnableP 16 191
14
7
Tri pEnableC 16 186
15 WarningEnableC 16 192
16
8
Tri pEnableA 16 187
17 WarningEnableA 16 193
18
9
TripHistoryMaskI 16 139
19 WarnHistoryMaskI 16 145
20
10
TripHistoryMaskV 16 140
21 WarnHistoryMaskV 16 146
22
11
TripHistoryMaskP 16 141
23 WarnHistoryMaskP 16 147
24
12
TripHistoryMaskC 16 142
25 WarnHistoryMaskC 16 148
26
13
TripHistoryMaskA 16 143
27 WarnHistoryMaskA 16 149
28
14
MismatchAction 16 233
29
ControlModuleTyp 8 221
SensingModuleTyp 8 222
234 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix B Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
30
15
OperStationType 4 224
X X X DigitalMod1Type 3 225
X X X DigitalMod2Type 3 226
X X X DigitalMod3Type 3 227
X X X DigitalMod4Type 3 228
31
AnalogMod1Type X X 2 229
AnalogMod2Type X X 2 230
AnalogMod3Type X X 2 231
AnalogMod4Type X X 2 232
Reserved 8N/A
32
16
Language 4 212
OutAAssignment 4 202
OuBAssignment 4 203
OutCAssignment 4204
33
InPt00Assignment 4 196
InPt01Assignment 4 197
InPt02Assignment 4 198
InPt03Assignment 4 199
34
17
InPt04Assignment 4 200
InPt05Assignment 4 201
ActFLA2wOutput 4 209
X EmergencyStartEn 4 216
XXXReserved 4 N/A
35
StartsPerHour 8 205
Reserved 8N/A
36
18
StartsInterval 16 206
37 PMTotalStarts 16 207
38
19
PMOperatingHours 16 208
39 FeedbackTimeout 16 213
40
20
TransitionDelay 16 214
41 InterlockDelay 16 215
42
21
GroundFaultType 8 241
GFInhibitTime 8242
43
GFTripDelay 8 243
GFWarningDelay 8245
44
22
GFTripLevel 16 244
45 GFWarningLevel 16 246
46
23
PLInhibitTime 8 239
PLTripDelay 8240
47
StallEnabledTime 8 249
Reserved 8N/A
48
24
StallTripLevel 16 250
49
JamInhibitTime 8 251
JamTripDelay 8252
50
25
JamTripLevel 16 253
51 JamWarningLevel 16 254
52
26
ULInhibitTime 8 255
ULTripDelay 8256
53
ULTripLevel 8 257
ULWarningLevel 8258
INTDINT1514131211109876543210Size (bits)Param
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 235
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects Appendix B
54
27
CIInhibitTime 8 259
CITripDelay 8260
55
CITripLevel 8 261
CIWarningLevel 8262
56
28
CTPrimary 16 263
57 CTSecondary 16 264
58
29
UCInhibitTime 8 265
L1UCTripDelay 8266
59
L1UCTripLevel 8 267
L1UCWarningLevel 8 268
60
30
L2UCTripDelay 8 269
L2UCTripLevel 8270
61
L2UCWarningLevel 8 271
L3UCTripDelay 8272
62
31
L3UCTripLevel 8 273
L3UCWarningLevel 8 274
63
OCInhibitTime 8 275
L1OCTripDelay 8276
64
32
L1OCTripLevel 8 277
L1OCWarningLevel 8 278
65
L2OCTripDelay 8 279
L2OCTripLevel 8280
66
33
L2OCWarningLevel 8 281
L3OCTripDelay 8282
67
L3OCTripLevel 8 283
L3OCWarningLevel 8 284
68
34
LineLossInhTime 8 285
L1LossTripDelay 8286
69
L2LossTripDelay 8 287
L3LossTripDelay 8288
70
35
Datalink0 16 291
71 Datalink1 16 292
72
36
Datalink2 16 293
73 Datalink3 16 294
74
37
Datalink4 16 295
75 Datalink5 16 296
76
38
Datalink6 16 297
77 Datalink7 16 298
INTDINT1514131211109876543210Size (bits)Param
236 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix B Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
78
39
OutPt00PrFltAct X 1 304
OutPt00PrFltVal X 1 305
OutPt00ComFltAct X 1 306
OutPt00ComFltVal X 1 307
OutPt00ComIdlAct X 1 308
OutPt00ComIdlVal X 1 309
OutPt01PrFltAct X 1 310
OutPt01PrFltVal X 1 311
X OutPt01ComFltAct 1 312
X OutPt01ComFltVal 1 313
X OutPt01ComIdlAct 1 314
X OutPt01ComIdlVal 1 315
X OutPt02PrFltAct 1 316
X OutPt02PrFltVal 1 317
X OutPt02ComFltAct 1 318
X OutPt02ComFltVal 1 319
79
OutPt02ComIdlAct X 1 320
OutPt02ComIdlVal X 1 321
OutDig1PrFltAct X 1 322
OutDig1PrFltVal X 1 323
OutDig1ComFltAct X 1 324
OutDig1ComFltVal X 1 325
OutDig1ComIdlAct X 1 326
OutDig1ComIdlVal X 1 327
XOutDig2PrFltAct 1 328
XOutDig2PrFltVal 1329
X OutDig2ComFltAct 1 330
X OutDig2ComFltVal 1 331
X OutDig2ComIdlAct 1 332
X OutDig2ComIdlVal 1 333
XOutDig3PrFltAct1334
XOutDig3PrFltVal1335
80
40
OutDig3ComFltAct X 1 336
OutDig3ComFltVal X 1 337
OutDig3ComIdlAct X 1 338
OutDig3ComIdlVal X 1 339
OutDig4PrFltAct X 1 340
OutDig4PrFltVal X 1 341
OutDig4ComFltAct X 1 342
OutDig4ComFltVal X 1 343
X OutDig4ComIdlAct 1 344
X OutDig4ComIdlVal 1 345
X CommOverride 1 346
X NetworkOverride 1 347
Reserved 4N/A
81 PtDevOutCOSMask 16 350
82
41
PTPrimary 16 353
83 PTSecondary 16 354
INTDINT1514131211109876543210Size (bits)Param
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 237
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects Appendix B
84
42
VoltageMode 8 352
PhRotInhibitTime 8 363
85
UVInhibitTime 8 355
UVTripDelay 8356
86
43
UVTripLevel 16 357
87 UVWarningLevel 16 358
88
44
OVInhibitTime 8 359
OVTripDelay 8360
89 OVTripLevel 16 361
90
45
OVWarningLevel 16 362
91
VUBInhibitTime 8 365
VUBTripDelay 8366
92
46
VUBTripLevel 8 367
VUBWarningLevel 8 368
93
UFInhibitTime 8 369
UFTripDelay 8370
94
47
UFTripLevel 8 371
UFWarningLevel 8372
95
OFInhibitTime 8 373
OFTripDelay 8374
96
48
OFTripLevel 8 375
OFWarningLevel 8376
97
DemandPeriod 8 426
NumberOfPeriods 8 427
98
49
UWInhibitTime 8 378
UWTripDelay 8379
99
OWInhibitTime 8 382
OWTripDelay 8383
100
50 UWTripLevel 32 380
101
102
51 UWWarningLevel 32 381
103
104
52 OWTripLevel 32 384
105
106
53 OWWarningLevel 32 385
107
108
54
UVARCInhibitTime 8 386
UVARCTripDelay 8387
109
OVARCInhibitTime 8 390
OVARCTripDelay 8391
110
55 UVARCTripLevel 32 388
111
112
56 UVARCWarnLevel 32 389
113
114
57 OVARCTripLevel 32 392
115
116
58 OVARCWarnLevel 32 393
117
I
N
TDINT1514131211109876543210Size (bits)Param
238 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix B Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
118
59
UVARGInhibitTime 8 394
UVARGTripDelay 8395
119
OVARGInhibitTime 8 398
OVARGTripDelay 8399
120
60 UVARGTripLevel 32 396
121
122
61 UVARGWarnLevel 32 397
123
124
62 OVARGTripLevel 32 400
125
126
63 OVARGWarnLevel 32 401
127
128
64
UVAInhibitTime 8 402
UVATripDelay 8403
129
OVAInhibitTime 8 406
OVATripDelay 8407
130
65 UVATripLevel 32 404
131
132
66 UVAWarningLevel 32 405
133
134
67 OVATripLevel 32 408
135
136
68 OVAWarningLevel 32 409
137
138
69
UPFLagInhibTime 8 410
UPFLagTripDelay 8411
139
UPFLagTripLevel 8 412
UPFLagWarnLevel 8 413
140
70
OPFLagInhibTime 8 414
OPFLagTripDelay 8415
141
OPFLagTripLevel 8 416
OPFLagWarnLevel 8 417
142
71
UPFLeadInhibTime 8 418
UPFLeadTripDelay 8 419
143
UPFLeadTripLevel 8 420
UPFLeadWarnLevel 8 421
144
72
OPFLeadInhibTime 8 422
OPFLeadTripDelay 8 423
145
OPFLeadTripDelay 8 424
OPFLeadWarnLevel 8 425
146
73
Screen1Param1 16 428
147 Screen1Param2 16 429
148
74
Screen1Param3 16 430
149 Reserved 16 1103
150
75
Reserved 16 1103
151 Reserved 16 1103
152
76
Reserved 16 1103
153 Reserved
16 1103
15
4
77
Re
served 16 1103
155 Reserved 16 1103
INTDINT1514131211109876543210Size (bits)Param
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 239
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects Appendix B
156
78
InAMod1C0TripDly 8 443
InAMod1C1TripDly 8 452
157
InAMod1C2TripDly 8 461
Reserved 8 1102
158
79
InAMod1C0TripLvl 16 444
159 InAMod1C0WarnLvl 16 445
160
80
InAMod1C1TripLvl 16 453
161 InAMod1C1WarnLvl 16 454
162
81
InAMod1C2TripLvl 16 462
163 InAMod1C2WarnLvl 16 463
164
82
InAnMod1Ch00Type 5 437
InAnMod1Ch01Type 5 446
InAnMod1Ch02Type 5 455
X Reserved 1 1101
165
OutAnMod1Select 8 465
XXXInAMod1Ch0Format 3 438
X X X InAMod1C0FiltFrq 3 440
X X InAMod1C0OpCktSt 2 441
166
83
InAMod1Ch1Format XXX3 447
InAMod1C1FiltFrq X X X 3 449
InAMod1C1OpCktSt X X 2 450
XXXInAMod1Ch2Format 3 456
X X X InAMod1C2FiltFrq 3 458
X X InAMod1C2OpCktSt 2 459
167
InAMod1C0TmpUnit X 1 439
InAnMod1Ch0RTDEn X 1 442
InAMod1C1TmpUnit X 1 448
InAnMod1Ch1RTDEn X 1 451
InAMod1C2TmpUnit X 1 457
InAnMod1Ch2RTDEn X 1 460
OutAnMod1FltActn X X 2 466
X X OutAnMod1IdlActn 2 467
X X X X OutAnMod1Type 4 464
X X Reserved 2 1101
168
84
InAMod2C0TripDly 8 474
InAMod2C1TripDly 8 483
169
InAMod2C2TripDly 8 492
Reserved 8 1102
170
85
InAMod2C0TripLvl 16 475
171 InAMod2C0WarnLvl 16 476
172
86
InAMod2C1TripLvl 16 484
173 InAMod2C1WarnLvl 16 485
174
87
InAMod2C2TripLvl 16 493
175 InAMod2C2WarnLvl 16 494
INTDINT1514131211109876543210Size (bits)Param
240 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix B Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
176
88
InAnMod2Ch00Type 5 468
InAnMod2Ch01Type 5 477
InAnMod2Ch02Type 5 486
X Reserved 1 1101
177
OutAnMod2Select 8 496
XXXInAMod2Ch0Format 3 469
X X X InAMod2C0FiltFrq 3 471
X X InAMod2C0OpCktSt 2 472
178
89
InAMod2Ch1Format XXX3 478
InAMod2C1FiltFrq X X X 3 480
InAMod2C1OpCktSt X X 2 481
XXXInAMod2Ch2Format 3 487
X X X InAMod2C2FiltFrq 3 489
X X InAMod2C2OpCktSt 2 490
179
InAMod2C0TmpUnit X 1 470
InAnMod2Ch0RTDEn X 1 473
InAMod2C1TmpUnit X 1 479
InAnMod2Ch1RTDEn X 1 482
InAMod2C2TmpUnit X 1 488
InAnMod2Ch2RTDEn X 1 491
OutAnMod2FltActn X X 2 497
X X OutAnMod2dlActn 2 498
X X X X OutAnMod2Type 4 495
X X Reserved 2 1101
180
90
InAMod3C0TripDly 8 505
InAMod3C1TripDly 8 514
181
InAMod3C2TripDly 8 523
Reserved 8 1102
182
91
InAMod3C0TripLvl 16 506
183 InAMod3C0WarnLvl 16 507
184
92
InAMod3C1TripLvl 16 515
185 InAMod3C1WarnLvl 16 516
186
93
InAMod3C2TripLvl 16 524
187 InAMod3C2WarnLvl 16 525
188
94
InAnMod3Ch00Type 5 499
InAnMod3Ch01Type 5 508
InAnMod3Ch02Type 5 517
X Reserved 1N/A
189
OutAnMod3Select 8 527
XXXInAMod3Ch0Format 3 500
X X X InAMod3C0FiltFrq 3 502
X X InAMod3C0OpCktSt 2 503
INTDINT1514131211109876543210Size (bits)Param
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 241
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects Appendix B
190
95
InAMod3Ch1Format XXX3 509
InAMod3C1FiltFrq X X X 3 511
InAMod3C1OpCktSt X X 2 512
XXXInAMod3Ch2Format 3 518
X X X InAMod3C2FiltFrq 3 520
X X InAMod3C2OpCktSt 2 521
191
InAMod3C0TmpUnit X 1 501
InAnMod3Ch0RTDEn X 1 504
InAMod3C1TmpUnit X 1 510
InAnMod3Ch1RTDEn X 1 513
InAMod3C2TmpUnit X 1 519
InAnMod3Ch2RTDEn X 1 522
OutAnMod3FltActn X X 2 528
X X OutAnMod3dlActn 2 529
X X X X OutAnMod3Type 4 526
X X Reserved 2 1101
192
96
InAMod4C0TripDly 8 536
InAMod4C1TripDly 8 545
193
InAMod4C2TripDly 8 554
Reserved 8 1102
194
97
InAMod4C0TripLvl 16 537
195 InAMod4C0WarnLvl 16 538
196
98
InAMod4C1TripLvl 16 546
197 InAMod4C1WarnLvl 16 547
198
99
InAMod4C2TripLvl 16 555
199 InAMod4C2WarnLvl 16 556
200
100
InAnMod4Ch00Type 5 530
InAnMod4Ch01Type 5 539
InAnMod4Ch02Type 5 548
X Reserved 1 1101
201
OutAnMod4Select 8 558
XXXInAMod4Ch0Format 3 531
X X X InAMod4C0FiltFrq 3 533
X X InAMod4C0OpCktSt 2 534
202
101
InAMod4Ch1Format XXX3 540
InAMod4C1FiltFrq X X X 3 542
InAMod4C1OpCktSt X X 2 543
XXXInAMod4Ch2Format 3 549
X X X InAMod4C2FiltFrq 3 551
X X InAMod4C2OpCktSt 2 552
203
InAMod3C0TmpUnit X 1 532
InAnMod4Ch0RTDEn X 1 535
InAMod4C1TmpUnit X 1 541
InAnMod4Ch1RTDEn X 1 544
InAMod4C2TmpUnit X 1 550
InAnMod4Ch2RTDEn X 1 553
OutAnMod4FltActn X X 2 559
X X OutAnMod4dlActn 2 560
X X X X OutAnMod4Type 4 557
X X Reserved 2 1001
INTDINT1514131211109876543210Size (bits)Param
242 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix B Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
Instance 120 - Configuration Assembly Revision 1
Tab le 69 shows Attribute 3 Format and Attribute 2 Member List for revision 1 of the
assembly. This is a stripped down simple version of a config assembly.
Table 69 - Instance 120 — Configuration Assembly
Instance 144 – Default Consumed Assembly
Table 70 - Instance 144 – Default Consumed Assembly
Instance 198 - Current Diagnostics Produced Assembly
Table 71 - Instance 198 – Current Diagnostics Produced Assembly
INTDINT1514131211109876543210Size (bits)Param
0
0
ConfigAssyRev = 1 Reserved 16 1002
1Reserved 16 N/A
2
1FLASetting 32 171
3
4
3
TripClass 8 172
X OLPTCResetMode 1 173
X SingleOrThreePh 1 176
XXXXXX Reserved 6 N/A
5
OLResetLevel 8 174
OLWarningLevel 8175
INTDINT1514131211109876543210Size (bits)Path
0
0
OutputStatus0 16 Param18
1
NetworkStart1 (O.LogicDefinedPt00Data) X Symbolic
NetworkStart2 (O.LogicDefinedPt01Data) X Symbolic
TripReset X Symbolic
EmergencyStart X Symbolic
RemoteTrip X Symbolic
Reserved X X X N/A
X HMILED1Green Symbolic
X HMILED2Green Symbolic
X HMILED3Green Symbolic
X HMILED3Red Symbolic
X HMILED4Red Symbolic
XXX Reserved N/A
2
1
DLXPtDeviceIn 16 Symbolic
3 DLXAnDeviceIn 16 Symbolic
INTDINT1514131211109876543210Size (bits)Param
0
0 Reserved for Logix 32 1104
1
2
1
DeviceStaus0 16 20
3 DeviceStaus1 16 21
4
2
InputStatus0 16 16
5 InputStatus1 16 17
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 243
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects Appendix B
6
3
OutputStatus 16 18
7 OpStationStatus 16 19
8
4
TripStsCu rrent 16 4
9WarnStsCurrent 16 10
10
5
TripStsVol tage 16 5
11 WarnStsVoltage 16 11
12
6
TripStsPowe r 16 6
13 WarnStsPower 16 12
14
7
TripStsCo nt rol 16 7
15 WarnStsControl 16 13
16
8
TripStsAnalog 16 8
17 WarnStsAnalog 16 14
18
9
Reserved 16 1103
19 MismatchStatus 16 40
20
10
ThermUtilizedPct 8 1
CurrentImbal 852
21 AvgPercentFLA 16 50
22
11 AverageCurrent 32 46
23
24
12 L1Current 32 43
25
26
13 L2Current 32 44
27
28
14 L3Current 32 45
29
30
15
GFCurrent 16 51
31 Reserved 16 1103
32
16 Datalink1 32 1291
33
34
17 Datalink2 32 1292
35
36
18 Datalink3 32 1293
37
38
19 Datalink4 32 1294
39
40
20 Datalink5 32 1295
41
42
21 Datalink6 32 1296
43
44
22 Datalink7 32 1297
45
46
23
Datalink8 32 1298
47
48
24
PtDeviceOuts 16 348
49 AnDeviceOuts 16 1105
50
25
InAnMod1Ch00 16 111
51 InAnMod1Ch01 16 112
52
26
InAnMod1Ch02 16 113
53 Reserved 16 1103
INTDINT1514131211109876543210Size (bits)Param
244 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix B Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
Instance 199 - All Diagnostics Produced Assembly
Table 72 - Instance 199 - All Diagnostics Produced Assembly
54
27
InAnMod2Ch00 16 114
55 InAnMod2Ch01 16 115
56
28
InAnMod2Ch02 16 116
57 Reserved 16 1103
58
29
InAnMod3Ch00 16 117
59 InAnMod3Ch01 16 118
60
30
InAnMod3Ch02 16 119
61 Reserved 16 1103
62
31
InAnMod4Ch00 16 120
63 InAnMod4Ch01 16 121
64
32
InAnMod4Ch02 16 122
65 Reserved 16 1103
INTDINT1514131211109876543210Size (bits)Param
INTDINT1514131211109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Size (bits)Param
0
0 Reserved for Logix 32 1104
1
2
1
DeviceStaus0 16 20
3DeviceStaus1 16 21
4
2
InputStatus0 16 16
5 InputStatus1 16 17
6
3
OutputStatus 16 18
7OpStationStatus 16 19
8
4
Tri pS ts Current 16 4
9WarnStsCurrent 16 10
10
5
Tri pS ts Voltage 16 5
11 WarnStsVoltage 16 11
12
6
TripStsPower 16 6
13 WarnStsPower 16 12
14
7
TripStsControl 16 7
15 WarnStsControl 16 13
16
8
Tri pS ts An alo g 16 8
17 WarnStsAnalog 16 14
18
9
Reserved 16 1104
19 16 40
20
10
ThermUtilizedPct 8 1
CurrentImbalance 8 52
21 AvgPercentFLA 16 50
22
11 AverageCurrent 32 46
23
24
12 L1Current 32 43
25
26
13 L2Current 32 44
27
28
14 L3Current 32 45
29
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 245
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects Appendix B
30
15
GFCurrent 16 51
31 Reserved 16 1103
32
16
AvgVoltageLtoL 16 56
33 L1toL2Voltage 16 53
34
17
L2toL3Voltage 16 54
35 L3toL1Voltage 16 55
36
18 TotalRealPower 32 67
37
38
19 TotalReactivePwr 32 71
39
40
20 TotalApparentPwr 32 75
41
42
21 TotalPowerFactor 32 79
43
44
22 Datalink0 32 1291
45
46
23 Datalink1 32 1292
47
48
24 Datalink2 32 1293
49
50
25 Datalink3 32 1294
51
52
26 Datalink4 32 1295
53
54
27 Datalink5 32 1296
55
56
28 Datalink6 32 1297
57
58
29 Datalink7 32 1298
59
60
30
PtDeviceOuts 16 348
61 AnDeviceOuts 16 1105
62
31
InAnMod1Ch00 16 111
63 InAnMod1Ch01 16 112
64
32
InAnMod1Ch02 16 113
65 Reserved 16 1103
66
33
InAnMod2Ch00 16 114
67 InAnMod2Ch01 16 115
68
34
InAnMod2Ch02 16 116
69 Reserved 16 1103
70
35
InAnMod3Ch00 16 117
71 InAnMod3Ch01 16 118
72
36
In
AnMod3
Ch02 16 119
73 Reserved 16 1103
74
37
InAnMod4Ch00 16 120
75 InAnMod4Ch01 16 121
76
38
InAnMod4Ch02 16 122
77 Reserved 16 1103
INTDINT1514131211109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Size (bits)Param
246 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix B Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
Connection Object — CLASS CODE 0x0005
No class attributes are supported for the Connection Object
Multiple instances of the Connection Object are supported, instances 1, 2 and 4 from
the group 2 predefined master/slave connection set, and instances 5-7 are available
explicit UCMM connections.
Instance 1 is the Predefined Group 2 Connection Set Explicit Message Connection.
The instance 1 attributes in Ta ble 73
are supported:
Table 73 - Connection Object — CLASS CODE 0x0005 Instance 1 Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value
1 Get State USINT
0=nonexistant
1=configuring
3=established
4=timed out
2 Get Instance Type USINT
0=Explicit
Message
3 Get Transport Class Trigger USINT 0x83 - Server, Transport Class 3
4 Get Produced Connection ID UINT
10xxxxxx011
xxxxxx = node address
5 Get Consumed Connection ID UINT
10xxxxxx100
xxxxxx = node address
6 Get Initial Comm Characteristics USINT 0x22
7 Get Produced Connection Size UINT 0x61
8 Get Consumed Connection Size UINT 0x61
9 Get/Set Expected Packet Rate UINT in milliseconds
12 Get Watchdog Action USINT
01 = auto delete
03 = deferred delete
13 Get Produced Connection Path Length UINT 0
14 Get Produced Connection Path Empty
15 Get Consumed Connection Path Length UINT 0
16 Get Consumed Connection Path Empty
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 247
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects Appendix B
Instance 2 is the Predefined Group 2 Connection Set Polled IO Message Connection.
The instance 2 attributes in Ta ble 74
are supported:
Table 74 - Connection Object — CLASS CODE 0x0005 Instance 2 Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data
Type
Value
1GetState USINT
0=nonexistant
1=configuring
3=established
4=timed out
2 Get Instance Type USINT 1= I/O Connection
3 Get Transport Class Trigger USINT
0x82 - Server, Transport Class 2
(If alloc_choice != polled and ack
suppression is enabled
then value = 0x80)
4 Get Produced Connection ID UINT
01111xxxxxx
xxxxxx= node address
5 Get Consumed Connection ID UINT
10xxxxxx101
xxxxxx= node address
6 Get Initial Comm Characteristics USINT 0x21
7 Get Produced Connection Size UINT 0 to 8
8 Get Consumed Connection Size UINT 0 to 8
9 Get/Set Expected Packet Rate UINT in milliseconds
12 Get/Set Watchdog Action USINT
0=transition to timed out
1=auto delete
2=auto reset
13 Get Produced Connection Path Length UINT 8
14 Get/Set Produced Connection Path 21 04 00 25 (assy inst) 00 30 03
15 Get Consumed Connection Path Length UINT 8
16 Get/Set Consumed Connection Path 21 04 00 25 (assy inst) 00 30 03
248 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix B Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
Instance 4 is the Predefined Group 2 Connection Set Change of State / Cyclic I/O
Message Connection. The instance 4 attributes in Ta b le 7 5
are supported:
Table 75 - Connection Object — CLASS CODE 0x0005 Instance 4 Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value
1GetState USINT
0=nonexistant
1=configuring
3=established
4=timed out
2 Get Instance Type USINT 1=I/O Connection
3 Get Transport Class Trigger USINT
0x00 (Cyclic, unacknowledged)
0x03 (Cyclic, acknowledged)
0x10 (COS, unacknowledged)
0x13 (COS, acknowledged)
4 Get Produced Connection ID UINT
01101xxxxxx
xxxxxx= node address
5 Get Consumed Connection ID UINT
10xxxxxx101
xxxxxx= node address
6 Get Initial Comm Characteristics USINT
0x02 (acknowledged)
0x0F (unacknowledged)
7 Get Produced Connection Size UINT 0 to 8
8 Get Consumed Connection Size UINT 0 to 8
9 Get/Set Expected Packet Rate UINT in milliseconds
12 Get Watchdog Action USINT
0=transition to timed out
1=auto delete
2=auto reset
13 Get Produced Connection Path Length UINT 8
14 Get Produced Connection Path 21 04 00 25 (assy inst) 00 30 03
15 Get Consumed Connection Path Length UINT 8
16 Get/Set Consumed Connection Path 21 04 00 25 (assy inst) 00 30 03
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 249
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects Appendix B
Instances 5 - 7 are available group 3 explicit message connections that are allocated
through the UCMM. The attributes in Tab le 76
are supported:
Table 76 - Connection Object — CLASS CODE 0x0005 Instance 5…7 Attributes
The services in Ta b l e 7 7
are implemented for the Connection Object.
Table 77 - Connection Object Services
Discrete Input Point Object — CLASS CODE 0x0008
The class attributes in Ta ble 78 are supported for the Discrete Input Point Object:
Table 78 - Discrete Input Point Object Class Attributes
22 instances of the Discrete Input Point Object are supported.
Table 79 - Discrete Input Point Object Instances
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value
1 Get State USINT
0=nonexistant
1=configuring
3=established
4=timed out
2 Get Instance Type USINT
0=Explicit
Message
3 Get Transport Class Trigger USINT 0x83 - Server, Transport Class 3
4 Get Produced Connection ID UINT
Depends on message group and
Message ID
5 Get Consumed Connection ID UINT
Depends on message group and
Message ID
6 Get Initial Comm Characteristics USINT 0x33 (Group 3)
7 Get Produced Connection Size UINT 0
8 Get Consumed Connection Size UINT
9 Get/Set Expected Packet Rate UINT in milliseconds
12 Get Watchdog Action USINT
01 = auto delete
03 = deferred delete
13 Get Produced Connection Path Length UINT 0
14 Get Produced Connection Path Empty
15 Get
Consumed Connection Path
Length
UINT 0
16 Get Consumed Connection Path Empty
Service Code Implemented for: Service Name
Class Instance
0x05 No Yes Reset
0x0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value
1 Get Revision UINT 2
2 Get Max. Instance UINT 22
Instance Name Description
1 InputPt00 Control Module Input 0
2 InputPt01 Control Module Input 1
250 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix B Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
All instances contain the attributes in Ta ble 80.
Table 80 - Discrete Input Point Object Instance Attributes
The common services in Ta ble 81
are implemented for the Discrete Input Point
Object.
Table 81 - Discrete Input Point Object Common Services
Discrete Output Point Object — CLASS CODE 0x0009
The class attributes in Ta ble 82 are supported for the Discrete Output Point Object:
Table 82 - Discrete Output Point Object Class Attributes
11 instances of the Discrete Output Point Object are supported.
3 InputPt02 Control Module Input 2
4 InputPt03 Control Module Input 3
5 InputPt04 Control Module Input 4
6 InputPt05 Control Module Input 5
7 InputDigMod1Pt00 Digital Expansion Module 1 Input 0
8 InputDigMod1Pt01 Digital Expansion Module 1 Input 1
9 InputDigMod1Pt02 Digital Expansion Module 1 Input 2
10 InputDigMod1Pt03 Digital Expansion Module 1 Input 3
11 InputDigMod2Pt00 Digital Expansion Module 2 Input 0
12 InputDigMod2Pt01 Digital Expansion Module 2 Input 1
13 InputDigMod2Pt02 Digital Expansion Module 2 Input 2
14 InputDigMod2Pt03 Digital Expansion Module 2 Input 3
15 InputDigMod3Pt00 Digital Expansion Module 3 Input 0
16 InputDigMod3Pt01 Digital Expansion Module 3 Input 1
17 InputDigMod3Pt02 Digital Expansion Module 3 Input 2
18 InputDigMod3Pt03 Digital Expansion Module 3 Input 3
19 InputDigMod4Pt00 Digital Expansion Module 4 Input 0
20 InputDigMod4Pt01 Digital Expansion Module 4 Input 1
21 InputDigMod4Pt02 Digital Expansion Module 4 Input 2
22 InputDigMod4Pt03 Digital Expansion Module 4 Input 3
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value
3 Get Value BOOL 0=OFF, 1=ON
115 Get/Set Force Enable BOOL 0=Disable, 1=Enable
116 Get/Set Force Value BOOL 0=OFF, 1=ON
Service Code Implemented for: Service Name
Class Instance
0x0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value
1 Get Revision UINT 1
2 Get Max. Instance UINT 11
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 251
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects Appendix B
Table 83 - Discrete Output Point Object Instances
All instances contains the attributes in Ta b le 8 4
.
Table 84 - Discrete Output Point Object Instance Attributes
The common services in Ta ble 85
are implemented for the Discrete Output Point
Object.
Table 85 - Discrete Output Point Object Common Services
Analog Input Point Object — CLASS CODE 0x000A
The class attributes in Ta ble 86 are supported for the Analog Input Point Object:
Instance Name Description
1 OutputPt00 Control Module Output 0
2 OutputPt01 Control Module Output 1
3 OutputPt02 Control Module Output 2
4 OutDigMod1Pt00 Digital Expansion Module 1 Output 0
5 OutDigMod1Pt01 Digital Expansion Module 1 Output 1
6 OutDigMod2Pt00 Digital Expansion Module 2 Output 0
7 OutDigMod2Pt01 Digital Expansion Module 2 Output 1
8 OutDigMod3Pt00 Digital Expansion Module 3 Output 0
9 OutDigMod3Pt01 Digital Expansion Module 3 Output 1
10 OutDigMod4Pt00 Digital Expansion Module 4 Output 0
11 OutDigMod4Pt01 Digital Expansion Module 4 Output 1
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value
3 Get/Set Value BOOL 0=OFF, 1=ON
5 Get/Set Fault Action BOOL
0=Fault Value attribute, 1=Hold Last
State
6 Get/Set Fault Value BOOL 0=OFF, 1=ON
7 Get/Set Idle Action BOOL
0=Fault Value attribute, 1=Hold Last
State
8 Get/Set Idle Value BOOL 0=OFF, 1=ON
113 Get/Set Pr Fault Action BOOL 0=Pr Fault Value attribute, 1=Ignore
114 Get/Set Pr Fault Value BOOL 0=OFF, 1=ON
115 Get/Set Force Enable BOOL 0=Disable, 1=Enable
116 Get/Set Force Value BOOL 0=OFF, 1=ON
117 Get/Set Input Binding
STRUCT:
USINT
Array of USINT
Size of appendix I encoded path
Appendix I encoded path: NULL path
means attribute 3 drives the output.
Otherwise, this is a path to a bit in an
instance of the DeviceLogix Data Table.
Service Code Implemented for: Service Name
Class Instance
0x0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single
252 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix B Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
Table 86 - Analog Input Point Object Class Attributes
12 Instances of the Analog Input Point Object are supported. The raw analog value is
scaled appropriately to the analog input configuration parameters and the scaled value
are placed in the Value attribute.
Table 87 - Analog Input Point Object Instances
All instances contains the attributes in Ta b le 8 8
.
Table 88 - Analog Input Point Object Instance Attributes
The common services in Table 89
are implemented for the Analog Input Point Object.
Table 89 - Analog Input Point Object Common Services
Parameter Object — CLASS CODE 0x000F
The class attributes in Ta ble 90 are supported for the Parameter Object:
Table 90 - Parameter Object Class Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value
1 Get Revision UINT 2
2 Get Max. Instance UINT 1
Instance Name Description
1 InAnMod1Ch00 Analog Expansion Module 1 Input Channel 0
2 InAnMod1Ch01 Analog Expansion Module 1 Input Channel 1
3 InAnMod1Ch02 Analog Expansion Module 1 Input Channel 2
4 InAnMod2Ch00 Analog Expansion Module 2 Input Channel 0
5 InAnMod2Ch01 Analog Expansion Module 2 Input Channel 1
6 InAnMod2Ch02 Analog Expansion Module 2 Input Channel 2
7 InAnMod3Ch00 Analog Expansion Module 3 Input Channel 0
8 InAnMod3Ch01 Analog Expansion Module 3 Input Channel 1
9 InAnMod3Ch02 Analog Expansion Module 3 Input Channel 2
10 InAnMod4Ch00 Analog Expansion Module 4 Input Channel 0
11 InAnMod4Ch01 Analog Expansion Module 4 Input Channel 1
12 InAnMod4Ch02 Analog Expansion Module 4 Input Channel 2
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value
3GetValue INT Default = 0
8 Get Value Data Type USINT 0=INT
148 Get/Set Force Enable BOOL 0=Disable, 1=Enable
149 Get/Set Force Value INT Default = 0
Service Code Implemented for: Service Name
Class Instance
0x0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value
1GetRevision UINT 1
2 Get Max Instance UINT 560
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 253
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects Appendix B
The instance attributes in Ta ble 91 are implemented for all parameter attributes.
Table 91 - Parameter Object Instance Attributes
The services in Ta b l e 9 2
are implemented for the Parameter Object.
Table 92 - Parameter Object Common Services
Parameter Group Object — CLASS CODE 0x0010
The class attributes in Ta ble 93 are supported for the Parameter Object:
Table 93 - Parameter Object Class Attributes
8 Get Parameter Class Descriptor WORD 0x03
9 Get Configuration Assembly Instance UINT 0
10 Get Native Language UINT 1 = English
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value
1 Get/Set Value Specified in Descriptor
2 Get Link Path Size USINT 08
3GetLink Path
Array of:
BYTE
EPATH
Path to specified object attribute.
4 Get Descriptor WORD Parameter Dependent
5 Get Data Type EPATH Parameter Dependent
6 Get Data Size USINT Parameter Dependent
7 Get Parameter Name String SHORT_STRING Parameter Dependent
8 Get Units String SHORT_STRING Parameter Dependent
9 Get Help String SHORT_STRING Parameter Dependent
10 Get Minimum Value Specified in Descriptor Parameter Dependent
11 Get Maximum Value Specified in Descriptor Parameter Dependent
12 Get Default Value Specified in Descriptor Parameter Dependent
13 Get Scaling Multiplier UINT 01
14 Get Scaling Divisor UINT 01
15 Get Scaling Base UINT 01
16 Get Scaling Offset INT 00
17 Get Multiplier Link UINT 0
18 Get Divisor Link UINT 0
19 Get Base Link UINT 0
20 Get Offset Link UINT 0
21 Get Decimal Precision USINT Parameter Dependent
Service Code Implemented for: Service Name
Class Instance
0x0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value
1 Get Revision UINT 1
2 Get Max Instance UINT 23
8 Get Native Language USINT 1 = English
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value
254 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix B Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
The instance attributes in Ta ble 94 are supported for all parameter group instances and
are implemented for all parameter attributes.
Table 94 - Parameter Group Object Instance Attributes
The common services in Ta ble 95
are implemented for the Parameter Group Object.
Table 95 - Parameter Group Object Common Services
Discrete Output Group Object — CLASS CODE 0x001E
No class attributes are supported for the Discrete Output Group Object.
Five instances of the Discrete Output Group Object are supported.
Tab le 96
lists the attributes for Instance 1:
Table 96 - Discrete Output Group Object Instance 1 Attributes
Instances 2-5 each represent a single expansion module. They have the attributes listed
in Table 97
.
Table 97 - Discrete Output Group Object Instance 2…5 Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value
1 Get Group Name String SHORT_STRING
2 Get Number of Members UINT
3Get1
st
Parameter UINT
4Get2
nd
Parameter UINT
n Get Nth Parameter UINT
Service Code Implemented for: Service Name
Class Instance
0x0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value
3 Get Number of Instances USINT 11
4 Get Binding Array of UINT 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11
6 Get/Set Command BOOL 0=idle; 1=run
104 Get/Set
Network Status
Override
BOOL
0=No Override (go to safe state)
1=Override (run local logic)
105 Get/Set Comm Status Override BOOL
0=No override (go to safe state)
1=Override (run local logic)
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value
3 Get Number of Instances USINT 2
4 Get Binding Array of UINT
Instance 2: 4, 5
Instance 3: 6, 7
Instance 4: 8, 9
Instance 5: 10, 11
6 Get/Set Command BOOL 0=idle; 1=run
7 Get/Set Fault Action BOOL 0=Fault Value Attribute, 1=Hold Last State
8 Get/Set Fault Value BOOL 0=OFF, 1=ON
9 Get/Set Idle Action BOOL 0=Idle Value Attribute, 1=Hold Last State
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 255
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects Appendix B
The common services in Ta ble 98are implemented for the Discrete Output Group
Object.
Table 98 - Discrete Output Group Object Common Services
Control Supervisor Object — CLASS CODE 0x0029
No class attributes are supported.
A single instance (instance 1) of the Control Supervisor Object is supported.
Table 99 - Control Supervisor Object Instance 1 Attributes
The common services in Ta ble 100
are implemented for the Control Supervisor
Object.
Table 100 - Control Supervisor Object Common Services
Overload Object — CLASS CODE 0x002c
No class attributes are supported for the Overload Object.
A single instance (instance 1) of the Overload Object is supported.
Table 101 - Overload Object Instance 1 Attributes
10 Get/Set Idle Value BOOL 0=OFF, 1=ON
113 Get/Set Pr Fault Action BOOL 0=Pr Fault Value Attribute, 1=Ignore
114 Get/Set Pr Fault Value BOOL 0=OFF, 1=ON
Service Code Implemented for: Service Name
Class Instance
0x0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value
10 Get Tripped BOOL
0 = No Fault present
1 = Fault Latched
11 Get Warning BOOL
0 = No Warning present
1 = Warning present (not latched)
12 Get/Set Fault Reset BOOL
0->1 = Trip Reset
otherwise no action
Service Code Implemented for: Service Name
Class Instance
0x0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value
4 Get/Set Trip Class USINT 5…30
5 Get Average Current INT xxx.x Amps (tenths of amps)
6 Get %Phase Imbal USINT xxx% FLA
7 Get % Thermal Utilized USINT xxx% FLA
8 Get Current L1 INT xxx.x Amps (tenths of amps)
256 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix B Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
The common services in Ta ble 102 are implemented for the Overload Object.
Table 102 - Overload Object Common Services
Base Energy Object — CLASS CODE 0x004E
The class attributes in Table 103are supported for the Base Energy Object.
Table 103 - Base Energy Object Class Attributes
A single instance of the Base Energy Object is supported
Table 104 - Base Energy Instance Attributes
The services in Ta b l e 1 05
are implemented for the Base Energy Object.
9 Get Current L2 INT xxx.x Amps (tenths of amps)
10 Get Current L3 INT xxx.x Amps (tenths of amps)
11 Get GF Current INT 0.00 – 12.75 Amps
Service Code Implemented for: Service Name
Class Instance
0x0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value
1 Get Object Revision USINT 2
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value
1 Get Energy/Resource Type UINT 1 = Electrical
2Get
Energy Object
Capabilities
WORD 0x0001 = Energy Measured
3 Get Energy Accuracy UINT
500 = 5.00 percent of full scale
reading
4 Get Energy Accuracy Basis UINT 1 = Percent of full scale reading
5Get
Full Scale Power
Reading
Real x.xxx kW
7Get
Consumed Energy
Odometer
ODOMETER Returns params 80-84 values.
9 Get Total Energy Odometer SIGNED ODOMETER Returns params 80-84 values.
10 Get Total Real Power REAL Param 67 value converted to a REAL
12 Get
Energy Type Specific
Object Path
STRUCT of UINT
Padded EPATH
03 00 21 00 4F 00 24 01
16 Set Odometer Reset Enable BOOL
0 = Disabled (Default)
1 = Enabled
Enables resetting of Energy
Odometers by Reset service
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 257
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects Appendix B
Table 105 - Base Energy Object Common Services
Table 106
describes the Get_Attributes_All response.
Table 106 - Base Energy Object Class Attributes Get_Attributes_All Response
Electrical Energy Object — CLASS CODE 0x004F
No class attributes are supported for the Electrical Energy Object.
A single instance of the Electrical Energy Object is supported
Table 107 - Electrical Energy Object Instance Attributes
Service Code Implemented for: Service Name
Class Instance
0x01 No Yes GetAttributes_All
0x05 No Yes Reset
0x0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single
Attribute ID Data Type Name Value
1 UINT Energy/Resource Type Attribute 1 value
2 WORD Energy Object Capabilities Attribute 2 value
3 UINT Energy Accuracy Attribute 3 value
4 UINT Energy Accuracy Basis Attribute 4 value
5 REAL Full Scale Reading Attribute 5 value
6 UINT Data Status 0
7 ODOMETER Consumed Energy Odometer 0Attribute 7 value
8 ODOMETER Generated Energy Odometer 0,0,0,0,0
9
SIGNED
ODOMETER
Total Energy Odometer Attribute 9 value
10 REAL Energy Transfer Rate Attribute 10 value
11 REAL Energy Transfer Rate User Setting 0.0
12
STRUCT of UINT,
Padded EPATH
Energy Type Specific Object Path Attribute 12 value
13 UINT
Energy Aggregation Path Array
Size
0
14
Array of STRUCT
of UINT, Padded
EPATH
1
Energy Aggregation Paths Null
15 STRINGI Energy Identifier
LanguageChar1 USINT =‘e’
LanguageChar2 USINT)=‘n’
LanguageChar3 USINT) =‘g’
CharStringStruct USINT=0xD0
CharSet UINT = 0 = undefined
InternationalString = null
16 BOOL Odometer Reset Enable Attribute 16 value
17 BOOL Metering State 1
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value
1Get
Real Energy Consumed
Odometer
ODOMETER Returns params 80-84 values.
3Get
Real Energy Net
Odometer
SIGNED
ODOMEETER
Returns params 80-84 values.
4Get
Reactive Energy
Consumed Odometer
ODOMETER Returns params 85-89 values.
258 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix B Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
The services in Ta b l e 1 08 are implemented for the Electrical Energy Object.
Table 108 - Electrical Energy Object Common Services
5Get
Reactive Energy
Generated Odometer
ODOMETER Returns params 90-94 values.
6Get
Reactive Energy Net
Odometer
SIGNED ODOMETER Returns params 95-99 values.
7Get
Apparent Energy
Odometer
ODOMETER Returns params 100-104 values.
9 Get Line Frequency REAL Param 62 value converted to a REAL
10 Get L1 Current REAL Param 43 value converted to a REAL
11 Get L2 Current REAL Param 44 value converted to a REAL
12 Get L3 Current REAL Param 45 value converted to a REAL
13 Get Average Current REAL Param 46 value converted to a REAL
14 Get
Percent Current
Unbalance
REAL Param 52 value converted to a REAL
15 Get L1 to N Voltage REAL Param 57 value converted to a REAL
16 Get L2 to N Voltage REAL Param 58 value converted to a REAL
17 Get L3 to N Voltage REAL Param 59 value converted to a REAL
18 Get Avg Voltage L to N REAL Param 60 value converted to a REAL
19 Get L1 to L2 Voltage REAL Param 53 value converted to a REAL
20 Get L2 to L3 Voltage REAL Param 54 value converted to a REAL
21 Get L3 to L1 Voltage REAL Param 55 value converted to a REAL
22 Get Avg Voltage Lto N REAL Param 56 value converted to a REAL
23 Get
Percent Voltage
Unbalance
REAL Param 61 value converted to a REAL
24 Get L1 Real Power REAL Param 64 value converted to a REAL
25 Get L2 Real Power REAL Param 65 value converted to a REAL
26 Get L3 Real Power REAL Param 66 value converted to a REAL
27 Get Total Real Power REAL Param 67 value converted to a REAL
28 Get L1 Reactive Power REAL Param 68 value converted to a REAL
29 Get L2 Reactive Power REAL Param 68 value converted to a REAL
30 Get L3 Reactive Power REAL Param 70 value converted to a REAL
31 Get Total Reactive Power REAL Param 71 value converted to a REAL
32 Get L1 Apparent Power REAL Param 72 value converted to a REAL
33 Get L2 Apparent Power REAL Param 73 value converted to a REAL
34 Get L3 Apparent Power REAL Param 74 value converted to a REAL
35 Get Total Apparent Power REAL Param 75 value converted to a REAL
36 Get L1 True Power Factor REAL Param 76 value converted to a REAL
37 Get L2 True Power Factor REAL Param 77 value converted to a REAL
38 Get L3 True Power Factor REAL Param 78 value converted to a REAL
39 Get
Three Phase True Power
Factor
REAL Param 79 value converted to a REAL
40 Get Phase Rotation UINT Param 63 value
41 Get
Associated Energy
Object Path
STRUCT of UINT
Padded EPATH
03 00 21 00 4E 00 24 01
Service Code Implemented for: Service Name
Class Instance
0x01 No Yes GetAttributes_All
0x0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 259
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects Appendix B
Table 109 describes the Get_Attributes_All response.
Table 109 - Electrical Energy Object Class Attributes Get_Attributes_All Response
Attribute ID Data Type Name Value
1 Array[5] of INT Real Energy Consumed Odometer Attribute 1 Value
2 Array[5] of INT Real Energy Generated Odometer 0.0.0.0.0
3 Array[5] of INT Real Energy Net Odometer Attribute 3 Value
4 Array[5] of INT
Reactive Energy Consumed
Odometer
Attribute 4 Value
5 Array[5] of INT
Reactive Energy Generated
Odometer
Attribute 5 Value
6 Array[5] of INT Reactive Energy Net Odometer Attribute 6 Value
7 Array[5] of INT Apparent Energy Odometer Attribute 7 Value
8 Array[5] of INT 0.0.0.0.0
9 REAL Line Frequency Attribute 9 Value
10 REAL L1 Current Attribute 10 Value
11 REAL L2 Current Attribute 11 Value
12 REAL L3 Current Attribute 12 Value
13 REAL Average Current Attribute 13 Value
14 REAL Percent Current Unbalance Attribute 14 Value
15 REAL L1 to N Voltage Attribute 15 Value
16 REAL L2 to N Voltage Attribute 16 Value
17 REAL L3 to N Voltage Attribute 17 Value
18 REAL Avg Voltage L to N Attribute 18 Value
19 REAL L1 to L2 Voltage Attribute 19 Value
20 REAL L2 to L3 Voltage Attribute 20 Value
21 REAL L3 to L1 Voltage Attribute 21 Value
22 REAL Avg Voltage Lto N Attribute 22 Value
23 REAL Percent Voltage Unbalance Attribute 23 Value
24 REAL L1 Real Power Attribute 24 Value
25 REAL L2 Real Power Attribute 25 Value
26 REAL L3 Real Power Attribute 26 Value
27 REAL Total Real Power Attribute 27 Value
28 REAL L1 Reactive Power Attribute 28 Value
29 REAL L2 Reactive Power Attribute 29 Value
30 REAL L3 Reactive Power Attribute 30 Value
31 REAL Total Reactive Power Attribute 31 Value
32 REAL L1 Apparent Power Attribute 32 Value
33 REAL L2 Apparent Power Attribute 33 Value
34 REAL L3 Apparent Power Attribute 34 Value
35 REAL Total Apparent Power Attribute 35 Value
36 REAL L1 True Power Factor Attribute 36 Value
37 REAL L2 True Power Factor Attribute 37 Value
38 REAL L3 True Power Factor Attribute 38 Value
39 REAL Three Phase True Power Factor Attribute 39 Value
40 UINT Phase Rotation Attribute 40 Value
41
STRUCT of UINT
Padded EPATH
Associated Energy Object Path Attribute 41 Value
260 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix B Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
Wall Clock Time Object — CLASS CODE 0x008B
The class attributes in Table 110are supported:
Table 110 - Wall Clock Time Object Class Attributes
One instance is supported:
Table 111 - Wall Clock Time Object Instance Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value
1 Get Object Revision UINT 3
2 Get Number of Instances UINT 1
Attribute
ID
Access Rule Name Data Type Value
2 Set Time Zone UINT
Time zone in which Current value is being used
(Never been used)
3 Set / SSV Offset from CSV LINT
64-bit offset value in µS that when added to
the CST value yields the Current_UTC_Value
4Set
Local Time
Adjustment
WORD
Set of flags for specific local time adjustments
(Never been used)
5 Set / SSV
Date and Time
(Local Time)
DINT[7] –
Array of seven DINTs
Current adjusted time in human readable
format.
DINT[0] – year
DINT[1] – month
DINT[2] – day
DINT[3] – hour
DINT[4] – minute
DINT[5] – second
DINT[6] – sec.
6 Set / SSV
Current UT value
(UTC Time)
LINT
Current value of Wall Clock Time.
64-bit µs value
referenced from 0000 hrs January 1, 1970
7 Set / SSV
UTC Date and Time
(UTC Time)
DINT[7] –
Array of seven DINTs
Current time in human readable format.
DINT[0] – year
DINT[1] – month
DINT[2] – day
DINT[3] – hour
DINT[4] – minute
DINT[5] – second
DINT[6] – sec.
8 Set / SSV Time Zone String
Struct of UDINT
SINT[Length]
This string specifies the time zone where the
controller is located, and ultimately the
adjustment in hours and minutes applied to
the UTC value to generate the local time value.
TimeZoneString can be specified in the
following formats:
o UTC+hh:mm <location>
o UTC-hh:mm <location>
hh:mm portion is used internally to calculate
the local time, and the <location> portion is
used to describe the time zone and is optional.
GMT is also accepted
Length of the Data array can be from 10 to 82.
Examples:
UTC-05:00 Eastern Time
UTC+01:00 Coordinated Universal Time
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 261
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects Appendix B
The services in Ta b l e 1 12 are implemented for the Wall Clock Time Object.
Table 112 - Wall Clock Time Object Common Services
DPI Fault Object — CLASS CODE 0x0097
This object provides access to fault information within the device.
The class attributes in Table 113
are supported:
Table 113 - DPI Fault Object Class Attributes
Five instances of the DPI Fault Object are supported.
9 Set / SSV DST Adjustment INT
The number of minutes to be adjusted for
daylight saving time
10 Set / SSV Enable DST USINT
It specifies if we are in daylight saving time or
not. Not internally set. Needs user action.
11 Set
Current value
(local time)
LINT
Adjusted Local value of Wall Clock Time.
64-bit µS value referenced from 0000 hrs
January 1, 1970
Service Code Implemented for: Service Name
Class Instance
0x0E Yes Yes GetAttributes_All
0x10 Yes No Set_Attribute_Single
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value
1 Get Class Revision UINT 1
2 Get Number of Instances UINT 8
3 Get/Set Fault Cmd Write USINT
0=NOP; 1=Clear Fault; 2=Clear Flt
Queue
4 Get Fault Instance Read UINT
The instance of the Fault Queue Entry
containing information about the
Fault that tripped the Device
5 Get Fault Data list Struct of:
Number of Parameter Instances UINT
The total number of parameters
instances stored when a fault occurs
Parameter Instances UINT [x ]
An array of parameters instance
numbers
6 Get Number of Recorded Faults UINT
The number of Faults recorded in the
Fault Queue
Attribute
ID
Access Rule Name Data Type Value
262 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix B Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
Table 114 - DPI Fault Object Instance Attributes
The common services in Ta ble 115
are implemented for the DPI Fault Object.
Table 115 - DPI Fault Object Common Services
Table 116
lists Fault Codes, Fault Text, and Fault Help Strings.
Table 116 - Fault Codes, Fault Text, and Fault Help Strings
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value
0Get
Full / All Info Struct of:
Fault Code UINT See Ta bl e 11 5
Fault Source Struct of:
DPI Port Number USINT 0
Device Object
Instance
USINT 0x2c
Fault Text BYTE[16] See Tab le 115
Fault Time Stamp Struct of:
Timer Value ULINT
Timer Descriptor WORD
Help Object
Instance
UINT
Fault Data
1Get
Basic Info Struct of:
Fault Code UINT See Ta bl e 11 6
Fault Source Struct of:
DPI Port Number USINT 0
Device Object
Instance
USINT 0x2C
Fault Time Stamp Struct of:
Timer Value ULINT
Timer Descriptor WORD
3GetHelp Text STRING See Table 116
Service Code Implemented for: Service Name
Class Instance
0x0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 Yes No Set_Attribute_Single
Fault Code Fault Text Help Text
0 No Fault No Fault Conditions Detected
1 OverloadTrip Motor current overload condition
2 PhaseLossTrip Phase current Loss detected in one of the motor phases
3 GroundFaultTrip Power conductor or motor winding is shorting to ground
4 StallTrip Motor has not reached full speed by the end of Stall Enable Time
5 JamTrip Motor current has exceed the programmed jam trip level
6 UnderloadTrip Motor current has fallen below normal operating levels
7 Current Imbal Phase to phase current imbalance detected
8 L1UnderCurrTrip L1Current was below L1 Undercurrent Level longer than Trip Delay
9 L2UnderCurrTrip L2Current was below L2 Undercurrent Level longer than Trip Delay
10 L3UnderCurrTrip L3Current was below L3 Undercurrent Level longer than Trip Delay
11 L1OverCurrenTrip L1 Current was over L1 Overcurrent Level longer than Trip Delay
12 L2OverCurrenTrip L2 Current was over L2 Overcurrent Level longer than Trip Delay
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 263
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects Appendix B
13 L3OverCurrenTrip L3 Current was over L3 Overcurrent Level longer than Trip Delay
14 L1LineLossTrip L1 Current Lost for longer than the L1 Loss Trip Delay
15 L2LineLossTrip L2 Current Lost for longer than the L2 Loss Trip Delay
16 L3LineLossTrip L3 Current Lost for longer than the L3 Loss Trip Delay
17 UnderVoltageTrip Line to Line Under-Voltage condition detected
18 OverVoltageTrip Line to Line Over-Voltage condition detected
19 VoltageUnbalTrip Phase to phase voltage imbalance detected
20 PhaseRotationTrp The unit detects the supply voltage phases are rotated
21 UnderFreqTrip Line voltage frequency is below trip level
22 OverFreqTrip Line voltage frequency has exceeded trip level
23 Fault23
24 Fault24
25 Fault25
26 Fault26
27 Fault27
28 Fault28
29 Fault29
30 Fault30
31 Fault31
32 Fault32
33 UnderKWTrip Total Real Power(kW)is below trip level
34 OverKWTrip Total Real Power(kW)has exceeded trip level
35 UnderKVARConTrip Under Total Reactive Power Consumed (+kVAR) condition detected
36 OverKVARConTrip Over Total Reactive Power Consumed (+kVAR) condition detected
37 UnderKVARGenTrip Under Total Reactive Power Generated (-kVAR) condition detected
38 OverKVARGenTrip Over Total Reactive Power Generated (-kVAR) condition detected
39 UnderKVATrip Total Apparent Power (VA or kVA or MVA) is below trip level
40 OverKVATrip Total Apparent Power (VA or kVA or MVA) exceeded trip level
41 UnderPFLagTrip Under Total Power Factor Lagging (-PF) condition detected
42 OverPFLagTrip Over Total Power Factor Lagging (-PF) condition detected
43 UnderPFLeadTrip Under Total Power Factor Leading (+PF) condition detected
44 OverPFLeadTrip Over Total Power Factor Leading (+PF) condition detected
45 Fault45
46 Fault46
47 Fault47
48 Fault48
49 TestTrip Test trip caused by holding the Test/Rest button for 2 seconds
50 PTCTrip PTC input indicates that the motor stator windings overheated
51 DLXTrip DeviceLogix defined trip was generated
52 OperStationTrip The Stop button the Operator Station was pressed
53 RemoteTrip Remote trip command detected
54 BlockedStartTrip Maximum starts per hour exceeded
55 Trip55 Hardware configuration fault. Check for shorts on input terminal
56 ConfigTrip Invalid parameter config. See parameters 38-39 for details
57 Trip57
58 DLXFBTimeoutTrip DeviceLogix Feedback Timeout Trip was detected
59 Trip59
60 Trip60
61 Trip61
62 NVSTrip NonVolatile Storage memory problem detected
Fault Code Fault Text Help Text
264 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix B Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
DPI Warning Object — CLASS CODE 0x0098
This object provides access to warning information within the device.
The class attributes in Table 117
are supported:
Table 117 - DPI Warning Object Class Attributes
63 Trip63
64 Trip64
65 InAnMod1Ch00Trip Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 1 exceeded its Trip Level
66 InAnMod1Ch01Trip Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 1 exceeded its Trip Level
67 InAnMod1Ch02Trip Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 1 exceeded its Trip Level
68 InAnMod2Ch00Trip Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 2 exceeded its Trip Level
69 InAnMod2Ch01Trip Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 2 exceeded its Trip Level
70 InAnMod2Ch02Trip Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 2 exceeded its Trip Level
71 InAnMod3Ch00Trip Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 3 exceeded its Trip Level
72 InAnMod3Ch01Trip Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 3 exceeded its Trip Level
73 InAnMod3Ch02Trip Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 3 exceeded its Trip Level
74 InAnMod4Ch00Trip Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 4 exceeded its Trip Level
75 InAnMod4Ch01Trip Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 4 exceeded its Trip Level
76 InAnMod4Ch02Trip Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 4 exceeded its Trip Level
77 Trip77
78 Trip78
79 Trip79
80 Trip80
81 DigitalMod1Trip Digital Expansion Module 1 is not operating properly
82 DigitalMod2Trip Digital Expansion Module 2 is not operating properly
83 DigitalMod3Trip Digital Expansion Module 3 is not operating properly
84 DigitalMod4Trip Digital Expansion Module 4 is not operating properly
85 AnalogMod1Trip Analog Expansion Module 1 is not operating properly
86 AnalogMod2Trip Analog Expansion Module 2 is not operating properly
87 AnalogMod3Trip Analog Expansion Module 3 is not operating properly
88 AnalogMod4Trip Analog Expansion Module 4 is not operating properly
89 Trip89
90 CtlModMismatch Control Module installed does not match the expected type
91 SenseModMismatch Sensing Module installed does not match the expected type
92 CommModMismatch Comms Module installed does not match the expected type
93 OperStatMismatch Operator Station installed does not match expected type
94 DigModMismatch Digital Module installed does not match the expected type
95 AnModMismatch Analog Module installed does not match the expected type
96 Trip96
97 Trip97
98 HardwareFltTrip A hardware fault condition was detected
99 Trip99
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value
1 Get Class Revision UINT 1
2 Get Number of Instances UINT 8
Fault Code Fault Text Help Text
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 265
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects Appendix B
Four instances of the DPI Warning Object are supported.
Table 118 - DPI Warning Object Instance Attributes
The common services in Ta ble 119
are implemented for the DPI Warning Object.
Table 119 - DPI Warning Object Common Services
Table 120
l i s t s Wa rn in g Co d es , Warn i n g Tex t , an d Wa rn in g Help S tring s .
Table 120 - Warning Codes, Warning Text, and Warning Help Strings
3 Get/Set Warning Cmd Write USINT 0=NOP 2=Clear Queue
4 Get Warning Instance Read UINT
The instance of the Warning Queue
Entry containing information about
the most recent warning
6 Get Number of Recorded Faults UINT
The number of Warning recorded in
the Warning Queue
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value
0Get
Full / All Info Struct of:
Warning Code UINT See Table 119
Warning Source Struct of:
DPI Port Number USINT 0
Device Object
Instance
USINT 0x2c
Warning Text BYTE[16] See Table 120
Warning Time
Stamp
Struct of:
Timer Value ULINT
Timer Descriptor WORD
Help Object
Instance
UINT
Fault Data
1Get
Basic Info Struct of:
Warning Code UINT See Table 120
Warning Source Struct of:
DPI Port Number USINT 0
Device Object
Instance
USINT 0x2C
Warning Time
Stamp
Struct of:
Timer Value ULINT
Timer Descriptor WORD
3 Get Help Text STRING See Table 120
Service Code Implemented for: Service Name
Class Instance
0x0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 Yes No Set_Attribute_Single
Warning
Code
Warning Text Warning Help Text
0 No Warning No Warning Conditions Detected
1 OverloadWarning Approaching a motor current overload condition
2Warning2
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value
266 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix B Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
3 Ground Fault Power conductor or motor winding is shorting to ground
4Warning4
5 JamWarning Motor current has exceed the programmed jam warning level
6 UnderloadWarning Motor current has fallen below normal operating levels
7 Current ImbalWarn Phase to phase current imbalance detected
8 L1UnderCurrWarn L1Current was below L1 Undercurrent Warning Level
9 L2UnderCurrWarn L2Current was below L2 Undercurrent Warning Level
10 L3UnderCurrWarn L3Current was below L3 Undercurrent Warning Level
11 L1OverCurrenWarn L1 Current was over L1 Overcurrent Warning Level
12 L2OverCurrenWarn L2 Current was over L2 Overcurrent Warning Level
13 L3OverCurrenWarn L3 Current was over L3 Overcurrent Warning Level
14 L1LineLossWarn L1 Current Lost for longer than the L1 Loss Trip Delay
15 L2LineLossWarn L2 Current Lost for longer than the L2 Loss Trip Delay
16 L3LineLossWarn L3 Current Lost for longer than the L3 Loss Trip Delay
17 UnderVoltageWarn Line to Line Under-Voltage condition detected
18 OvervoltageWarn Line to Line Over-Voltage condition detected
19 VoltageUnbalWarn Phase to phase voltage imbalance detected
20 PhaseRotationWrn The unit detects the supply voltage phases are rotated
21 UnderFreqWarning Line voltage frequency is below the warning level
22 OverFreqWarning Line voltage frequency has exceeded warning level
23 Warning23
24 Warning24
25 Warning25
26 Warning26
27 Warning27
28 Warning28
29 Warning29
30 Warning30
31 Warning31
32 Warning32
33 UnderKWWarning Total Real Power (kW) is below warning level
34 OverKWWarning Total Real Power (kW) has exceeded warning level
35 UnderKVARConWarn Under Reactive Power Consumed (+kVAR) condition detected
36 OverKVARConWarn Over Reactive Power Consumed (+kVAR) condition detected
37 UnderKVARGenWarn Under Reactive Power Generated (-kVAR) condition detected
38 OverKVARGenWarn Over Reactive Power Generated (-kVAR) condition detected
39 Under Power kVA Total Apparent Power (kVA) is below warning level
40 Over Power kVA Total Apparent Power (kVA) exceeded warning level
41 Under PF Lagging Under Total Power Factor Lagging (-PF) condition detected
42 Over PF Lagging Over Total Power Factor Lagging (-PF) condition detected
43 Under PF Leading Under Total Power Factor Leading (+PF) condition detected
44 Over PF Leading Over Total Power Factor Leading (+PF) condition detected
45 Warning 45
46 Warning 46
47 Warning 47
48 Warning 48
49 Warning49
50 PTC PTC input indicates that the motor stator windings overheated
51 DLXWarning DeviceLogix defined warning was generated
Warning
Code
Warning Text Warning Help Text
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 267
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects Appendix B
52 Warning52
53 Warning53
54 Warning54
55 Warning55
56 ConfigWarning Invalid parameter config. See parameters 38-39 for details
57 Warning57
58 DLXFBTimeoutWarn DeviceLogix Feedback Timeout Trip was detected
59 Warning59
60 PM Starts Number of Starts Warning Level Exceeded
61 PM Oper Hours Operating Hours Warning Level Exceeded
62 Warning62
63 Warning63
64 Warning64
65 InAnMod1Ch00Warn Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 1 exceeded its Warning Level
66 InAnMod1Ch01Warn Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 1 exceeded its Warning Level
67 InAnMod1Ch02Warn Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 1 exceeded its Warning Level
68 InAnMod2Ch00Warn Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 2 exceeded its Warning Level
69 InAnMod2Ch01Warn Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 2 exceeded its Warning Level
70 InAnMod2Ch02Warn Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 2 exceeded its Warning Level
71 InAnMod3Ch00Warn Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 3 exceeded its Warning Level
72 InAnMod3Ch01Warn Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 3 exceeded its Warning Level
73 InAnMod3Ch02Warn Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 3 exceeded its Warning Level
74 InAnMod4Ch00Warn Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 4 exceeded its Warning Level
75 InAnMod4Ch01Warn Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 4 exceeded its Warning Level
76 InAnMod4Ch02Warn Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 4 exceeded its Warning Level
77 Warning77
78 Warning 78
79 Warning 79
80 Warning 80
81 DigitalMod1Warn Digital Expansion Module 1 is not operating properly
82 DigitalMod2Warn Digital Expansion Module 2 is not operating properly
83 DigitalMod3Warn Digital Expansion Module 3 is not operating properly
84 DigitalMod4Warn Digital Expansion Module 4 is not operating properly
85 AnalogMod1Warn Analog Expansion Module 1 is not operating properly
86 AnalogMod2Warn Analog Expansion Module 2 is not operating properly
87 AnalogMod3Warn Analog Expansion Module 3 is not operating properly
88 AnalogMod4Warn Analog Expansion Module 4 is not operating properly
89 Warning89
90 CtlModMismatch Control Module installed does not match the expected type
91 SenseModMismatch Sensing Module installed does not match the expected type
92 CommModMismatch Comms Module installed does not match the expected type
93 OperStatMismatch Operator Station installed does not match expected type
94 DigModMismatch Digital Module installed does not match the expected type
95 AnModMismatch Analog Module installed does not match the expected type
96 Warning96
97 Warning97
98 HardwareFltWarn A hardware fault condition was detected
99 Warning99
Warning
Code
Warning Text Warning Help Text
268 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix B Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
MCC Object — CLASS CODE 0x00C2
A single instance (instance 1) of the MCC Object is supported:
Table 121 - MCC Object Instance Attributes
The common services in Ta ble 122
are implemented for the MCC Object.
Table 122 - MCC Object Common Services
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Range Value
1 Get/Set Mcc Number USINT 0…255 0
2 Get/Set Vertical Section Number USINT 0…255 0
3 Get/Set Starting Section Letter USINT 0…255 65
4 Get/Set Space Factors USINT 0…255 0x3F
5 Get/Set Cabinet Width USINT 0…255 0
6 Get/Set Mcc Number USINT 0…255 0
7 Get Number of Device Inputs USINT
EC1=2
EC2=EC3=EC4=4
EC5=6
8 Get/Set Devices Connected at Inputs Array of USINT 00000000000000
9 Get Number of Device Outputs USINT 2
10 Get/Set Devices Connected at Outputs Array of USINT 0000
Service Code Implemented for: Service Name
Class Instance
0x0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single
0x18 No Yes Get_Member
0x19 No Yes Set_Member
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 269
Appendix C
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
DeviceNet I/O Instances
The E300™ Electronic Overload Relay’s DeviceNet Communication Module supports
the following I/O Instances.
Table 123 - DeviceNet I/O Instances
Table 124 - Instance 51—Basic Overload Input Assembly
Table 125 - Instance 51 Attributes
Instance Name Page
51 Basic Overload Input Assembly 269
100 Datalinks Produced Assembly 270
120 Configuration Assembly - Large Configuration 271
120 Configuration Assembly 272
120 Configuration Assembly for Non-Logix users 281
144 Default Consumed Assembly 282
198 Current Diagnostics Produced Assembly 284
199 All Diagnostics Produced Assembly 289
131 Basic Overload 292
132 Starter Status 294
133 Short Datalink 295
171 DeviceLogix Status 295
172 Analog Input Status 297
186 Network Output Status 299
Bit/Byte Number
Value
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
XTripped
XWarning
X0
Attribute ID Access Rule Member Index Name Data Type Value
1 Get Number of Members in Member List UINT 2
2Get
Member List Array of STRUCT
0
Member Data Description UINT 1
Member Path Size UINT 8
Member Path Packed EPATH 67H & "Tripped"
1
Member Data Description UINT 1
Member Path Size UINT 8
Member Path Packed EPATH 67H & "Warning"
3Get Data UINTSee data format above
4Get Size UINT 1
100 Get Name SHORT_STRING "Trip Warn Status"
270 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix C DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
Table 126 - Instance 100—Datalinks Produced Assembly
Instance 100—Datalinks Produced Assembly
Member Size Path
INTDINT1514131211109876543210
0
0 Reserved for Logix 0 32 1104
1
2
1 Datalink0 1 32 291
3
4
2 Datalink1 2 32 292
5
6
3 Datalink2 3 32 293
7
8
4 Datalink3 4 32 294
9
10
5 Datalink4 5 32 295
11
12
6 Datalink5 6 32 296
13
14
7 Datalink6 7 32 297
15
16
8 Datalink7 8 32 298
17
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 271
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies Appendix C
Table 127 - Instance 100 Attributes
Table 128 - Instance 120—Configuration Assembly - Large Configuration
Attribute ID Access Rule Member Index Name Data Type Value
1 Get Number of Members in Member List UINT 9
2Get
Member List Array of STRUCT
0
Member Data Description UINT 32
Member Path Size UINT 9
Member Path Packed EPATH 68H & "Reserved"
1
Member Data Description UINT 32
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 23 01
2
Member Data Description UINT 32
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 24 01
3
Member Data Description UINT 32
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 25 01
4
Member Data Description UINT 32
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 26 01
5
Member Data Description UINT 32
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 27 01
6
Member Data Description UINT 32
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 28 01
7
Member Data Description UINT 32
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 29 01
8
Member Data Description UINT 32
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 2A 01
3 Get Data UDINT See data format above
4Get Size UINT 36
100 Get Name SHORT_STRING "Datalink Profile"
Instance 120—Configuration Assembly - Large Configuration
Member Size
INTDINT1514131211109876543210
0
0
ConfigAssyRev = 3 Delivery Mechanism Header * 2-1 16
1 Reserved Reserved 4-3 16
2
1
GUID 5 128
3
4
2
5
6
3
7
8
4
9
272 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix C DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
Table 129 - Instance 120—Configuration Assembly
Instance 120—Configuration Assembly
Member Size Param
INTDINT1514131211109876543210
0
0
ConfigAssyRev =2 Delivery Mechanism Header * 2 - 1 16 1100
1
SetOperatingMode 3 8 195
Reserved 4 8 1102
2
1 FLASetting 5 32 171
3
4
2 FLA2Setting 6 32 177
5
6
3
Tri pClass 7 8 172
XOLPTCResetMode 81173
X SingleOrThreePh 9 1 176
X GFFilter 10 1 247
X GFMaxInghibit 11 1 248
X X PhaseRotTrip 12 2 364
XPowerScale131377
XVoltageScale141574
7
OLResetLevel 15 8 174
OLWarningLevel 16 8 175
8
4
Tri pEnableI 17 16 183
9 WarningEnableI 18 16 189
10
5
TripEnableV 19 16 184
11 WarningEnableV 20 16 190
12
6
Tri pEnableP 21 1 6 185
13 WarningEnableP 22 16 191
14
7
Tri pEnableC 23 16 186
15 WarningEnableC 24 16 192
16
8
TripEnableA 25 1 6 187
17 WarningEnableA 26 16 193
18
9
TripHistoryMaskI 27 16 139
19 WarnHistoryMaskI 28 16 145
20
10
TripHistoryMaskV 29 16 140
21 WarnHistoryMaskV 30 16 146
22
11
TripHistoryMaskP 31 16 141
23 WarnHistoryMaskP 32 16 147
24
12
TripHistoryMaskC 33 16 142
25 WarnHistoryMaskC 34 16 148
26
13
TripHistoryMaskA 35 16 143
27 WarnHistoryMaskA 36 16 149
28
14
MismatchAction 37 16 233
29
ControlModuleTyp 38 8 221
SensingModuleTyp 39 8 222
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 273
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies Appendix C
30
15
OperStationType 40 4 224
X X X DigitalMod1Type 41 3 225
X X X DigitalMod2Type 42 3 226
X X X DigitalMod3Type 43 3 227
X X X DigitalMod4Type 44 3 228
31
AnalogMod1Type X X 45 2 229
AnalogMod2Type X X 46 2 230
AnalogMod3Type X X 47 2 231
AnalogMod4Type X X 48 2 232
Reserved 49 8 NA
32
16
Language 50 4 212
OutAAssignment 51 4 202
OuBAssignment 52 4 203
OutCAssignment 53 4 204
33
InPt00Assignment 54 4 196
InPt01Assignment 55 4 197
InPt02Assignment 56 4 198
InPt03Assignment 57 4 199
34
17
InPt04Assignment 58 4 200
InPt05Assignment 59 4 201
ActFLA2wOutput 60 4 209
X EmergencyStartEn 61 1 216
XXX Reserved 62 3 NA
35
StartsPerHour 63 8 205
X OutPt00FnlFltVal 64 1 562
X OutPt01FnlFltVal 65 1 563
X OutPt02FnlFltVal 66 1 564
X OutDig1FnlFltVal 67 1 565
X OutDig2FnlFltVal 68 1 566
X OutDig3FnlFltVal 69 1 567
X OutDig4FnlFltVal 70 1 568
XNetStrtFnlFltVal711573
36
18
StartsInterval 72 16 206
37 PMTotalStarts 73 16 207
38
19
PMOperatingHours 74 16 208
39 FeedbackTimeout 75 16 213
40
20
TransitionDelay 76 16 2 14
41 InterlockDelay 77 16 215
42
21
GroundFaultType 78 8 241
GFInhibitTime 79 8 242
43
GFTripDelay 80 8 243
GFWarningDelay 81 8 245
44
22
GFTripLevel 82 16 244
45 GFWarningLevel 83 16 246
46
23
PLInhibitTime 84 8 239
PLTripDelay 85 8 240
47
StallEnabledTime 86 8 249
FnlFltValStDur 87 8 561
Instance 120—Configuration Assembly
Member Size Param
INTDINT1514131211109876543210
274 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix C DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
48
24
StallTripLevel 88 16 250
49
JamInhibitTime 89 8 251
JamTripDelay 90 8 252
50
25
JamTripLevel 91 16 253
51 JamWarningLevel 92 16 254
52
26
ULInhibitTime 93 8 255
ULTripDelay 94 8 256
53
ULTripLevel 95 8 257
ULWarningLevel 96 8 258
54
27
CIInhibitTime 97 8 259
CITripDelay 98 8 260
55
CITripLevel 99 8 261
CIWarningLevel 100 8 262
56
28
CTPrimary 101 16 263
57 CTSecondary 102 16 264
58
29
UCInhibitTime 103 8 265
L1UCTripDelay 104 8 266
59
L1UCTripLevel 105 8 267
L1UCWarningLevel 1068268
60
30
L2UCTripDelay 107 8 269
L2UCTripLevel 108 8 270
61
L2UCWarningLevel 109 8 271
L3UCTripDelay 110 8 272
62
31
L3UCTripLevel 111 8 273
L3UCWarningLevel 1128274
63
OCInhibitTime 113 8 275
L1OCTripDelay 1148276
64
32
L1OCTripLevel 1158277
L1OCWarningLevel 116 8 278
65
L2OCTripDelay 1178279
L2OCTripLevel 118 8 280
66
33
L2OCWarningLevel 119 8 281
L3OCTripDelay 1208282
67
L3OCTripLevel 1218283
L3OCWarningLevel 122 8 284
68
34
LineLossInhTime 123 8 285
L1LossTripDelay 124 8 286
69
L2LossTripDelay 1258287
L3LossTripDelay 126 8 288
70
35
Datalink0 127 16 291
71 Datalink1 128 16 292
72
36
Datalink2 129 16 293
73 Datalink3 130 16 294
74
37
Datalink4 131 16 295
75 Datalink5 132 16 296
76
38
Datalink6 133 16 297
77 Datalink7 134 16 298
Instance 120—Configuration Assembly
Member Size Param
INTDINT1514131211109876543210
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 275
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies Appendix C
78
39
OutPt00PrFltAct X 135 1 304
OutPt00PrFltVal X 136 1 305
OutPt00ComFltAct X 137 1 306
OutPt00ComFltVal X 138 1 307
OutPt00ComIdlAct X 139 1 308
OutPt00ComIdlVal X 140 1 309
OutPt01PrFltAct X 141 1 310
OutPt01PrFltVal X 142 1 311
X OutPt01ComFltAct 143 1 312
X OutPt01ComFltVal 1441313
X OutPt01ComIdlAct 145 1 314
X OutPt01ComIdlVal 1461315
X OutPt02PrFltAct 147 1 316
X OutPt02PrFltVal 148 1 317
X OutPt02ComFltAct 149 1 318
X OutPt02ComFltVal 1501319
79
OutPt02ComIdlAct X 151 1 320
OutPt02ComIdlVal X 152 1 321
OutDig1PrFltAct X 153 1 322
OutDig1PrFltVal X 154 1 323
OutDig1ComFltAct X 155 1 324
OutDig1ComFltVal X 156 1 325
OutDig1ComIdlAct X 1571326
OutDig1ComIdlVal X 158 1 327
X OutDig2PrFltAct 1591328
X OutDig2PrFltVal 160 1 329
X OutDig2ComFltAct 1611330
X OutDig2ComFltVal 1621331
X OutDig2ComIdlAct 163 1 332
X OutDig2ComIdlVal 164 1 333
X OutDig3PrFltAct 1651334
X OutDig3PrFltVal 166 1 335
80
40
OutDig3ComFltAct X 167 1 336
OutDig3ComFltVal X 168 1 337
OutDig3ComIdlAct X 1691338
OutDig3ComIdlVal X 170 1 339
OutDig4PrFltAct X 171 1 340
OutDig4PrFltVal X 172 1 341
OutDig4ComFltAct X 173 1 342
OutDig4ComFltVal X 174 1 343
X OutDig4ComIdlAct 175 1 344
X OutDig4ComIdlVal 176 1 345
X CommOverride 177 1 346
X NetworkOverride 178 1 347
X NetStrtComFltAct 1791569
X NetStrtComFltVal 1801570
X NetStrtComIdlAct 1811571
X NetStrtComIdlVal 1821572
81 PtDevOutCOSMask 183 16 350
Instance 120—Configuration Assembly
Member Size Param
INTDINT1514131211109876543210
276 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix C DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
82
41
PTPrimary 184 16 353
83 PTSecondary 185 16 354
84
42
VoltageMode 186 8 352
PhRotInhibitTime 187 8 363
85
UVInhibitTime 188 8 355
UVTripDelay 1898356
86
43
UVTripLevel 190 16 357
87 UVWarningLevel 191 16 358
88
44
OVInhibitTime 192 8 359
OVTripDelay 1938360
89 OVTripLevel 194 16 361
90
45
OVWarningLevel 19516362
91
VUBInhibitTime 196 8 365
VUBTripDelay 1978366
92
46
VUBTripLevel 1988367
VUBWarningLevel 199 8 368
93
UFInhibitTime 200 8 369
UFTripDelay 2018370
94
47
UFTripLevel 2028371
UFWarningLevel 2038372
95
OFInhibitTime 204 8 373
OFTripDelay 2058374
96
48
OFTripLevel 2068375
OFWarningLevel 2078376
97
DemandPeriod 208 8 426
NumberOfPeriods 209 8 427
98
49
UWInhibitTime 210 8 378
UWTripDelay 2118379
99
OWInhibitTime 212 8 382
OWTripDelay 2138383
100
50 UWTripLevel 214 32 380
101
102
51 UWWarningLevel 215 32 381
103
104
52 OWTripLevel 216 32 384
105
106
53 OWWarningLevel 217 32 385
107
108
54
UVARCInhibitTime 218 8 386
UVARCTripDelay 2198387
109
OVARCInhibitTime 220 8 390
OVARCTripDelay 2218391
110
55 UVARCTripLevel 222 32 388
111
112
56 UVARCWarnLevel 223 32 389
113
114
57 OVARCTripLevel 224 32 392
115
Instance 120—Configuration Assembly
Member Size Param
INTDINT1514131211109876543210
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 277
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies Appendix C
116
58 OVARCWarnLevel 225 32 393
117
118
59
UVARGInhibitTime 226 8 394
UVARGTripDelay 2278395
119
OVARGInhibitTime 228 8 398
OVARGTripDelay 2298399
120
60 UVARGTripLevel 230 32 396
121
122
61 UVARGWarnLevel 231 32 397
123
124
62 OVARGTripLevel 232 32 400
125
Instance 120 - Configuration Assembly Member Size Param
126
63 OVARGWarnLevel 233 32 401
127
128
64
UVAInhibitTime 234 8 402
UVATripDelay 2358403
129
OVAInhibitTime 236 8 406
OVATripDelay 2378407
130
65 UVATripLevel 238 32 404
131
132
66 UVAWarningLevel 239 32 405
133
134
67 OVATripLevel 240 32 408
135
136
68 OVAWarningLevel 241 32 409
137
138
69
UPFLagInhibTime 242 8 410
UPFLagTripDelay 243 8 411
139
UPFLagTripLevel 244 8 412
UPFLagWarnLevel 245 8 413
140
70
OPFLagInhibTime 246 8 414
OPFLagTripDelay 247 8 415
141
OPFLagTripLevel 248 8 416
OPFLagWarnLevel 249 8 417
142
71
UPFLeadInhibTime 250 8 418
UPFLeadTripDelay 251 8 419
143
UPFLeadTripLevel 252 8 420
UPFLeadWarnLevel 253 8 421
144
72
OPFLeadInhibTime 254 8 422
OPFLeadTripDelay 255 8 423
145
OPFLeadTripDelay 256 8 424
OPFLeadWarnLevel 257 8 425
146
73
Screen1Param1 258 16 428
147 Screen1Param2 259 16 429
148
74
Screen2Param1 260 16 430
149 Screen2Param2 261 16 431
150
75
Screen3Param1 262 16 432
151 Screen3Param2 263 16 433
Instance 120—Configuration Assembly
Member Size Param
INTDINT1514131211109876543210
278 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix C DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
152
76
Screen4Param1 264 16 434
153 Screen4Param2 265 16 435
154
77
DisplayTimeout 266 16 436
155 Reserved 267 16 1103
156
78
26
8
InAMod1C0TripDly 268 8 443
InAMod1C1TripDly
26
9
2698452
157
InAMod1C2TripDly 270 8 461
Reserved 271 8 1102
158
79
InAMod1C0TripLvl 272 16 444
159 InAMod1C0WarnLvl 273 16 445
160
80
InAMod1C1TripLvl 274 16 453
161 InAMod1C1WarnLvl 275 16 454
162
81
InAMod1C2TripLvl 276 16 462
163 InAMod1C2WarnLvl 277 16 463
164
82
InAnMod1Ch00Type 278 5 437
InAnMod1Ch01Type 279 5 446
InAnMod1Ch02Type 280 5 455
X Reserved 281 1 1101
165
OutAnMod1Select 282 8 465
X X X InAMod1Ch0Format 283 3 438
X X X InAMod1C0FiltFrq 284 3 440
X X InAMod1C0OpCktSt 285 2 441
166
83
InAMod1Ch1Format X X X 286 3 447
InAMod1C1FiltFrq X X X 287 3 449
InAMod1C1OpCktSt X X 288 2 450
X X X InAMod1Ch2Format 289 3 456
X X X InAMod1C2FiltFrq 290 3 458
X X InAMod1C2OpCktSt 291 2 459
167
InAMod1C0TmpUnit X 292 1 439
InAnMod1Ch0RTDEn X 293 1 442
InAMod1C1TmpUnit X 294 1 448
InAnMod1Ch1RTDEn X 295 1 451
InAMod1C2TmpUnit X 296 1 457
InAnMod1Ch2RTDEn X 297 1 460
OutAnMod1EfltAct X X 298 2 466
X X OutAnMod1PfltAct 299 2 467
XXXX OutAnMod1Type 300 4 464
X X Reserved 301 2 1101
168
84
InAMod2C0TripDly 302 8 474
InAMod2C1TripDly 303 8 483
169
InAMod2C2TripDly 304 8 492
Reserved 305 8 1102
170
85
InAMod2C0TripLvl 306 16 475
171 InAMod2C0WarnLvl 307 16 476
172
86
InAMod2C1TripLvl 308 16 484
173 InAMod2C1WarnLvl 309 16 485
Instance 120—Configuration Assembly
Member Size Param
INTDINT1514131211109876543210
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 279
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies Appendix C
174
87
InAMod2C2TripLvl 310 16 493
175 InAMod2C2WarnLvl 311 16 494
176
88
InAnMod2Ch00Type 312 5 468
InAnMod2Ch01Type 313 5 477
InAnMod2Ch02Type 314 5 486
X Reserved 315 1 1101
177
OutAnMod2Select 316 8 496
X X X InAMod2Ch0Format 317 3 469
X X X InAMod2C0FiltFrq 318 3 471
X X InAMod2C0OpCktSt 319 2 472
178
89
InAMod2Ch1Format X X X 320 3 478
InAMod2C1FiltFrq X X X 321 3 480
InAMod2C1OpCktSt X X 322 2 481
X X X InAMod2Ch2Format 323 3 487
X X X InAMod2C2FiltFrq 324 3 489
X X InAMod2C2OpCktSt 325 2 490
179
InAMod2C0TmpUnit X 326 1 470
InAnMod2Ch0RTDEn X 327 1 473
InAMod2C1TmpUnit X 328 1 479
InAnMod2Ch1RTDEn X 329 1 482
InAMod2C2TmpUnit X 330 1 488
InAnMod2Ch2RTDEn X 331 1 491
OutAnMod2EfltAct X X 332 2 497
X X OutAnMod2PfltAct 333 2 498
XXXX OutAnMod2Type 334 4 495
X X Reserved 335 2 1101
180
90
InAMod3C0TripDly 336 8 505
InAMod3C1TripDly 337 8 514
181
InAMod3C2TripDly 338 8 523
Reserved 339 8 1102
182
91
InAMod3C0TripLvl 340 16 506
183 InAMod3C0WarnLvl 341 16 507
184
92
InAMod3C1TripLvl 342 16 515
185 InAMod3C1WarnLvl 343 16 516
186
93
InAMod3C2TripLvl 344 16 524
187 InAMod3C2WarnLvl 345 16 525
188
94
InAnMod3Ch00Type 346 5 499
InAnMod3Ch01Type 347 5 508
InAnMod3Ch02Type 348 5 517
XReserved 3491NA
189
OutAnMod3Select 350 8 527
X X X InAMod3Ch0Format 351 3 500
X X X InAMod3C0FiltFrq 352 3 502
X X InAMod3C0OpCktSt 353 2 503
Instance 120—Configuration Assembly
Member Size Param
INTDINT1514131211109876543210
280 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix C DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
190
95
InAMod3Ch1Format X X X 354 3 509
InAMod3C1FiltFrq X X X 355 3 511
InAMod3C1OpCktSt X X 356 2 512
X X X InAMod3Ch2Format 357 3 518
X X X InAMod3C2FiltFrq 358 3 520
X X InAMod3C2OpCktSt 359 2 521
191
InAMod3C0TmpUnit X 360 1 501
InAnMod3Ch0RTDEn X 361 1 504
InAMod3C1TmpUnit X 362 1 510
InAnMod3Ch1RTDEn X 363 1 513
InAMod3C2TmpUnit X 364 1 519
InAnMod3Ch2RTDEn X 365 1 522
OutAnMod3EfltAct X X 366 2 528
X X OutAnMod3PfltAct 367 2 529
XXXX OutAnMod3Type 368 4 526
X X Reserved 369 2 1101
192
96
InAMod4C0TripDly 370 8 536
InAMod4C1TripDly 371 8 545
193
InAMod4C2TripDly 372 8 554
Reserved 373 8 1102
194
97
InAMod4C0TripLvl 374 16 537
195 InAMod4C0WarnLvl 375 16 538
196
98
InAMod4C1TripLvl 376 16 546
197 InAMod4C1WarnLvl 377 16 547
198
99
InAMod4C2TripLvl 378 16 555
199 InAMod4C2WarnLvl 379 16 556
200
100
InAnMod4Ch00Type 380 5 530
InAnMod4Ch01Type 381 5 539
InAnMod4Ch02Type 382 5 548
X Reserved 383 1 1101
201
OutAnMod4Select 384 8 558
X X X InAMod4Ch0Format 385 3 531
X X X InAMod4C0FiltFrq 386 3 533
X X InAMod4C0OpCktSt 387 2 534
Instance 120—Configuration Assembly
Member Size Param
INTDINT1514131211109876543210
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 281
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies Appendix C
Table 130 shows a simplified version of Instance 120 of the Assembly. It is not included
in the EDS file. This version is only available to non-Logix users.
Table 130 - Instance 120—Configuration Assembly (Non-Logix)
202
101
InAMod4Ch1Format X X X 388 3 540
InAMod4C1FiltFrq X X X 389 3 542
InAMod4C1OpCktSt X X 390 2 543
X X X InAMod4Ch2Format 391 3 549
X X X InAMod4C2FiltFrq 392 3 551
X X InAMod4C2OpCktSt 393 2 552
203
InAMod3C0TmpUnit X 394 1 532
InAnMod4Ch0RTDEn X 395 1 535
InAMod4C1TmpUnit X 396 1 541
InAnMod4Ch1RTDEn X 397 1 544
InAMod4C2TmpUnit X 398 1 550
InAnMod4Ch2RTDEn X 399 1 553
OutAnMod4EfltAct X X 400 2 559
X X OutAnMod4PfltAct 401 2 560
XXXX OutAnMod4Type 402 4 557
X X Reserved 403 2 1001
Instance 120—Configuration Assembly
Member Size Param
INTDINT1514131211109876543210
Instance 120—Configuration Assembly (Non-Logix)
Member Size Param
INTDINT1514131211109876543210
0
0
ConfigAssyRev = 1 Reserved 1 16 1002
1 Reserved 2 16 NA
2
1 FLASetting 3 32 171
3
4
3
Tri pClass 4 8 172
XOLPTCResetMode 51173
X SingleOrThreePh 6 1 176
XXXXXX Reserved 7 6 NA
5
OLResetLevel 8 8 174
OLWarningLevel 9 8 175
282 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix C DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
Table 131 - Instance 144—Default Consumed Assembly
Instance 144—Default Consumed Assembly
Member Size Path
INTDINT1514131211109876543210
0
0
OutputStatus0 0 16 Param18
1
NetworkStart1 X 1 Symbolic
NetworkStart2 X 2 Symbolic
TripReset X 3 Symbolic
EmergencyStop X 4 Symbolic
RemoteTrip X 5 Symbolic
Reserved XXX 6 NA
XHMILED1Green 7Symbolic
XHMILED2Green8Symbolic
XHMILED3Green9Symbolic
X HMILED3Red 10 Symbolic
X HMILED4Red 11 Symbolic
X X X Reserved 12 NA
2
1
PtDeviceIns 13 16 Symbolic
3 AnDeviceIns 14 16 Symbolic
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 283
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies Appendix C
Table 132 - Instance 144 Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Member Index Name Data Type Value
1 Get Number of Members in Member List UINT 15
Get
Member List Array of STRUCT
0
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 12 00
1
Member Data Description UINT 1
Member Path Size UINT 14
Member Path Packed EPATH 6DH & "NetworkStart1"
2
Member Data Description UINT 1
Member Path Size UINT 14
Member Path Packed EPATH 6DH & "NetworkStart2"
3
Member Data Description UINT 1
Member Path Size UINT 10
Member Path Packed EPATH 69H & "TripReset"
4
Member Data Description UINT 1
Member Path Size UINT 14
Member Path Packed EPATH 6DH & "EmergencyStop"
5
Member Data Description UINT 1
Member Path Size UINT 11
Member Path Packed EPATH 6AH & "RemoteTrip"
6
Member Data Description UINT 3
Member Path Size UINT 0
Member Path Packed EPATH
7
Member Data Description UINT 1
Get
Member Path Size UINT 13
Member Path Packed EPATH 6CH & "HMILED1Green"
8
Member Data Description UINT 1
Member Path Size UINT 13
Member Path Packed EPATH 6CH & "HMILED2Green"
9
Member Data Description UINT 1
Member Path Size UINT 13
Member Path Packed EPATH 6CH & "HMILED3Green"
10
Member Data Description UINT 1
Member Path Size UINT 11
Member Path Packed EPATH 6AH & "HMILED3Red"
11
Member Data Description UINT 1
Member Path Size UINT 11
Member Path Packed EPATH 6AH & "HMILED4Red"
12
Member Data Description UINT 3
Member Path Size UINT 0
Member Path Packed EPATH
13
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 12
Member Path Packed EPATH 6BH & "PtDeviceIns"
14
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 12
Member Path Packed EPATH 6BH & "AnDeviceIns"
284 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix C DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
Table 133 - Instance 198 Current Diagnostics Produced Assembly
3Get Data UINTSee data format above
4Get Size UINT 8
100 Get Name SHORT_STRING "E300 Consumed"
Attribute ID Access Rule Member Index Name Data Type Value
Instance 198—Current Diagnostics Produced Assembly
Member Size Path
INTDINT1514131211109876543210
0
0 Reserved for Logix 0 32 1104
1
2
1
DeviceStaus0 1 16 20
3 DeviceStaus1 2 16 21
4
2
InputStatus0 3 16 16
5 InputStatus1 4 16 17
6
3
OutputStatus 5 16 18
7OpStationStatus61619
8
4
Tri pStsCurrent 7 16 4
9 WarnStsCurrent 8 16 10
10
5
TripStsVol tage 9 16 5
11 WarnStsVoltage 10 16 11
12
6
TripStsPower 11 16 6
13 WarnStsPower 12 16 12
14
7
TripStsControl 13 16 7
15 WarnStsControl 14 16 13
16
8
Tri pS ts An alo g 15 16 8
17 WarnStsAnalog 16 16 14
18
9
Reserved 17 16 1103
19 MismatchStatus 18 16 40
20
10
ThermUtilizedPct 19 8 1
CurrentImbal 20 8 52
21 AvgPercentFLA 21 16 50
22
11 AverageCurrent 22 32 46
23
24
12 L1Current 23 32 43
25
26
13 L2Current 24 32 44
27
28
14 L3Current 25 32 45
29
30
15
GFCurrent 26 16 51
31 Reserved 27 16 1103
32
16 Datalink0 28 32 291
33
34
17 Datalink1 29 32 292
35
36
18 Datalink2 30 32 293
37
38
19 Datalink3 31 32 294
39
40
20 Datalink4 32 32 295
41
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 285
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies Appendix C
42
21 Datalink5 33 32 296
43
44
22 Datalink6 34 32 297
45
46
23 Datalink7 35 32 298
47
48
24
PtDeviceOuts 36 16 348
49 AnDeviceOuts 37 16 1105
50
25
InAnMod1Ch00 38 16 111
51 InAnMod1Ch01 39 16 112
52
26
InAnMod1Ch02 40 16 113
53 AnalogMod1Status 41 16 123
54
27
InAnMod2Ch00 42 16 114
55 InAnMod2Ch01 43 16 115
56
28
InAnMod2Ch02 44 16 116
57 AnalogMod2Status 45 16 124
58
29
InAnMod3Ch00 46 16 117
59 InAnMod3Ch01 47 16 118
60
30
InAnMod3Ch02 48 16 119
61 AnalogMod3Status 49 16 125
62
31
InAnMod4Ch00 50 16 120
63 InAnMod4Ch01 51 16 121
64
32
InAnMod4Ch02 52 16 122
65 AnalogMod4Status 53 16 126
Instance 198—Current Diagnostics Produced Assembly
Member Size Path
INTDINT1514131211109876543210
286 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix C DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
Table 134 - Instance 198 Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Member Index Name Data Type Value
1 Get Number of Members in Member List UINT 54
Get
Member List Array of STRUCT
0
Member Data Description UINT 32
Member Path Size UINT 9
Member Path Packed EPATH 68H & "Reserved"
1
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 14 00
2
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 15 00
3
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 10 00
4
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 11 00
5
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 12 00
6
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 13 00
7
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 04 00
8
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 0A 00
9
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 05 00
10
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 0B 00
11
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 06 00
12
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 0C 00
13
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 07 00
14
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 0D 00
15 Member Data Description UINT 16
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 287
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies Appendix C
Get
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 08 00
16
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 0E 00
17
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 0
Member Path Packed EPATH
18
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 28 00
19
Member Data Description UINT 8
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 01 00
20
Member Data Description UINT 8
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 34 00
21
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 32 00
22
Member Data Description UINT 32
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 2E 00
23
Member Data Description UINT 32
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 32 0F 00 25 2B 00
24
Member Data Description UINT 32
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 2C 00
25
Member Data Description UINT 32
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 2D 00
26
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 33 00
27
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 0
Member Path Packed EPATH
28
Member Data Description UINT 32
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 23 01
29
Member Data Description UINT 32
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 24 01
30
Member Data Description UINT 32
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 25 01
31
Member Data Description UINT 32
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 26 01
Attribute ID Access Rule Member Index Name Data Type Value
288 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix C DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
Get
32
Member Data Description UINT 32
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 27 23 01
33
Member Data Description UINT 32
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 28 01
34
Member Data Description UINT 32
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 29 01
35
Member Data Description UINT 32
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 2A 01
36
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 5C 01
37
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 13
Member Path Packed EPATH 6CH & "AnDeviceOuts"
38
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 6F 00
39
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 70 00
40
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 71 00
41
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 7B 00
42
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 72 00
43
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 73 00
44
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 74 00
45
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 7C 00
46
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 75 00
47
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 76 00
Attribute ID Access Rule Member Index Name Data Type Value
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 289
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies Appendix C
Table 135 - Instance 199—All Diagnostics Produced Assembly
Get
48
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 77 00
49
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 7D 00
50
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 78 00
51
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 79 00
52
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 7A 00
53
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 7E 00
3Get Data UINTSee data format above
4 Get Size UINT 132
100 Get Name SHORT_STRING "Current Diags"
Attribute ID Access Rule Member Index Name Data Type Value
Instance 199—All Diagnostics Produced Assembly
Member Size Path
INTDINT1514131211109876543210
0
0 Reserved for Logix 0 32 1104
1
2
1
DeviceStaus0 1 16 20
3 DeviceStaus1 2 16 21
4
2
InputStatus0 3 16 16
5 InputStatus1 4 16 17
6
3
OutputStatus 5 16 18
7OpStationStatus61619
8
4
Tri pStsCurrent 7 16 4
9 WarnStsCurrent 8 16 10
10
5
TripStsVol tage 9 16 5
11 WarnStsVoltage 10 16 11
12
6
TripStsPower 11 16 6
13 WarnStsPower 12 16 12
14
7
TripStsControl 13 16 7
15 WarnStsControl 14 16 13
16
8
Tri pS ts An alo g 15 16 8
17 WarnStsAnalog 16 16 14
18
9
Reserved 17 16 1104
19 18 16 40
20
10
ThermUtilizedPct 19 8 1
CurrentImbalance 20 8 52
21 AvgPercentFLA 21 16 50
22
11 AverageCurrent 22 32 46
23
290 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix C DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
24
12 L1Current 23 32 43
25
26
13 L2Current 24 32 44
27
28
14 L3Current 25 32 45
29
30
15
GFCurrent 26 16 51
31 Reserved 27 16 1103
32
16
AvgVoltageLtoL 28 16 56
33 L1toL2Voltage 29 16 53
34
17
L2toL3Voltage 30 16 54
35 L3toL1Voltage 31 16 55
36
18 TotalRealPower 32 32 67
37
38
19 TotalReactivePwr 33 32 71
39
40
20 TotalApparentPwr 34 32 75
41
42
21
TotalPowerFactor
35 32 79
43 Reserved
44
22 Datalink0 36 32 291
45
46
23 Datalink1 37 32 292
47
48
24 Datalink2 38 32 293
49
50
25 Datalink3 39 32 294
51
52
26 Datalink4 40 32 295
53
54
27 Datalink5 41 32 296
55
56
28 Datalink6 42 32 297
57
58
29 Datalink7 43 32 298
59
60
30
PtDeviceOuts 44 16 348
61 AnDeviceOuts 45 16 1105
62
31
InAnMod1Ch00 46 16 111
63 InAnMod1Ch01 47 16 112
64
32
InAnMod1Ch02 48 16 113
65 AnalogMod1Status 49 16 123
66
33
InAnMod2Ch00 50 16 114
67 InAnMod2Ch01 51 16 115
68
34
InAnMod2Ch02 52 16 116
69 AnalogMod2Status 53 16 124
70
35
InAnMod3Ch00 54 16 117
71 InAnMod3Ch01 55 16 118
Instance 199—All Diagnostics Produced Assembly
Member Size Path
INTDINT1514131211109876543210
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 291
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies Appendix C
Table 136 - Instance 199 Attributes
72
36
InAnMod3Ch02 56 16 119
73 AnalogMod3Status 57 16 125
74
37
InAnMod4Ch00 58 16 120
75 InAnMod4Ch01 59 16 121
76
38
InAnMod4Ch02 60 16 122
77 AnalogMod4Status 61 16 126
Instance 199—All Diagnostics Produced Assembly
Member Size Path
INTDINT1514131211109876543210
Attribute ID Access Rule Member Index Name Data Type Value
1 Get Number of Members in Member List UINT 62
Get
Member List Array of STRUCT
0…27
Member Data Description
Save as members 0…27 in assembly
instance 198
Member Path Size
Member Path
28
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 38 00
29
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 35 00
30
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 36 00
31
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 37 00
32
Member Data Description UINT 32
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 43 00
33
Member Data Description UINT 32
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 47 00
34
Member Data Description UINT 32
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 4B 00
35
Member Data Description UINT 32
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 4F 00
36…61
Member Data Description
Same as members 28…53 from assembly
instance 198 above
Member Path Size
Member Path
3Get Data UINTSee data format above
4 Get Size UINT 156
100 Get Name SHORT_STRING "All Diags"
292 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix C DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
Table 137 - Instance 131—Basic Overload
Instance 131—Basic Overload
Member Size Path
INTDINT1514131211109876543210
0
0
Device Status0 0 16 20
1 Device Status1 1 16 21
2
1
Input Status 0 2 16 16
3 Input Status 1 3 16 17
4
2
Output Status 4 16 18
5 OpStation Status 5 16 19
6
3
Reserved % Thermal Utilized 6 8 1
7 Average %FLA 7 16 50
8
4 Average Current 8 32 46
9
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 293
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies Appendix C
Table 138 - Instance 131 Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Member Index Name Data Type Value
1 Get Number of Members in Member List UINT 10
Get
Member List Array of STRUCT
0
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 14 00
1
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 15 00
2
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 10 00
3
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 11 00
4
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 12 00
5
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 13 00
6
Member Data Description UINT 8
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 01 00
7
Member Data Description UINT 8
Member Path Size UINT 0
Member Path Packed EPATH
8
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 32 00
9
Member Data Description UINT 32
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 2E 00
3Get Data UINTSee data format above
4Get Size UINT 20
100 Get Name SHORT_STRING "Basic Overload"
294 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix C DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
Table 139 - Instance 132—Starter Status
Table 140 - Instance 132 Attributes
Instance 132—Starter Status
Member Size Path
INTDINT1514131211109876543210
0
0
Device Status0 0 16 20
1 Device Status1 1 16 21
2
1
Input Status 0 2 16 16
3 Input Status 1 3 16 17
4
2 L1 Current 4 32 43
5
6
3 L2 Current 5 32 44
7
8
4 L3 Current 6 32 45
9
Attribute ID Access Rule Member Index Name Data Type Value
1 Get Number of Members in Member List UINT 7
Get
Member List Array of STRUCT
0
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 14 00
1
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 15 00
2
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 10 00
3
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 11 00
4
Member Data Description UINT 32
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 2B 00
5
Member Data Description UINT 32
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 2C 00
6
Member Data Description UINT 32
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 2D 00
3Get Data UINTSee data format above
4 Get Size UINT 20 (0x14)
100 Get Name SHORT_STRING "Basic Status"
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 295
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies Appendix C
Table 141 - Instance 133—Short Datalink
Table 142 - Instance 133 Attributes
Table 143 - Instance 171—DeviceLogix Status
Instance 133—Short Datalink
Member Size Path
INTDINT1514131211109876543210
0
0
Device Status0 0 16 20
1DeviceStatus111621
2
1 Datalink0 2 32 291
3
4
2 Datalink1 3 32 292
5
6
3 Datalink2 4 32 293
7
8
4 Datalink3 5 32 294
9
Attribute ID Access Rule Member Index Name Data Type Value
1 Get Number of Members in Member List UINT 6
Get
Member List Array of STRUCT
0
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 14 00
1
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 15 00
2
Member Data Description UINT 32
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 23 01
3
Member Data Description UINT 32
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 24 01
4
Member Data Description UINT 32
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 25 01
5
Member Data Description UINT 32
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 26 01
3 Get Data UINT See data format above
4 Get Size UINT 20 (0x14)
100 Get Name SHORT_STRING "Short Datalink"
Instance 171—DeviceLogix Status
Member Size Path
INTDINT1514131211109876543210
0
0
Device Status0 0 16 20
1 Device Status1 1 16 21
2
1
Input Status 0 2 16 16
3 Input Status 1 3 16 17
4
2
Output Status 4 16 18
5 OpStation Status 5 16 19
6Network Output616348
296 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix C DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
Table 144 - Instance 171 Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Member Index Name Data Type Value
1 Get Number of Members in Member List UINT 7
Get
Member List Array of STRUCT
0
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 14 00
1
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 15 00
2
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 10 00
3
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 11 00
4
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 12 00
5
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 13 00
6
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 5C 01
3Get Data UINTSee data format above
4Get Size UINT 14 (0x0E)
100 Get Name SHORT_STRING "DeviceLogix Stat"
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 297
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies Appendix C
Table 145 - Instance 172—Analog Input Status
Table 146 - Instance 172 Attributes
Instance 172—Analog Input Status
Member Size Path
INTDINT1514131211109876543210
0
0
Device Status0 0 16 20
1 Device Status1 1 16 21
2
1
Input Status 0 2 16 16
3 Input Status 1 3 16 17
4
2
Output Status 4 16 18
5 OpStation Status 5 16 19
6
3
AnalogStatus1 6 16 123
7 AnalogStatus 2 7 16 124
8
4
AnalogStatus3 8 16 125
9 AnalogStatus 4 9 16 126
10
5
AnalogInput11 10 16 111
11 AnalogInput12 11 16 112
12
6
AnalogInput13 12 16 113
13 AnalogInput21 13 16 114
14
7
AnalogInput22 14 16 115
15 AnalogInput23 15 16 116
16
8
AnalogInput31 16 16 117
17 AnalogInput32 17 16 118
18
9
AnalogInput33 18 16 119
19 AnalogInput41 19 16 120
20
10
AnalogInput42 20 16 121
21 AnalogInput43 21 16 122
Attribute ID Access Rule Member Index Name Data Type Value
1 Get Number of Members in Member List UINT 22
Get
Member List Array of STRUCT
0
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 14 00
1
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 15 00
2
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 10 00
3
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 11 00
4
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 12 00
5
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 13 00
6 Member Data Description UINT 16
298 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix C DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 7B 00
7
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 7C 00
8
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 7D 00
9
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 7E 00
10
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 6F 00
11
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 70 00
12
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 71 00
13
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 72 00
14
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 73 00
15
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 74 00
16
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 75 00
17
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 76 00
18
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 77 00
19
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 78 00
20
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 79 00
21
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 7A 00
3Get Data UINTSee data format above
4Get Size UINT 44 (0x2C)
100 Get Name SHORT_STRING "Input Status"
Attribute ID Access Rule Member Index Name Data Type Value
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018 299
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies Appendix C
Table 147 - Instance 186—Network Output Status
Table 148 - Instance 186 Attributes
Instance 186—Network Output Status
Member Size Path
INTDINT1514131211109876543210
0
0
Device Status0 0 16 20
1 Device Status1 1 16 21
2Network Output216348
Attribute ID Access Rule Member Index Name Data Type Value
1 Get Number of Members in Member List UINT 3
Get
Member List Array of STRUCT
0
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 14 00
1
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 15 00
2
Member Data Description UINT 16
Member Path Size UINT 6
Member Path Packed EPATH 21 0F 00 25 5C 01
3Get Data UINTSee data format above
4Get Size UINT 6
100 Get Name SHORT_STRING "Network OutpSts"
300 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix C DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
Notes:
Rockwell Automation Publication XXXX-X.X.X - Month Year 301
Index
Symbols
% TCU 155
% TCU, clear 153
A
add-on modules 21
expansion bus power supply
23
expansion I/O 21
operator station 22
administration mode.See modes
advisory LEDs 207
power 207
trip/warn 209, 212
all, clear 154
analog I/O expansion modules
41
analog module 1 47
input channels 42
output channel 45
analog input channels 42
analog module 1 147
analog monitor 161
analog output channel 45
analog-based protection 146
analog module 1 147
apparent power
L1 159
L2 159
L3 159
total 159
apparent power protection 139
applications 24
assembly object
class code 0x0004 230
average current 157
average L-L voltage 157
average L-N voltage 158
average percent FLA 157
C
CIP objects 227, 269
analog input point object,
class code 0x000A
251
assembly object, class code
0x0004 230
base energy object, class
code 0x004E 256
connection object, class
code 0x0005 246
control supervisor object,
class code 0x0029
255
discrete input point object,
class code 0x0008
249
discrete output group ob-
ject, class code
0x001E 254
discrete output point object,
class code 0x0009
250
DPI fault object, class code
0x0097 261
DPI warning object, class
code 0x0098 264
electrical energy object,
class code 0x004F
257
identity object, class code
0x0001 227
instance 120, configuration
assembly rev. 1 242
instance 120, configuration
assembly rev. 2 233
instance 144, default con-
sumed assembly 242
instance 198, current diag-
nostics produced as-
sembly 242
instance 199, diagnostics
produced assembly
244
instance 2 231
instance 50 232
mcc, class code 0x00C2 268
message router, class code
0x0002 230
overload object, class code
0x002c 255
parameter group object,
class code 0x0010
253
parameter object, class code
0x000F 252
302 Rockwell Automation Publication XXXX-X.X.X - Month Year
Index
wall clock time object, class
code 0x008B 260
clear all 154
clear command 153
% TCU 153
all 154
history logs 153
kVAh 153
kVARh 153
kWh 153
max. kVA demand 153
max. kVAR demand 153
max. kW 153
operating statistics 153
combatibility
firmware 201
commands 149
clear 153
configuration preset 149
trip reset 149
communication module
description 21
communication options
overview 19
configuration
e-mail 182
system 31
configuration preset 149
factory defaults 149
configuration states
network start 50
output relay 36
output relay communication
fault mode 37
output relay communication
idle mode 38
output relay protection fault
mode 37
contactor feedback protection
145
control module
description 20
control module ID 156
control trip status 155
control warning status 155
control-based protection 142
contactor feedback 145
devicelogix 143
expansion bus fault 145
hardware fault 145
nonvolatile storage fault
145
operator station trip 143
preventive maintenance 144
remote trip 144
start inhibit 144
test mode trip 145
test trip 143
thermistor 143
current
average 157
L1 157
L2 157
L3 157
current imbalance 157
current imbalance protection
127
current monitor 157
average current 157
average percent FLA 157
current imbalance 157
ground fault current 157
L1 current 157
L1 percent FLA 157
L2 current 157
L2 percent FLA 157
L3 current 157
L3 percent FLA 157
current trip status 155
current warning status 155
current-based protection 23,
119
current imbalance 127
ground fault current 124
jam 126
line loss 129
line overcurrent 128
line undercurrent 128
overload 120
phase loss 123
stall 125
underload 126
D
day 156
Rockwell Automation Publication XXXX-X.X.X - Month Year 303
Index
device configuration policy 35
device modes 31
device monitor 155
control module ID 156
control trip status 155
control warning status 155
current trip status 155
current warning status 155
day 156
device status 0 156
device status 1 156
expansion digital module ID
156
firmware revision number
156
hour 156
input status 0 155
input status 1 156
invalid configuration cause
156
invalid configuration pa-
rameter 156
minute 156
mismatch status 156
month 156
operating time 156
operator station ID 156
operator station status 156
output status 156
percent thermal capacity
utilized 155
power trip status 155
power warning status 155
second 156
sensing module ID 156
starts available 156
starts counter 156
time to reset 155
time to start 156
time to trip 155
voltage trip status 155
voltage warning status 155
year 156
device reset policy 35
device status 0 156
device status 1 156
DeviceLogix 167
output relay overrides 167
programming 168
devicelogix protection 143
DeviceNet Communication
Module 21, 269
DeviceNet Communications
Module 9
diagnostic information
overview 19
diagnostic station 25
display timeout 41
navigation keys 25
parameter display 25
user-defined screens 41
display sequence 29
programmable 29
stopping 30
display timeout 41
E
editing parameters 177
EDS file
download 201
installation 201
EDS file installation
download 201
electronic data sheet
download 201
installation 201
e-mail configuration 182
e-mail/text messaging 181
configuration 182
limitations 184
text notification 184
emergency start 40
energy monitor 159
kVA demand 161
kVAh 10^0 160
kVAh 10^-3 160
kVAh 10^3 160
kVAh 10^6 160
kVAh 10^9 160
kVAR demand 161
kVARh consumed 10^0 160
kVARh consumed 10^-3
160
kVARh consumed 10^3 160
kVARh consumed 10^6 160
304 Rockwell Automation Publication XXXX-X.X.X - Month Year
Index
kVARh consumed 10^9 160
kVARh generated 10^0 160
kVARh generated 10^-3
160
kVARh generated 10^3 160
kVARh generated 10^6 160
kVARh generated 10^9 160
kVARh net 10^0 160
kVARh net 10^-3 160
kVARh net 10^3 160
kVARh net 10^6 160
kVARh net 10^9 160
kW demand 161
kWh 10^0 159
kWh 10^-3 160
kWh 10^3 159
kWh 10^6 159
kWh 10^9 159
max. kVA demand 161
max. kVAR demand 161
max. kW demand 161
ethernet/IP communications
169
EDS file installation 201
e-mail/text 181
I/O messaging 179
network design 169
setting IP network address
170
view and configure parame-
ters 175
ethernet/IP information 227,
269
CIP objects 227, 269
expansion bus
fault 39
expansion bus fault 145
expansion digital module ID
156
expansion module
digital I/O 33
expansion modules
analog I/O 41
F
factory defaults 149
firmware
updating 201
firmware compatibility 201
firmware revision number 156
firmware update policy 35
firmware updates 201
compatibility 201
frequency 158
frequency protection 133
FRN See firmware revision
number 156
G
ground fault current 157
ground fault current protection
124
ground fault current-based pro-
tection 24
H
hardware fault 145
history logs, clear 153
hour 156
I
I/O assignments 35
input Pt00 35
input Pt01 36
input Pt02 36
input Pt03 36
input Pt04 36
input Pt05 36
output Pt00 36
output Pt01 36
output Pt02 36
I/O messaging 179
identity object
class code 0x0001 227
input Pt00 assignment 35
input Pt01 assignment 36
input Pt02 assignment 36
input Pt03 assignment 36
input Pt04 assignment 36
input Pt05 assignment 36
input status 0 155
input status 1 156
introduction to operating modes
52
invalid configuration cause 156
invalid configuration mode.See
modes
invalid configuration parameter
Rockwell Automation Publication XXXX-X.X.X - Month Year 305
Index
156
J
jam protection 126
K
kVA demand 161
kVAh 10^0 160
kVAh 10^-3 160
kVAh 10^3 160
kVAh 10^6 160
kVAh 10^9 160
kVAh, clear 153
kVAR demand 161
kVARh consumed 10^0 160
kVARh consumed 10^-3 160
kVARh consumed 10^3 160
kVARh consumed 10^6 160
kVARh consumed 10^9 160
kVARh generated 10^0 160
kVARh generated 10^-3 160
kVARh generated 10^3 160
kVARh generated 10^6 160
kVARh generated 10^9 160
kVARh net 10^0 160
kVARh net 10^-3 160
kVARh net 10^3 160
kVARh net 10^6 160
kVARh net 10^9 160
KVARh, clear 153
kW demand 161
kWh 10^0 159
kWh 10^-3 160
kWh 10^3 159
kWh 10^6 159
kWh 10^9 159
kWh, clear 153
L
L1 apparent power 159
L1 current 157
L1 percent FLA 157
L1 power factor 159
L1 reactive power 158
L1 real power 158
L1-L2 voltage 157
trip snapshot 166
L1-N voltage 157
L2 apparent power 159
L2 current 157
L2 percent FLA 157
L2 power factor 159
L2 reactive power 158
L2 real power 158
L2-L3 voltage 157
trip snapshot 166
L2-N voltage 158
L3 apparent power 159
L3 current 157
L3 percent FLA 157
L3 power factor 159
L3 reactive power 158
L3 real power 158
L3-L1 voltage 157
trip snapshot 166
L3-N voltage 158
language 41
LEDs
advisory 207
power 207
trip/warn 209, 212
troubleshooting 207
line loss protection 129
line overcurrent protection 128
line undercurrent protection 128
linear list navigation 26
M
max. kVA demand 161
max. kVA demand, clear 153
max. kVAR demand 161
max. kVAR demand, clear 153
max. kW demand 161
max. kW, clear 153
message router
class code 0x0002 230
messaging
e-mail/text 181
I/O 179
metering and diagnostics 155
analog monitor 161
current monitor 157
device monitor 155
energy monitor 159
power monitor 158
trip snapshot 166
trip/warning history 161
voltage monitor 157
306 Rockwell Automation Publication XXXX-X.X.X - Month Year
Index
minute 156
mismatch status 156
modes
administration 31
invalid configuration 32
ready 31
run 32
test 32
modular design
overview 18
module description
communication 21
control 20
sensing 19
monitor operating mode 117
custom 118
month 156
N
network
design 169
network address
setting 170
network parameters
assign via BOOTP/DHCP
utility 171
network start configuration
states 50
communication fault modes
51
communication idle modes
51
non-reversing starter operating
modes 57
custom 79
local I/O, three-wire control
66
local I/O, three-wire control
with feedback 68
local I/O, two-wire control
63
local I/O, two-wire control
with feedback 65
network 57
network and local I/O with
feedback, three-wire
control 77
network and local I/O,
three-wire control
76
network and local I/O, two-
wire control 72
network and local I/O, two-
wire control with
feedback 74
network and operator sta-
tion 69
network and operator sta-
tion with feedback
71
network with feedback 58
operator station 60
operator station with feed-
back 62
nonvolatile storage fault 145
notification
text 184
O
operating modes 53
introduction 52
non-reversing starter 57
overload 53
reversing starter 80
two-speed starter 98
operating statistics, clear 153
operating time 156
operation
system 31
operator station ID 156
operator station status 156
operator station trip 143
option match 32
action 35
analog I/O expansion mod-
ule 1 type 34
analog I/O expansion mod-
ule 3 type 34
analog I/O expansion mod-
ule 4 type 35
communication module
type 33
control module type 33
digital I/O expansion mod-
ule 1 type 33
digital I/O expansion mod-
Rockwell Automation Publication XXXX-X.X.X - Month Year 307
Index
ule 3 type 34
digital I/O expansion mod-
ule 4 type 34
enable option match protec-
tion trip 32
enable option match protec-
tion warning 32
operator station type 33
sensing module type 33
output Pt00 assignment 36
output Pt01 assignment 36
output Pt02 assignment 36
output relay configuration states
36
communication fault mode
37
communication idle mode
38
protection fault mode 37
output relay overrides 167
output status 156
overload operating modes 53
custom 56
local I/O 56
network 54
operator station 55
overload protection 120
override
output relay 167
overview
communication options 19
diagnostic information 19
modular design 18
simplified wiring 19
overvoltage protection 132
P
parameter
display 25
editing 28
group navigation 25
linear list navigation 26
system info 27
parameters
editing 177
view and configure 175
viewing 175
percent FLA
average 157
L1 157
L2 157
L3 157
percent thermal capacity uti-
lized 155
phase loss protection 123
phase rotation 158
phase rotation protection 133
policy
device configuration 35
device reset 35
firmware update 35
security 35
security configuration 35
power factor
L1 159
L2 159
L3 159
total 159, 166
power factor protection 140
power LED
troubleshooting 207
power monitor 158
L1 apparent power 159
L1 power factor 159
L1 reactive power 158
L1 real power 158
L2 apparent power 159
L2 power factor 159
L2 reactive power 158
L2 real power 158
L3 apparent power 159
L3 power factor 159
L3 reactive power 158
L3 real power 158
power scale 158
total apparent power 159
total power factor 159
total reactive power 159
total real power 158
power scale 158
power trip status 155
power warning status 155
power-based protection 134
apparent power 139
power factor 140
308 Rockwell Automation Publication XXXX-X.X.X - Month Year
Index
reactive power 137
real power 136
preventive maintenance 144
programming
DeviceLogix 168
protection
current based 23
ground fault current based
24
power based 24
thermal based 24
voltage based 24
protection features 23
protective trip and warning
functions 119
analog based 146
control 142
current-based 119
power 134
voltage based 129
R
reactive power
L1 158
L2 158
L3 158
total 159, 166
reactive power protection 137
ready mode.See modes
real power
apparent 166
L1 158
L2 158
L3 158
total 158, 166
real power protection 136
remote trip 144
reset trip 211
reversing starter operating
modes 80
custom 97
local I/O, three-wire control
90
local I/O, two-wire control
87
local I/O, two-wire control
with feedback 89
network 80
network and operator sta-
tion 92
network and operator sta-
tion, three-wire con-
trol 95
network and operator sta-
tion, two-wire con-
trol 94
network with feedback 81
operator station 83
operator station with feed-
back 85
run mode.See modes
S
screens
trip and warning 30
second 156
security configuration policy 35
security policy 35
sensing module
description 19
sensing module ID 156
setting IP network address 170
assign network parameters
via BOOTP/ DHCP
utility 171
EtherNet/IP node address
selection switches
170
simplified wiring
overview 19
stall protection 125
start inhibit protection 144
starts available 156
starts counter 156
system configuration 31
system operation 31
T
test mode trip 145
test mode.See modes
test trip 143
text notification 184
thermal-based protection 24
thermistor protection 143
time to reset 155
time to start 156
time to trip 155
Rockwell Automation Publication XXXX-X.X.X - Month Year 309
Index
total apaprent power 166
total apparent power 159
total power factor 159, 166
total reactive power 159, 166
total real power 158, 166
trip
reset 211
trip and warning screens 30
trip history 161
trip reset 149
trip snapshot 166
L1-L2 voltage 166
L2-L3 voltage 166
L3-L1 voltage 166
total apparent power 166
total power factor 166
total reactive power 166
total real power 166
trip/warn LED
troubleshooting 209
troubleshooting procedure
212
trip/warning history 161
trip history 161
warning history 164
troubleshooting 207
advisory LEDs 207
power LED 207
trip reset 211
trip/warn LED 209
trip/warn LED procedure
212
two-speed starter operating
modes 98
custom 116
local I/O, three-wire control
109
local I/O, two-wire control
106
local I/O, two-wire with
feedback 108
network 99
network and local I/O,
three-wire control
115
network and local I/O, two-
wire control 113
network and operator sta-
tion 111
network with feedback 100
operator station 102
operator station with feed-
back 104
U
underload protection 126
undervoltage protection 131
updating firmware 201
user-defined screens 41
V
view and configure parameters
175
editing 177
viewing 175
voltage
average L-L 157
average L-N 158
imbalance 158
L1-L2 157
L1-N 157
L2-L3 157
L2-N 158
L3-L1 157
L3-N 158
voltage- and power-based pro-
tection 24
voltage imbalabce protection
132
voltage imbalance 158
voltage monitor 157
average L-L voltage 157
average L-N voltage 158
frequency 158
L1-L2 voltage 157
L1-N voltage 157
L2-L3 voltage 157
L2-N voltage 158
L3-L1 voltage 157
L3-N voltage 158
phase rotation 158
voltage imbalance 158
voltage trip status 155
voltage warning status 155
voltage-based protection 129
frequency 133
Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Supersedes Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015 Copyright © 2018 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.
Rockwell Automation Support
Use the following resources to access support information.
Documentation Feedback
Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better. If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document, complete the
HowAre We Doing? form at http://literature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/du/ra-du002_-en-e.pdf
.
Technical Support Center
Knowledgebase Articles, How-to Videos, FAQs, Chat, User
Forums, and Product Notification Updates.
https://rockwellautomation.custhelp.com/
Local Technical Support Phone Numbers Locate the phone number for your country. http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/support/get-support-now.page
Direct Dial Codes
Find the Direct Dial Code for your product. Use the code to
route your call directly to a technical support engineer.
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/support/direct-dial.page
Literature Library
Installation Instructions, Manuals, Brochures, and
Technical Data.
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/literature-library/overview.page
Product Compatibility and Download
Center (PCDC)
Get help determining how products interact, check
features and capabilities, and find associated firmware.
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/support/pcdc.page
.
Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A.Ş., Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat:6 34752 İçerenköy, İstanbul, Tel: +90 (216) 5698400
Rockwell Automation maintains current product environmental information on its website at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/about-us/sustainability-ethics/product-environmental-compliance.page.
Allen-Bradley, CopyCat, Connected Components Workbench, EtherNet/IP, E300, DeviceLogix, Logix5000, Rockwell Automation, Rockwell Software, RSLogix, RSNetworx, and Studio 5000 are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.
